The URL can be used to link to this page

LIBRARY BOARD Packet - 11/21/2017 CITY OF MUSKEGO LIBRARY BOARD AGENDA November 21, 2017 5:00 PM Library Conference Room, S73 W16663 Janesville Road CALL TO ORDER PLEDGE OF ALLEGIANCE ROLL CALL STATEMENT OF PUBLIC NOTICE PUBLIC COMMENT CONSENT AGENDA 1. Approval of Minutes from October 17, 2017 2. Library Financial Reports from October, 2017 PRESIDENT’S REPORT Information DIRECTOR’S REPORT Information UNFINISHED BUSINESS Discussion update and possible action may be taken on any or all of the following: NEW BUSINESS Discussion update and possible action may be taken on any or all of the following: 1. Drawings and specifications for Children's Area Renovation 2. Review Trustee Essentials Chapter 17: Membership in the Library System 3. 2018 Annual Addendum to the Bridges Library System Member Library & CAFE Agreement 4. Review Annual Library Board Timeline COMMUNICATIONS AND MISCELLANEOUS BUSINESS AS AUTHORIZED BY LAW ADJOURNMENT NOTICE PLEASE NOTE: It is possible that members of and possibly a quorum of members of other governmental bodies of the municipality may be in attendance at the above-mentioned meeting to gather information; no action will be taken by any governmental body at the above-stated meeting other than the governmental body specifically referred to above in this notice. Upon reasonable notice, efforts will be made to accommodate the needs of disabled individuals through appropriate aids and services. For additional information or to request this service, contact Muskego City Hall, (262) 679-4100. 10/26/2017 sireapps.cityofmuskego.org/Meetings/cache/6/vupljadl5v3c2wxk4fzrl0uf/79410262017120342324.htm http://sireapps.cityofmuskego.org/Meetings/cache/6/vupljadl5v3c2wxk4fzrl0uf/79410262017120342324.htm 1/2 Unapproved CITY OF MUSKEGO LIBRARY BOARD MINUTES October 17, 2017 5:00 PM Library Conference Room, S73 W16663 JANESVILLE RD CALL TO ORDER President Robertson called the meeting to order at 5:03pm. PLEDGE OF ALLEGIANCE ROLL CALL Present were Trustees Robertson, Konkel, Tomaszewski, Stuart, Keil, Darkow, Alderman Borgman. Interim Director Saylor was also present. Excused were Trustees Schaefer and Heinowski. STATEMENT OF PUBLIC NOTICE Interim Director Saylor stated that the meeting was noticed in accordance with Wisconsin Public Meeting Law. PUBLIC COMMENT City Residents and Taxpayers Only – Speakers will be limited to making comments related to all agenda items excluding closed session items relating to employment and labor issues. Comments will be limited to three minutes per speaker per agenda item. There will be no discussion by/with the Library Board during Public Comment APPROVAL OF MINUTES from September 19, 2017 Ald. Borgman made a motion to approve the minutes from September 19, 2017, Trustee Tomaszewski seconded. Motion Passed 7 in favor. LIBRARY FINANCIAL REPORTS from September 2017 Trustee Darkow made a motion to place on file the Library financial reports from September 2017, Ald. Borgman seconded. Motion Passed 7 in favor. PRESIDENT’S REPORT Information DIRECTOR’S REPORT Information UNFINISHED BUSINESS Discussion update and possible action may be taken on any or all of the following: NEW BUSINESS Discussion update and possible action may be taken on any or all of the following: 10/26/2017 sireapps.cityofmuskego.org/Meetings/cache/6/vupljadl5v3c2wxk4fzrl0uf/79410262017120342324.htm http://sireapps.cityofmuskego.org/Meetings/cache/6/vupljadl5v3c2wxk4fzrl0uf/79410262017120342324.htm 2/2 Resolution #003-2017 - Approval of Amendment between the Muskego Public Library and FEH Associates, Inc., DBA FEH Design Ald. Borgman made a motion to approve Resolution #003-2017 - Approval of Amendment between the Muskego Public Library and FEH Associates, Inc., DBA FEH Design, Trustee Darkow seconded. Motion Passed 7 in favor. Administrative Services Assistant job description - draft Ald. Borgman made a motion to approve Administrative Services Assistant job description, Trustee Darkow seconded. Motion Passed 7 in favor. COMMUNICATIONS AND MISCELLANEOUS BUSINESS AS AUTHORIZED BY LAW ADJOURNMENT Trustee Darkow made a motion to adjourn at 5:39pm, Trustee Tomaszewski seconded. Motion Passed 7 in favor. CITY OF MUSKEGO Budget Worksheet - Library Revenues Current Year w/ Monthly Total Page: 1 Period: 10/17 Nov 16, 2017 08:30AM 2017-17 2017-17 2017-17 2017-17 % Actual Over / Adopted Amended YTD Current month To (Under) Account Number Account Title Budget Budget Actual Actual Budget Budget GENERAL FUND CULTURE, REC AND EDUCATION 100.05.71.00.4140 LIBRARY GRANTS REVENUE 1,592.00 1,592.00 .00 .00 .00 1,592.00- 100.05.71.00.4150 LIBRARY - SYSTEM, ETC 112,845.00 112,845.00 112,846.00 .00 100.00%1.00 100.05.71.00.4274 LIBRARY LOST AND DAMAGED 1,300.00 1,300.00 1,519.91 226.09 116.92%219.91 100.05.71.00.4313 LIBRARY FINES 17,000.00 17,000.00 14,340.33 1,242.88 84.35%2,659.67- 100.05.71.00.4314 LIBRARY TAXABLE REVENUE 9,000.00 9,000.00 6,636.15 806.00 73.74%2,363.85- 100.05.71.00.4542 LIBRARY PHONE USE .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.00.4544 ROOM RENTAL 1,000.00 1,000.00 1,000.00 50.00 100.00%.00 100.05.71.00.4551 SALE OF F/A - COMPUTERS .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.00.4552 LIBRARY FRIENDS REVENUE 5,000.00 5,000.00 5,964.87 907.12 119.30%964.87 Total LIBRARY DEPARTMENT:147,737.00 147,737.00 142,307.26 3,232.09 96.32%5,429.74- CITY OF MUSKEGO Budget Worksheet - Library Expenditures Current Year w/ Monthly Total Page: 1 Period: 10/17 Nov 16, 2017 12:57PM 2017-17 2017-17 2017-17 2017-17 % Actual Over / Adopted Amended YTD Current Month To (Under) Account Number Account Title Budget Budget Actual Actual Budget Budget GENERAL FUND CULTURE, REC AND EDUCATION 100.05.71.00.5101 SALARY & WAGES 586,070.00 586,070.00 453,932.07 39,514.30 77.45%132,137.93- 100.05.71.00.5102 OVERTIME 2,000.00 2,000.00 .00 .00 .00 2,000.00- 100.05.71.00.5201 FICA 46,603.00 46,603.00 35,246.54 3,071.16 75.63%11,356.46- 100.05.71.00.5202 PENSION 38,119.00 38,119.00 28,872.14 2,487.64 75.74%9,246.86- 100.05.71.00.5203 HEALTH 71,580.00 71,580.00 52,126.94 4,447.88 72.82%19,453.06- 100.05.71.00.5204 LIFE 1,282.00 1,282.00 1,086.48 111.12 84.75%195.52- 100.05.71.00.5205 FSA FEE EXPENSE .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.00.5229 HEALTH INSURANCE ALLOWANCE 21,120.00 21,120.00 16,580.00 1,505.00 78.50%4,540.00- 100.05.71.00.5302 MILEAGE 1,200.00 1,200.00 1,160.41 247.28 96.70%39.59- 100.05.71.00.5303 CONFERENCES & TRAINING 3,500.00 3,500.00 1,416.02 285.00 40.46%2,083.98- 100.05.71.00.5305 DUES & MEMBERSHIP 1,300.00 1,300.00 1,130.00 .00 86.92%170.00- 100.05.71.00.5401 LIBRARY EQUIPMENT 19,000.00 19,000.00 14,819.34 2,068.52 78.00%4,180.66- 100.05.71.00.5415 MAINTENANCE OF BLDG & GROUNDS 36,000.00 36,000.00 32,513.72 5,212.99 90.32%3,486.28- 100.05.71.00.5505 COMPUTER CHARGES 33,390.00 33,390.00 25,406.59 505.43-76.09%7,983.41- 100.05.71.00.5602 TELEPHONE 300.00 300.00 175.00 25.00 58.33%125.00- 100.05.71.00.5701 OFFICE SUPPLIES AND EXPENSES 9,800.00 9,800.00 5,722.04 138.69 58.39%4,077.96- 100.05.71.00.5702 PROCESSING SUPPLIES 16,400.00 16,400.00 14,323.39 1,441.41 87.34%2,076.61- 100.05.71.00.5703 HOUSEKEEPING SUPPLIES 3,500.00 3,500.00 2,818.60 .00 80.53%681.40- 100.05.71.00.5740 LIBRARY GRANT EXPENSE 1,592.00 1,592.00 600.00 540.00 37.69%992.00- 100.05.71.00.5752 LIBRARY FRIENDS EXPENSE 5,000.00 5,000.00 6,043.17 227.16 120.86%1,043.17 100.05.71.00.5774 LIBRARY REPLACEMENT 1,300.00 1,300.00 256.76 .00 19.75%1,043.24- 100.05.71.00.5835 HOUSEKEEPING SERVICES 38,500.00 38,500.00 33,539.00 3,049.00 87.11%4,961.00- 100.05.71.00.5910 GAS & ELECTRIC 80,000.00 80,000.00 58,614.99 6,317.50 73.27%21,385.01- 100.05.71.00.5915 SEWER & WATER 2,500.00 2,500.00 1,290.52 .00 51.62%1,209.48- 100.05.71.00.6062 PROGRAMMING 5,000.00 5,000.00 5,666.71 168.34 113.33%666.71 100.05.71.01.5711 PRINT MATERIALS 115,000.00 115,000.00 95,514.05 9,723.12 83.06%19,485.95- 100.05.71.01.5713 PRINT MATERIALS - ADULT .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.02.5711 AUDIO VISUAL MATERIALS 50,000.00 50,000.00 41,628.19 4,810.09 83.26%8,371.81- 100.05.71.03.5711 ELECTRONIC MATERIALS 16,000.00 16,000.00 11,966.90 .00 74.79%4,033.10- 100.05.71.03.5714 AUDIO VISUAL MATERIAL - A.V..00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.11.5713 PRINT MATERIALS - JUVENILE .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.12.5714 AUDIO VISUAL MATERIAL - JUVENL .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.14.5713 PRINT MATERIALS - MISC .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.18.5713 PRINT MATERIALS - NEWSPAPER .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.19.5713 PRINT MATERIALS - PERIODICALS .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.23.5713 PRINT MATERIALS - REFERENCE .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.26.5713 PRINT MATERIALS - SERIALS .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.35.5714 AUDIO VISUAL MATRL - DATA BASE .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 100.05.71.36.5713 PRINT MATERIALS - YOUNG ADULT .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 Total LIBRARY DEPARTMENT:1,206,056.00 1,206,056.00 942,449.57 84,885.77 78.14%263,606.43- CITY OF MUSKEGO Payment Approval Report - Library Board Report Alpha Page: 1 Report dates: 10/1/2017-10/31/2017 Nov 16, 2017 08:23AM Report Criteria: Detail report. Invoices with totals above $0 included. Paid and unpaid invoices included. [Report].Description = {<>} "1099 adjustment" Invoice Detail.Type = {>} "adjustments" Invoice Detail.GL account = "1000571000000"-"1000571999999","5020000000000"-"5029999999999","5030000000000"-"5039999999999" Invoice Number SeqNo Type Description Invoice Date Payment Due Date Total Cost GL Period GL Account Number BAKER & TAYLOR COMPANY 0003010635 1 Invoice PRINT 09/12/2017 10/10/2017 31.69-1017 100.05.71.01.5711 2033139753 1 Invoice PRINT 09/07/2017 10/10/2017 334.73 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 2033146667 1 Invoice PRINT 09/09/2017 10/10/2017 925.59 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 2033157353 1 Invoice PRINT 09/13/2017 10/10/2017 166.25 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 2033172176 1 Invoice PRINT 09/20/2017 10/10/2017 2,181.41 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 2033174991 1 Invoice PRINT 09/20/2017 10/10/2017 1,035.19 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 2033181031 1 Invoice PRINT 09/22/2017 10/10/2017 204.86 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 2033190758 1 Invoice PRINT 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 728.28 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 2033199184 1 Invoice PRINT 09/30/2017 10/24/2017 3,113.09 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 2033216772 1 Invoice PRINT 10/09/2017 10/24/2017 465.38 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 2033231042 1 Invoice PRINT 10/13/2017 11/14/2017 902.07 1117 100.05.71.01.5711 2033231259 1 Invoice PRINT 10/16/2017 11/14/2017 2,137.10 1117 100.05.71.01.5711 2033233412 1 Invoice PRINT 10/13/2017 11/14/2017 115.01 1117 100.05.71.01.5711 2033238146 1 Invoice PRINT 10/17/2017 11/14/2017 536.77 1117 100.05.71.01.5711 2033244053 1 Invoice PRINT 10/19/2017 11/14/2017 2,735.59 1117 100.05.71.01.5711 5014691093 1 Invoice PRINT 09/06/2017 10/10/2017 131.53 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 5014698423 1 Invoice PRINT 09/13/2017 10/10/2017 59.43 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 5014705986 1 Invoice PRINT 09/20/2017 10/10/2017 21.07 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 5014713684 1 Invoice PRINT 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 87.89 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 5014721257 1 Invoice PRINT 10/04/2017 10/24/2017 44.54 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 5014728714 1 Invoice PRINT 10/11/2017 10/24/2017 33.94 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 5014736152 1 Invoice PRINT 10/18/2017 11/14/2017 136.19 1117 100.05.71.01.5711 Total BAKER & TAYLOR COMPANY:16,064.22 BAKER & TAYLOR ENTERTAINMENT B60691220 1 Invoice AV 09/09/2017 10/10/2017 162.63 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B60899990 1 Invoice AV 09/12/2017 10/10/2017 11.88 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B60899991 1 Invoice AV 09/12/2017 10/10/2017 179.88 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B60899992 1 Invoice AV 09/12/2017 10/10/2017 7.91 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B60899993 1 Invoice AV 09/12/2017 10/10/2017 35.99 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B61531400 1 Invoice AV 09/19/2017 10/10/2017 288.52 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B61556200 1 Invoice AV 09/19/2017 10/10/2017 11.03 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B61556201 1 Invoice AV 09/19/2017 10/10/2017 103.57 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B61556202 1 Invoice AV 09/19/2017 10/10/2017 39.58 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B61556203 1 Invoice AV 09/19/2017 10/10/2017 10.79 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B61556204 1 Invoice AV 09/19/2017 10/10/2017 21.59 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B61556205 1 Invoice AV 09/19/2017 10/10/2017 21.59 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B62139290 1 Invoice AV 09/26/2017 10/10/2017 138.20 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B62139291 1 Invoice AV 09/26/2017 10/10/2017 187.02 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B62139292 1 Invoice AV 09/26/2017 10/10/2017 13.64 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B62282700 1 Invoice AV 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 10.79 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B62720820 1 Invoice AV 10/03/2017 10/24/2017 16.96 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B62720821 1 Invoice AV 10/03/2017 10/24/2017 98.60 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B62720822 1 Invoice AV 10/03/2017 10/24/2017 102.12 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B63380740 1 Invoice AV 10/10/2017 10/24/2017 50.38 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B63380741 1 Invoice AV 10/10/2017 10/24/2017 21.56 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B63380742 1 Invoice AV 10/10/2017 10/24/2017 43.18 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 B64054570 1 Invoice AV 10/17/2017 11/14/2017 125.23 1117 100.05.71.02.5711 CITY OF MUSKEGO Payment Approval Report - Library Board Report Alpha Page: 2 Report dates: 10/1/2017-10/31/2017 Nov 16, 2017 08:23AM Invoice Number SeqNo Type Description Invoice Date Payment Due Date Total Cost GL Period GL Account Number B64227550 1 Invoice AV 10/18/2017 11/14/2017 125.88 1117 100.05.71.02.5711 T64609980 1 Invoice AV 09/21/2017 10/10/2017 64.77 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 Total BAKER & TAYLOR ENTERTAINMENT:1,893.29 BRODART CO. 480551 1 Invoice PROCESSING 09/18/2017 10/10/2017 320.00 1017 100.05.71.00.5702 Total BRODART CO.:320.00 COMPLETE OFFICE OF WIS 150783 1 Invoice PROGRAMMING 09/19/2017 10/10/2017 95.80 1017 100.05.71.00.6062 150783 2 Invoice MISC OFFICE SUPPLIES 09/19/2017 10/10/2017 66.08 1017 100.05.71.00.5701 Total COMPLETE OFFICE OF WIS:161.88 DEMCO EDUCATIONAL CORP 6217071 1 Invoice PROCESSING 09/22/2017 10/10/2017 649.30 1017 100.05.71.00.5702 6220100 1 Invoice PROCESSING SUPPLIES 09/28/2017 10/24/2017 472.11 1017 100.05.71.00.5702 6235401 1 Invoice PROCESSING 10/18/2017 11/14/2017 529.18 1117 100.05.71.00.5702 Total DEMCO EDUCATIONAL CORP:1,650.59 DOVER FLAG & MAP LLC 8142 1 Invoice FRIENDS OF THE LIBRARY 09/08/2017 11/14/2017 210.64 1117 100.05.71.00.5752 Total DOVER FLAG & MAP LLC:210.64 ELLIOTT'S ACE HARDWARE 601005/102417 1 Invoice LIBRARY MAINT 09/30/2017 10/24/2017 75.74 1017 100.05.71.00.5415 Total ELLIOTT'S ACE HARDWARE:75.74 ELM USA, INC. 5281 AAA 1 Invoice SUPPLIES 09/01/2017 11/14/2017 69.95 1117 100.05.71.00.5701 Total ELM USA, INC.:69.95 FINDAWAY WORLD,LLC 230263 1 Invoice AV 09/28/2017 10/24/2017 391.94 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 231870 1 Invoice AV 10/11/2017 10/24/2017 39.99 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 Total FINDAWAY WORLD,LLC:431.93 FIRST BUSINESS 3871/102417 1 Invoice PRINT 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 2.25-1017 100.05.71.01.5711 3871/102417 2 Invoice DATA HOTSPOTS 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 600.00 1017 100.05.71.00.5740 3871/102417 4 Invoice PROGRAMMING 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 72.54 1017 100.05.71.00.6062 3871/102417 3 Invoice MISC OFFICE SUPPLIES 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 32.66 1017 100.05.71.00.5701 3889/102417 1 Invoice AV 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 250.44 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 3897/102417 2 Invoice MISC SUPPLIES 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 39.95 1017 100.05.71.00.5701 3897/102417 1 Invoice CONFERENCES 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 140.00 1017 100.05.71.00.5303 3897/102417 3 Invoice FOL - PR 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 8.64 1017 100.05.71.00.5752 3913/102417 2 Invoice CONFERENCES 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 145.00 1017 100.05.71.00.5303 3913/102417 3 Invoice FOL - PR 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 218.52 1017 100.05.71.00.5752 3913/102417 1 Invoice PRINT 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 223.88 1017 100.05.71.01.5711 4273/102417 8 Invoice MENARDS - LIBRARY MAINT 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 36.95 1017 100.05.71.00.5415 4273/102417 6 Invoice MENARDS - LIBRARY MAINT 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 30.10 1017 100.05.71.00.5415 CITY OF MUSKEGO Payment Approval Report - Library Board Report Alpha Page: 3 Report dates: 10/1/2017-10/31/2017 Nov 16, 2017 08:23AM Invoice Number SeqNo Type Description Invoice Date Payment Due Date Total Cost GL Period GL Account Number Total FIRST BUSINESS:1,796.43 INGERSOLL LIGHTING 117132 2 Invoice LED BULBS - LIBRARY 10/17/2017 11/14/2017 109.00 1117 100.05.71.00.5415 Total INGERSOLL LIGHTING:109.00 JAMES IMAGING SYSTEMS INC 776599 1 Invoice LIBRARY EQUIPMENT 10/03/2017 10/24/2017 1,084.01 1017 100.05.71.00.5401 Total JAMES IMAGING SYSTEMS INC:1,084.01 JAMES IMAGING SYSTEMS INC (lease) 339433286 1 Invoice PUBLIC PRINT STATION 09/08/2017 10/10/2017 425.99 1017 100.05.71.00.5401 341666881 1 Invoice LIBRARY EQUIPMENT 10/10/2017 10/24/2017 558.52 1017 100.05.71.00.5401 Total JAMES IMAGING SYSTEMS INC (lease):984.51 JANI-KING INC- MILW REGION MIL10170153 3 Invoice CLEANING - LIBRARY - OCTOBER 10/01/2017 10/10/2017 3,049.00 1017 100.05.71.00.5835 MIL11170157 3 Invoice CLEANING - LIBRARY NOVEMBER 11/01/2017 11/14/2017 3,049.00 1117 100.05.71.00.5835 Total JANI-KING INC- MILW REGION:6,098.00 JM BRENNAN, INC. SALES000088 1 Invoice AC DOWN 08/31/2017 10/10/2017 4,314.20 1017 100.05.71.00.5415 SALES000089 1 Invoice MAINTENANCE 09/27/2017 10/24/2017 665.00 1017 100.05.71.00.5415 SALES000090 1 Invoice MAINTENANCE 10/20/2017 11/14/2017 9,016.25 1117 100.05.71.00.5415 Total JM BRENNAN, INC.:13,995.45 JOURNAL SENTINEL INC MJ0092662/10 1 Invoice PRINT 09/27/2017 10/10/2017 142.66 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 Total JOURNAL SENTINEL INC:142.66 KUJAWA ENTERPRISES INC. 112412 1 Invoice MAINTENANCE OF BLDG & GROU 10/02/2017 10/24/2017 61.00 1017 100.05.71.00.5415 Total KUJAWA ENTERPRISES INC.:61.00 MICROMARKETING LLC 687680 1 Invoice AV 09/06/2017 10/10/2017 72.50 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 688301 1 Invoice AV 09/12/2017 10/10/2017 114.97 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 688378 1 Invoice AV 09/12/2017 10/10/2017 44.99 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 688767 1 Invoice AV 09/14/2017 10/10/2017 45.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 691746 1 Invoice AV 10/03/2017 10/24/2017 136.47 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 692047 1 Invoice AV 10/04/2017 10/24/2017 109.98 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 692447 1 Invoice AV 10/10/2017 11/14/2017 99.98 1117 100.05.71.02.5711 Total MICROMARKETING LLC:623.89 MIDWEST TAPE 95426876 1 Invoice AV 09/25/2017 10/24/2017 33.17 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 95446813 1 Invoice AV 10/02/2017 10/24/2017 18.80 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 CITY OF MUSKEGO Payment Approval Report - Library Board Report Alpha Page: 4 Report dates: 10/1/2017-10/31/2017 Nov 16, 2017 08:23AM Invoice Number SeqNo Type Description Invoice Date Payment Due Date Total Cost GL Period GL Account Number Total MIDWEST TAPE:51.97 PENGUIN RANDOM HOUSE LLC 1083827146 1 Invoice AV 09/08/2017 10/10/2017 130.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 1083834670 1 Invoice AV 09/05/2017 10/24/2017 50.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 1083997409 1 Invoice AV 09/14/2017 10/10/2017 280.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 1084039310 1 Invoice AV 09/18/2017 10/10/2017 45.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 1084081734 1 Invoice AV 09/22/2017 10/24/2017 160.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 1084240612 1 Invoice AV 09/28/2017 10/24/2017 310.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 1084245836 1 Invoice AV 09/28/2017 10/24/2017 60.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 1084360271 1 Invoice AV 10/03/2017 10/24/2017 545.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 1084369358 1 Invoice AV 10/04/2017 10/24/2017 24.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 1084374387 1 Invoice AV 10/06/2017 10/24/2017 88.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 1084384003 1 Invoice AV 10/06/2017 10/24/2017 35.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 1084429413 1 Invoice AV 10/06/2017 10/24/2017 40.00 1017 100.05.71.02.5711 Total PENGUIN RANDOM HOUSE LLC:1,767.00 SAFEWAY PEST MANAGEMENT INC. 9092/102417 3 Invoice PEST CONTROL - LIBRARY SEPT 10/06/2017 10/24/2017 30.00 1017 100.05.71.00.5415 Total SAFEWAY PEST MANAGEMENT INC.:30.00 TIME WARNER CABLE 063003301092 1 Invoice INTERNET 09/24/2017 10/24/2017 94.57 1017 100.05.71.00.5505 Total TIME WARNER CABLE:94.57 U.S. CELLULAR 0213063080 8 Invoice MONTHLY CHARGE-LIBRARY 09/28/2017 10/24/2017 25.00 1017 100.05.71.00.5602 Total U.S. CELLULAR:25.00 WE ENERGIES 5499-564-961/2 Invoice LIBRARY - ELECTRIC 09/28/2017 10/10/2017 5,539.87 1017 100.05.71.00.5910 5499-564-961/1 Invoice LIBRARY - GAS 09/28/2017 10/10/2017 777.63 1017 100.05.71.00.5910 Total WE ENERGIES:6,317.50 Grand Totals: 54,059.23 Report Criteria: Detail report. Invoices with totals above $0 included. Paid and unpaid invoices included. [Report].Description = {<>} "1099 adjustment" Invoice Detail.Type = {>} "adjustments" Invoice Detail.GL account = "1000571000000"-"1000571999999","5020000000000"-"5029999999999","5030000000000"-"5039999999999" S73W16663 W Janesville Rd Muskego, WI 53150 P 262.971.2100 W cityofmuskego.org/library IDEAS. INFORMATION. COMMUNITY Director’s Report November, 2017 1. Adult Services Update (from Elke Saylor, Head of Reference and Samantha Quail, Adult Services Librarian): Elke has been very helpful throughout the leadership transition. Thank you Elke! On November 1st local author Eric Schlehlein presented “Forged in Blood,” a true story of a brigade of troops comprised primarily of young men from Wisconsin, which suffered the highest casualties of any brigade during the Civil War. The program was very well received by attendees and Eric donated a copy of his book Black Iron Mercy after the program. The Pabst Mansion Foundation took us on a virtual tour of one of Milwaukee’s oldest and most beautiful historic homes on November 8th. Each of the programs had approximately a dozen attendees and received many compliments after the program. 2. Children’s Update (from Abby Bussen, Children’s Librarian): October was filled with lots of fun programs for kids and families. We started the month with our first sessions of Comic Book Book Club and Read Aloud Crowd, then began a new Wednesday night session, Secret Agent Spy Club, where attendees learned how to make and crack codes, engineer booby traps, and MacGyver a gem out of a secure vault. Along with our regular storytime programming, our sensory playdate, family picture book brunch, and LEGO clubs were great opportunities for children of all ages to visit the library last month. Abby & Jane spent some time doing storytimes outside of the library, taking their Traveling Tales to Rainbow Child Care, Discovery Days, and the after-care programs at Country Meadows, Mill Valley, and Muskego Elementary. Looking ahead to November and December, we’ll have DIY Toy Lab, a Lionel Train demonstration, and Chilly Chew & View! 3. Young Adult Update (from Amanda Hyland, Young Adult Librarian): Teen programs for November include a weekly Boggle Contest and Apple/Pie For Teens where teens can play either Apples to Apples or Pie Face with their friends while enjoying some pie. Teen Advisory Board is moving to a virtual chat group so teens can participate remotely anytime and anywhere. These chat group meetings will take place through the WhatsApp App and teens will be able to talk freely about the library, and be notified about programs and possible volunteer projects. 4. Children’s Area Update: On November 7th FEH, Library Staff, and available board members met to discuss the 95% completion plans. Currently the Great Room is being emptied and November 27th-January 15th the Children’s shelves and collection will be moved to this area for the temporary location during construction. The bid documents will be released to potential contractors on November 29th, with bids due January 4th at 2pm. The Library Board will review the bids on January 16th and we will select a contractor with construction starting around January 23rd and ending May 31st. S73W16663 W Janesville Rd Muskego, WI 53150 P 262.971.2100 W cityofmuskego.org/library IDEAS. INFORMATION. COMMUNITY 5. Other Updates: a. The 2018 City Budget passed with the Council, with no changes to Library’s funding. b. The Board-approved redesigned Administrative Services Assistant position has posted. c. The part-time Children’s Services Assistant position that the Library Board approved as part of the 2018 Library Budget will be posted in January 2018. 6. Staff Continuing Education: Brittany is in the process of applying for Grade 1 Library Director Certification required for this position. She attended the Bridges System Orientation with Connie Meyers and attended the 2017 SEWI Library Director’s Retreat. 7. Employee Anniversaries in November: Abby Bussen, Children’s Librarian (2 years) JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEPT OCT NOV DEC Through Oct Checkouts 2016 22,245 22,848 24,440 23,347 20,907 28,189 27,854 27,839 21,826 22,138 21,843 18,649 219,495 2017 23,280 22,488 25,479 22,564 21,917 28,959 29,044 25,946 20,266 22,631 219,943 % Change 4.7%-1.6%4.3%-3.4%4.8%2.7%4.3%-6.8%-7.1%2.2%0.2% eBook Checkouts 2016 1,654 1,528 1,647 1,522 1,563 1,446 1,547 1,500 1,455 1,491 1,365 1,497 13,862 2017 1,654 1,453 1,774 1,700 1,568 1,683 1,717 1,729 1,654 1,669 14,932 % Change 0.0%-4.9%7.7%11.7%0.3%16.4%11.0%15.3%13.7%11.9%7.7% Self-Service Transaction Percentage of Total Circ (Self-check, Online Renewals, and eBook Checkouts/Checkouts and eBook Checkouts) 2016 57.0%57.1%57.7%55.7%59.5%55.1%57.4%57.3%56.5%60.6%62.5%62.4%57.0% 2017 56.4%56.5%57.3%59.4%57.7%51.7%59.1%55.7%60.0%57.1% Library Visits 2016 11,004 11,575 12,858 11,846 10,365 14,063 12,930 13,343 9,936 10,884 10,061 8,356 107,920 2017 10,901 11,146 13,100 10,339 10,600 14,598 13,934 12,585 9,812 10,788 107,015 % Change -0.9%-3.7%1.9%-12.7%2.3%3.8%7.8%-5.7%-1.2%-0.9%-0.8% Reference Transactions 2016 1,323 1,415 1,434 1,244 1,069 1,279 1,166 1,239 1,129 1,148 924 893 11,298 2017 1,224 1,237 1,425 1,080 1,133 992 1,077 1,206 874 1,064 10,248 % Change -7.5%-12.6%-0.6%-13.2%6.0%-22.4%-7.6%-2.7%-22.6%-7.3%-9.3% Meeting Room Use 2016 82 83 98 83 81 76 47 64 66 82 91 82 680 2017 88 96 99 76 88 69 76 84 79 87 755 % Change 7.3%15.7%1.0%-8.4%8.6%-9.2%61.7%31.3%19.7%6.1%11.0% Monthly Statistics for Muskego Public Library 2017 Architects / Engineers / Interiors Sioux City, IA Des Moines, IA Dubuque, IA Delafield, WI 712 252 3889 515 288 2000 563 583 4900 262 719 9214 PROJECT MANUAL Construction Documents MUSKEGO PUBLIC LIBRARY RENOVATIONS S73 W16663 W Janesville Road Muskego, WI 53150 FEH Project No. 2017307 NOVEMBER 29, 2017 Project Manual November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Bid Date: January 4, 2018 @ 2:00 PM General Contract Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, Wisconsin For: City of Muskego Muskego, Wisconsin Architect: FEH DESIGN W316 S525 Christopher Way Delafield, WI 53018 (262) 968-2055 Fax: (515) 288-1999 Electrical: Henneman Engineering, Inc. 1232 Fourier Drive, Suite 101 Madison, Wisconsin 53717 (608) 833-7000 Fax: (608) 833-6996 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Seals Page 000107 - Page 1 of 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI DOCUMENT 000107 - SEALS PAGE 1.1 DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD ARCHITECT I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE PORTION OF THIS TECHNICAL SUBMISSION DESCRIBED BELOW WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND RESPONSIBLE CHARGE. I AM A DULY REGISTERED ARCHITECT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WISCONSIN. signature Gregory Thomas Baum, AIA 5468-005 Pages or sheets covered by this Seal: AG-, A- Series Sections identified in Project Manual Table of Contents DATE ISSUED: November 29, 2017 ELECTRICAL ENGINEER I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS ENGINEERING DOCUMENT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ENGINEER UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WISCONSIN. signature CLARK J. BRENNER, PE Wisconsin License No: 25761-6 Discipline: Electrical My license renewal date is July 31, 2018 Pages or sheets covered by this Seal: E- Series _____________________________________________________ Sections identified in Project Manual Table of Contents DATE ISSUED: November 29. 2017 END OF DOCUMENT 000107 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Table of Contents 2017307 - 1 of 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 0107 Seals and Certification ................................................................................................................... 1 00 1113 Notice of Bid Letting/Advertisement for Bids .................................................................................. 2 00 2113 Instruction to Bidders ...................................................................................................................... 1 00 2213 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders ........................................................................................... 5 00 3119 Existing Coordination Information ................................................................................................... 1 00 4113 Bid Form .......................................................................................................................................... 3 00 5200 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor ...................................................... 1 00 6100 Performance Bond and Payment Bond .......................................................................................... 1 00 6200 Certificate of Insurance Supplement ............................................................................................... 1 00 7200 General Conditions of the Contract For Construction ..................................................................... 1 00 7300 Supplementary General Conditions ................................................................................................ 7 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 Summary ......................................................................................................................................... 5 01 1216 Work Sequence and Phasing Schedule ......................................................................................... 1 01 2100 Allowances ...................................................................................................................................... 2 01 2300 Alternates ........................................................................................................................................ 2 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures ................................................................................................... 4 01 2900 Payment Procedures ...................................................................................................................... 5 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination .......................................................................................... 8 01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation ........................................................................................... 6 01 3300 Submittal Procedures .................................................................................................................... 11 01 3305 Electronic Submittals Procedures ................................................................................................... 3 01 4000 Quality Requirements ................................................................................................................... 11 01 4200 References ...................................................................................................................................... 7 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls .................................................................................................. 7 01 6000 Product Requirements .................................................................................................................... 4 01 7300 Execution ........................................................................................................................................ 6 01 7329 Cutting and Patching ....................................................................................................................... 3 01 7419 Construction Waste Management .................................................................................................. 7 01 7700 Closeout Procedures ...................................................................................................................... 5 01 7710 Substantial Com pletion Request form ............................................................................................ 2 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data ................................................................................................... 6 01 7839 Project Record Documents ............................................................................................................. 4 01 7900 Demonstration and Training ............................................................................................................ 4 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4119 Selective Demolition ....................................................................................................................... 6 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1000 Rough Carpentry ............................................................................................................................. 6 06 2023 Interior Finish Carpentry ................................................................................................................. 7 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 9200 Joint Sealants ................................................................................................................................. 8 DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames .................................................................................................... 8 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors .......................................................................................................................... 6 08 4113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts .............................................................................. 8 08 7100 Door Hardware .............................................................................................................................. 17 08 8000 Glazing ............................................................................................................................................ 8 08 8400 Plastic Glazing ................................................................................................................................ 5 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Table of Contents 2017307 - 2 of 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 0000 Finish and Materials Legend ........................................................................................................... 3 09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing ......................................................................................................... 6 09 2900 Gypsum Board ................................................................................................................................ 6 09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories ..................................................................................................... 5 09 6723 Resilient Flooring ............................................................................................................................ 5 09 6813 Tile Carpet....................................................................................................................................... 4 09 9123 Interior Painting ............................................................................................................................... 9 09 9300 Staining and Transparent Finishing ................................................................................................ 6 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 1423 Panel Signage ................................................................................................................................. 7 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 12 2413 Roller Window Shades .................................................................................................................... 5 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 0500 Common Work Results for Electrical ............................................................................................ 16 26 0502 Electrical Demolition for Remodeling .............................................................................................. 4 26 0519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables .................................................................. 4 26 0523 Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables ........................................................................................ 4 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems .............................................................................. 2 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems ................................................................................ 4 26 0533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems ................................................................................... 8 26 2726 Wiring Devices ................................................................................................................................ 4 26 5113 Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Ballasts ................................................................................ 6 FEH DESIGN Project No: 2017307 November 29, 2017 2017307 - Page 1 of 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI INVITATION TO BID MUSKEGO PUBLIC LIBRARY LIBRARY RENOVATIONS The City of Muskego is issuing this Invitation to Bid for general construction (interior), minor mechanical, and electrical work at the Muskego Public Library S73 W16663 W Janesville Road Muskego, WI. This will be a single prime contractor lump sum bid. Bids shall be prepared in accordance with the contract documents prepared by FEH DESIGN, W316 S525 Christopher Way, Delafield, WI 53018. Time and Place for Receiving Bids: The City of Muskego will accept sealed bids from qualified firms as follows: Bids Due: No later than 2:00 p.m. CST, Thursday, January 4, 2018 At: City Clerk City of Muskego W182 S8200 Racine Avenue Muskego, Wisconsin 53150 Bid Opening: Bids will be opened publicly at the above-stated location, date, and time. Basis of Bid: Single Prime Contractor Lump Sum Bids received after 2:00 p.m. will not be accepted. Actual receipt by said time is required and deposit in the mail is insufficient. The envelope containing the sealed bid shall bear the name and address of the interested firm and the notation “Muskego Public Library - Renovations” on the outside of the envelope. Instructions:Electronic Bidding Documents, including Drawings and Specifications, may be viewed and ordered online by registering on the BPI Color Portal (http://pdm.bpiinc.com). Hard copy Bidding Documents may be purchased online and picked up from any of the BPI Color locations. A separate $20.00 non-refundable payment is required if Bidding Documents are to be shipped. Digital sets may be downloaded at no charge. Partial sets of Bidding Documents are not available. The cost of Bidding Documents is not refundable. Each entity obtaining Bidding Documents from BPI Color will be designated as a Plan Holder of Record. Interested parties may call 414-327-5010 to request information on ordering these documents. All contractors are responsible for the viewing/ downloading of the correct documents for the purposed of providing a sufficient bid. As holders of these documents, the viewer acknowledges the requirements to obtain any addenda or other materials prior to budding and/or construction of the project. Since neither the owner nor FEH DESIGN has control over the means of printing these documents, the viewer is responsible for verifying that all documents are obtained and that they have printed correctly. Bidder is responsible for errors or missing information if documents are obtained from sources other than the BPI Color Portal. Owner will not allow or excuse incorrect bids submitted by a Contractor based on errors or missing information in documents obtained from sources other than the BPI Color Portal. Drawings and specifications will be available on November 29, 2017. In general, the work is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: Renovation of the Children’s Area and associated Program Room; some walls and most finishes will be new. Minor wall deconstruction between adjacent rooms. The structure will utilize existing mechanical units and existing duct configuration. The renovated areas will have fire protection work as well as technology and electrical infrastructure. The work under the Contract shall be commenced on or before a date to be specified in the Contract or written Notice to Proceed of the Owner, and shall achieve Substantial Completion no later than May 31, 2018. FEH DESIGN Project No: 2017307 November 29, 2017 2017307 - Page 2 of 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Document Availability: Bidding Documents will be on file after November 29, 2017 at the Architect's Office, W316 S525 Christopher Way, Delafield, WI 53018; City Hall City of Muskego W182 S8200 Racine Avenue Muskego, Wisconsin 53150; Muskego Public Library S73 W16663 W Janesville Road Muskego, WI 53150; and at the following Plan Centers: Dodge Reports/ McGraw Hill Construction, Bid + Network, Madison, Milwaukee Pre-Bid Meeting: A pre-bid conference will be conducted on December 13, 2017 at 10:00 AM at the project site, S73 W16663 W Janesville Road Muskego, WI 53150. This Conference is MANDATORY FOR ALL GENERAL CONTRACTOR BIDDERS. Each Bidder shall visit the site to familiarize themselves with conditions under which they will operate. All interested parties in attendance at the pre-bid meeting will sign the attendance form. Bidders shall visit the site prior to submitting their bid. There are no provisions for any additional dates for site visits Bid Rejection: The City of Muskego reserves the right to reject in whole or in part any and all bids, to waive any informalities, and to accept the bids determined to be in the best interest of the City. This invitation may be canceled if determined to be in the best interest of the City. Bids shall remain in effect for a period of 45 days. Ethics: The General Code of the City of Muskego contains various procurement policies which are applicable to this proposed procurement. These include prohibitions against gratuities and kickbacks. This request is governed by the City of Muskego Procurement Code, a copy of which is available at the County Clerk’s office at City Hall. Bid Security: Bids shall be accompanied by a security deposit in the form of a Bid Bond or certified check in the amount of no less than 10 percent of the Bid Sum. Endorse the Bid Bond or certified check in the name of the Owner as obligee, signed and sealed by the Contractor as principal, and the Surety. After a Bid has been accepted, securities will be returned to all other Bidders. The accepted bidder’s security deposit will be returned after delivery to the Owner of the required Performance and Labor and Materials Payment Bond. Include the cost of the Bid security in the Bid Sum. If no contract is awarded, all security deposits will be returned. Performance and Payment Bonds: Performance and Payment Bonds are required. State Sales Tax: This project is tax Exempt (per 2015 Wisconsin Act 126). City of Muskego, Wisconsin By: Scott Kroeger, PE, PLS, ENV SP, MBA City of Muskego Public Works and Development Director FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Instructions To Bidders 002113 - Page 1 of 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI DOCUMENT 002113 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. AIA Document A701, "Instructions to Bidders," is hereby incorporated into the Procurement and Contracting Requirements by reference. END OF DOCUMENT 002113 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 002213 - Page 1 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. The "Instructions to Bidders" AIA Document A701, 1997 Edition, Articles 1 through 8 inclusive, is a part of this Contract, a copy of which is available at cost from the office of the American Institute of Architects, Wisconsin Chapter, 321 S. Hamilton Street, Madison, WI 53703. 1.2 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. The following supplements modify or add to the AIA Instructions to Bidders. Where any part of the Instructions to Bidders is modified, the unaltered provisions of that part shall remain in effect. 1.3 MODIFIED INSTRUCTIONS A. Article 1: Definitions 1. Modify paragraph 1.1 to include the Invitation to Bid as part of the Bidding Documents. B. Article 2: Bidder’s Representations 1. Add the following clause 2.1.3.1 a. 2.1.3.1 The Bidder has investigated all the required fees, permits, and regulatory requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and has properly included in the submitted Bid, the cost of such fees, permits and requirements not otherwise indicated as provided by Owner. 2. Add the following subparagraph 2.1.5 a. 2.1.5 The Bidder is a properly licensed Contractor according to the laws and regulations of the State of Wisconsin and meets qualifications indicated in the Procurement and Contracting Documents. 3. Add the following subparagraph 2.1.6 a. 2.1.6 The Bidder has incorporated into the Bid adequate sums for work performed by installers whose qualifications meet those indicated in the Procurement and Contracting Documents. C. Article 3: Bidding Documents 1. 3.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents - Add the following subparagraphs: a. 3.2.4 in the case of errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities in the Bidding documents not interpreted or clarified by addendum or discovered too late for an addendum, the following applies: 1) The better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 002213 - Page 2 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2) To the best of their ability, the Bidders shall determine the proper methods or materials to fulfill the design intent of the Bidding Documents and include the cost of providing such methods in the Bid. 3) Failure to request clarification will not waive the responsibility of comprehension of the documents and performance of the Work in accordance with the intent of the documents. Signing the Agreement will be considered as thorough comprehension of intent of the Bidding Documents. b. 3.2.5 The following consultants to the Architect were involved or responsible for the indicated phases or divisions of the Work, and are listed herein as a convenience to the Bidders. Electrical Engineering: Henneman Engineering, Inc. 1232 Fourier Drive, Suite 101 Madison, Wisconsin 53717 (608) 833-7000 Fax: (608) 833-6996 Attention: Brad Biddick Add the following paragraph: c. 3.5 Contracts 1) 3.5.1 The Owner invites the following Bids: - Single Prime Contract. D. Article 4: Bidding Procedures 1. 4.2 Bid Security a. Add the following to Subparagraph 4.2.1: 1) Each Bid shall be accompanied by a certified check or cashier’s check drawn on a Wisconsin bank, or federally chartered bank, or a certified share draft drawn on a Wisconsin credit union or federally chartered credit union, or Bid Bond to be executed by corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Wisconsin, in the amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the amount of the Bid, made payable to The City of Muskego, Muskego, Wisconsin and may be cashed by The City of Muskego as liquidated damages in the event that the successful bidder fails to enter into a Contract and file a bond satisfactory to the City of Muskego assuring the faithful fulfillment of the Contract and maintenance of said improvements as required by the law, the provisions of this Notice and Contract Documents within (10) days after acceptance of the lowest responsive, responsible bid. Bidders shall use AIA Document A310 – Bid Bond, or another corporate form approvable to the City of Muskego. b. Add the following to Subparagraph 4.2.2: 1) As soon as the Bids have been checked and compared, the Owner may, at their discretion, return the certified checks or other collateral accompanying those Bids that in Owner’s judgment would not be considered in making the award. When award is made, the Bid guarantee of the two (2) lowest Bidders will be retained until the Contract and Bonds have been executed and the Contract approved by the Owner. Should the award be delayed more than forty five (45) days after opening of the Bids, all Bid guarantees will be returned, unless such delay is from cause beyond the control of the Owner. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 002213 - Page 3 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. 4.3 Submission of Bids a. Add the following to Subparagraph 4.3.1: 1) Submit Bid and Bid security in separate opaque, sealed envelopes with: (1) Project name, (2) name and address of Bidder, and (3) division of Work or Contract. ADDRESS BIDS TO: City Clerk City of Muskego W182 S8200 Racine Avenue Muskego, Wisconsin 53150 BIDS DUE: Thursday, January 4, 2017 2:00 PM MAILED BIDS: Sent to address indicated above. HAND-CARRIED BIDS: Deliver to address indicated above. Bids will be publicly opened and read immediately at the designated time. 3. 4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid a. Add the following to Subparagraph 4.4.1: 1) No Bid may be withdrawn within forty five (45) days from the scheduled date for receipt of Bids. E. Article 6: Post Bid Information 1. 6.3 Submittals a. 6.3.1 Delete the words "as soon as practicable after" (in the first line) and substitute the words "within seven (7) days of". F. Article 7: Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond 1. Modify Subparagraph 7.1.1 as follows: a. 7.1.1 The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate a Performance Bond, Maintenance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum, issued by a responsible surety approved by Marathon County, Wausau, Wisconsin. Bidders shall use bid bond forms included in the specifications or of a corporate form approvable to the City of Muskego. Performance Bond and Payment Bond AIA Document A312. 1.4 ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS A. Add the following provisions, as indicated: 1. Article 9: Additional Instructions a. 9.1 Preparation of Bids 1) 9.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the prescribed form and shall be subject to all requirements of the Contract Documents and these INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS. The Bidder must bid all of the Alternates, if any are listed. Special care shall be exercised in the preparation of Bids. All Bids must be FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 002213 - Page 4 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI regular in every respect and no interlineations, excisions, or special conditions shall be made or included in the bid form of the Bidder. 2) 9.1.2 Each Bid shall furnish the full business name, business address, and treasury member of the person, firm, or corporation submitting the Bid. The signature of the person signing a Bid shall be the usual signature of that person, and the name of each person signing a Bid shall be typed or printed below the signature. 3) 9.1.3 A Bid by an Individual shall furnish his full name and complete address. 4) 9.1.4 A bid by a Partnership shall furnish the full name and complete home address of each partner. A Bid by a partnership shall be signed with the partnership's name by one of the members of the partnership or by an authorized representative, followed by the signature and designation of the person signing the Bid. 5) 9.1.5 A Bid by a Corporation shall be signed with the legal name of the corporation, followed by the State of Incorporation and by the signature of the president, secretary, or other person authorized to bind it in the matter. When requested by the Owner, satisfactory evidence of authority of the officer signing in behalf of a corporation shall be furnished. Attached to a Bid by a corporation shall be a list containing the name and complete home address of each principal officer of the corporation. 6) 9.1.6 The Owner may consider as irregular any Bid on which there is an alteration of or departure from the Bid Form hereto attached and at its option may reject the same. b. 9.2 Errors In Bid 1) 9.2.1 Bidders or their authorized agents are expected to examine all Contract Documents, Drawings, Specifications, circulars, schedules, addenda and other instructions pertaining to the Work. Failure to do so will be at the Bidder's own risk and he cannot secure relief on the plea of error in the Bid. c. 9.3 Disqualification of Bidder 1) 9.3.1 Any one or more of the following causes may be considered as suffi- cient for the disqualification of a Bidder and the rejection of his Bid: 2) 9.3.1.1 More than one bid for the same work from an individual, firm, partnership, or corporation under the same or different names. 3) 9.3.1.2 Evidence of collusion among Bidders. (Participants in such collusion may receive no recognition as Bidders for any future work.) 4) 9.3.1.3 Lack of responsibility as evidenced by poor workmanship and progress of past work. 5) 9.3.1.4 Incomplete work that in the judgment of the City might hinder or prevent the prompt completion of additional work if awarded. 6) 9.3.1.5 For being in arrears on existing contracts, in litigation with the City, or having defaulted on a previous contract. d. 9.4 Approval of Contract 1) 9.4.1 No contract is binding upon the City of Muskego until it has been executed by and approved by the Library Board and the City of Muskego, and delivered to the Contractor and the Contract Bond has been filed and approved. e. 9.5 Award FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 002213 - Page 5 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1) 9.5.1 The City of Muskego will select the Bid that it deems most reasonable and in its best interest in terms of cost, quality, appearance, performance of the Contractor and the Contractor's proximity to the site and his ability to service the Project after it has been completed. 2) 9.5.2 The Contract will be awarded based on the above qualifications to the lowest responsible Bidder for the lowest combination of Base Bid and selected Alternates. 3) 9.5.3 The City of Muskego reserves the right to reject any or all bids, re- advertise for new bids, and to waive informalities that may be in the best interest of the Library Board, Muskego Public Library, and the City of Muskego. f. 9.6 Contract Time 1) 9.6.1 Bidder agrees to commence Work as soon as possible on or before 10 days after receiving a written "Notice to Proceed" from the Owner, and to substantially complete the Project as soon as possible. The dates of substantial completion shall be so stated by the General Construction Bidder in the space provided on the BID FORM. g. 9.7 Identification of Subcontractors/Values of Work 1) 9.7.1 The Contractor shall furnish in the spaces provided on the BID FORM the names of the primary Electrical proposed for the Work if part of the associated bid package(s). END OF SECTION 002213 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Existing Condition Information 003119 - Page 1 of 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI DOCUMENT 003119 - EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION 1.1 EXISTING CONDITION INFORMATION A. This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting Requirements for the Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of the Bidders' own investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents. B. Existing drawings that include information on original construction conditions are available for viewing on a CD. The CD will be made available at the Pre-Bid meeting. C. Related Requirements: 1. Document 002113 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for examination of Project site and existing conditions. END OF DOCUMENT 00 3119 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Bid Form 2017307 - Page 1 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI BID FORM 1.1 BIDS DUE A. Date: Thursday, January 4, 2017 B. Time: 2:00 p.m. local time. C. Location: Alderman Room City Hall W182 S8200 Racine Avenue Muskego, Wisconsin 53150 1.2 OWNER A. City of Muskego, Muskego, Wisconsin. 1.3 ARCHITECT A.FEH DESIGN, W316 S525 Christopher Way, Delafield, WI 53018. B. Architect's File No. 2017307 1.4 BIDDER INFORMATION A. Name: B. Address: C. Phone: D. Facsimile: E. Date: 1.5 BID ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS A. The Bidder, in compliance with Notice to Bidders for the Muskego Public Library Renovations, having examined the drawings and specifications with related documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed Project, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment and supplies and to construct the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents, within the time set forth therein, and at the prices stated below. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Bid Form 2017307 - Page 2 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda covering revisions to the drawings and specifications, and the cost, if any, of such revisions has been included in the prices quoted: Addendum No _______, Date: __________; Addendum No. _______, Date: ______________; Addendum No _______, Date: __________; Addendum No. _______, Date: ______________; 1.6 BASE BID A. Bidder agrees to perform all of the Contract Work, including but not limited to electrical, fire protection, and telecommunications described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings for the sum of: Dollars ($ ) 1.7 ALTERNATES A. Alternate #1: Color changing lights in Classroom 104 Add / Deduct ($ ) 1.8 PRICE GUARANTEE A. The undersigned agrees that the price stated in this Bid is guaranteed for forty five (45) consecutive calendar days, Sundays and holidays included from the Bid due date. If accepted by the City of Muskego within that period, the undersigned is to execute a formal contract with the City of Muskego, for the performance of the Contract at the stated price and is not subject to escalation. B. Accompanying this Bid is a certified check, cashier’s check, or Bid Bond as Bid Security, as required by the Bidding Documents. 1.9 ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION A. The City of Muskego reserves the right to reject any or all bids, re-advertise for new bids, and to waive informalities that may be in the best interest of the City of Muskego. 1.10 TAXES A. The undersigned certifies that all of the prices stated above do not include Wisconsin State Sales and Use Tax. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Bid Form 2017307 - Page 3 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.11 INSURANCE A. The undersigned agrees to provide Liability Insurance, Workmen's Compensation Insurance, Employer's Liability, as required by applicable Federal, State, and Local Laws, and in the amounts specified. Certificates shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. 1.12 AGREEMENT AND PERFORMANCE, MAINTENANCE, LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BONDS A. Upon receipt of Notice of Award of Contract, the Bidder agrees to execute the Agreement and to furnish executed Performance, Maintenance, Labor and Material Payment Bonds within seven (7) calendar days after receipt of said Notice of Award. 1.13 TIME OF COMPLETION A. Substantial Completion is required for this project. 1. All work required by the Contract Documents shall achieve Substantial Completion by May 31, 2018. B. In lieu of date indicated above, Bidder proposes that all work required by the Contract Documents shall be Substantially Completed by the date indicated below. 1. Bidder Proposed Substantial Completion Date: 1.14 SUBCONTRACTOR IDENTIFICATION A. Electrical Subcontractor: 1.15 LEGAL ADDRESS AND LEGAL STATUS OF BIDDER A. Address: B. Legal Classification: The undersigned does hereby declare that the Bidder has the legal status checked below: 1. _______ Individual 2. _______ Co-Partnership 3. _______ Corporation incorporated under the Laws of the State of Wisconsin C. This Bid is submitted in the name of: Company Signature FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Bid Form 2017307 - Page 4 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Title D. Signed and sealed this ________ day of _________________, 201___. END OF BID FORM FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Standard Form Of Agreement 005200 - Page 1 of 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI DOCUMENT 00 5200 - STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT The following standard form produced by the American Institute of Architects are included and edited as part of these Bid Documents and will be included as part of the signed contract. STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR American Institute of Architects - AIA Form A101 – 2007 See subsequent pages for modified Owner-Contractor Agreement. END OF DOCUMENT 00 5200 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Performance Bond And Payment Bond 006100 - Page 1 of 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI DOCUMENT 00 6100 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND STANDARD AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS' FORMS TO BE INCLUDED BY REFERENCE The following standard form produced by the American Institute of Architects is a part of these Bid Documents and will be included as parts of the signed contract. NOTE: THIS FORM IS THE 2010 EDITION PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND American Institute of Architects - AIA Form A312 - 2010 This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects' state office at cost. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS Wisconsin Chapter 321 S. Hamilton Street Madison, Wisconsin 53703 (608) 257-8477 END OF DOCUMENT 00 6100 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Certificate Of Insurance 006200 - Page 1 of 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI DOCUMENT 00 6200 - CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE STANDARD AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS' FORMS TO BE INCLUDED BY REFERENCE The following standard form produced by the American Institute of Architects is a part of these Bid Documents and will be included as parts of the signed contract. NOTE: THIS FORM IS THE 1991 EDITION ACORD CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 25-S (7/91) American Institute of Architects - AIA Form G715 - 1991 This form can be purchased from the American Institute of Architects' state office at cost. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS Wisconsin Chapter 321 S. Hamilton Street Madison, WI 53703 (608) 257-8477 END OF DOCUMENT 00 6200 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 General Conditions Of The Contract For Construction 007200 - Page 1 of 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI DOCUMENT 00 7200 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION The following standard form produced by the American Institute of Architects are included and edited as a part of these Bid Documents and will be included as part of the signed contract. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION American Institute of Architects - AIA Form A201 – 2007 See subsequent pages for modified General Conditions. END OF DOCUMENT 00 7200 FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary General Conditions 007300 - Page 1 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI DOCUMENT 00 7300 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, 2007 Edition, Article 1 through 15 inclusive, is a part of this Contract, a copy of which is available at cost from the office of the American Institute of Architects, Wisconsin Chapter, 321 S. Hamilton Street, Madison, WI 53703, 608-257-8477. 1.2 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS A. The following supplements modify, change, delete, or add to the AIA General Conditions. Where any part of the General Conditions is modified or voided by these Articles, the unaltered provisions of that part shall remain in effect. 1.3 MODIFIED CONDITIONS A. Article 3: Contractor 1. Change Paragraph 3.18 to read as follows: a. 3.18 Indemnification 1) 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, and their agents, employees, and consultants from and against all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from or in connection with the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damages, loss, or expense is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by the negligence or fault of a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity what would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in the Agreement. 2) 3.18.2 In any and all Claims against the Owner or the Architect/Engineer or any of their agents, employees, and consultants by any employee of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Section shall not be limited in any way by any limitations on the amount or types of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any subcontractor under the workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. b. Add the following clause to 3.18; 1) 3.18.3 "Claims, damages, losses, and expenses" as these words are used in this agreement shall include claims, damages, losses, or expenses of any sort whatsoever and shall also include, but not be limited to (1) injury or FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary General Conditions 007300 - Page 2 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI damage consequent upon the failure of or use or misuses by Contractor, its Subcontractors, agents, servants, or employees, of any kind of equipment, whether or not the same be owned, furnished, or loaned by Owner; (2) all attorneys' fees and costs incurred in bringing an action to enforce the provisions of this indemnity or any other indemnity contained in the General Conditions, as modified by the Supplementary General Conditions; and (3) time expended by the parties being indemnified and employees, at their usual rates plus cost of travel, long distance telephone, and reproduction of documents. c. Add the following clause to 3.18; 1) 3.18.4 Contractor’s indemnity obligations under this Paragraph 3.18 shall also specifically include, without limitation, all fines, penalties, damages, liability, costs, expenses (including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees), and punitive damages (if any) arising out of, or in connection with, any (i) violation of or failure to comply with any law, statute, ordinance, rule, regulation, code, or requirement of a public authority that bears upon the performance of the Work by Contractor, Subcontractors, or any person or entity for whom either is responsible, (ii) means, methods, procedures, techniques, or sequences of execution or performance of the Work, and (iii) failure to secure and pay for permits, fees, approvals, licenses, and inspections as required under the Contract Documents, or any violation of any permit or other approval of a public authority applicable to the Work, by Contractor, Subcontractors, or any person or entity for whom either is responsible, but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor, Design Consultants, Subcontractor, or any person or entity for whom either is responsible. B. Article 5: Subcontractors 1. 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and other Contracts for Portions of the Work a. 5.2.1 Replace the words "as soon as practicable" (line 1) with the words "within 10 days". C. Article 7: Changes in the Work 1. Add the following Clauses to 7.1.2: 1) 7.1.2.1 All changes in Material or Methods as described in the Plans and Specifications must have written approval by the Owner and Architect prior to incorporation in the Project. 2) 7.1.2.2 All changes in the Plans and Specifications must be documented by a Change Order Form issued by the Architect & approved by the Owner. 3) 7.1.2.3 Total adjustments in Contract Amount are to reflect a reasonable markup to reflect overhead and profit, not to exceed as follows: 4) 7.1.2.3.1 Change executed by Subcontractor: 10% by Subcontractor for overhead and profit and 5% by General Contractor for coordination and profit. The maximum markup by General Contractor & Subcontractor shall not exceed 15% of base labor and material charges. 5) 7.1.2.3.2 Change executed by General Contractor without subcontractor involvement: 10% for overhead and profit. 6) 7.1.2.3.3 General Contractor and Sub-contractors shall provide written detailed documentation for each (sub) contractor showing their time and materials on all changes submitted for review by the Architect unless pre- FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary General Conditions 007300 - Page 3 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI approved at a fixed amount. D. Article 8: Time 1. Add the following new Clause to 8.1.1: 1) 8.1.1.1 The project shall be substantially complete by May 31, 2017. Contractor may, at Contractor’s option, complete the Project at an earlier date to be indicated on the Bid Form. E. Article 9: Payments And Completion 1. 9.3 Application for Payment a. Add to Subparagraph 9.3.1 the following sentence: 1) 9.3.1 The form of Application for Payment shall be a notarized AIA Document G702, APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT, supported by AIA Documents G703, CONTINUATION SHEET. Contractor shall furnish forms. b. Add the following new Clause to 9.3.1: 1) 9.3.1.3 Progress payments shall be made monthly upon application. Monthly estimates will be paid to the Contractor as the work progresses in the amounts equal to ninety-five percent (95%) of the Contract Value of the work completed, including materials and equipment delivered and properly stored at the Project site, during the preceding calendar month, and will be based upon an Application prepared by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Architect. The Contractor shall submit the Application for Payment to the Architect not later than the first day of the following month. City of Muskego shall make payment to the Contractor by the last day of the month. Such monthly payments shall in no way be construed as an act of acceptance for any part of the work, partially or totally completed. The remaining balance of five percent (5%) of the Contract Sum, shall be paid by City of Muskego to the Contractor no earlier than thirty (30) days after the date of final acceptance of said Work by the Owner, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Wisconsin. No such partial of final payment will be due until the Contractor has certified to the City of Muskego that the materials, labor and services involved in each estimate have been paid for in accordance with the requirements stated in the Specifications. Final payment will be issued 30 days after final acceptance of the project by the City Council. F. Article 11: Insurance and Bonds 1. 11.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance. a. Add the following new clause to 11.1.1: 1) 11.1.1.9 Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: a) Premises Operations. b) Owner's and Independent Contractor's Protective. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary General Conditions 007300 - Page 4 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI c) Products and Completed Operations including provision for coverage to be maintained for 1 year after final acceptance. d) Personal and Advertising Injury Liability. e) Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's obligation under Paragraph 3.18. f) Owned, Non-owned, and hired motor vehicles. g) Broad Form Property Damage, including Completed Operations. h) Additional Insured. b. Add the following new Clause to 11.1.2: 1) 11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits, or greater if required by law: a) Workmen's Compensation – Statutory Liability (including a waiver of subrogation clause in favor of the Owner and evidence of coverage). Employers Liability: $500,000 each accident $500,000 disease policy limit $500,000 disease each employee b) Commercial General Liability (including a waiver of subrogation clause in favor of the Owner ) i. Each Occurrence Limit: $1,000,000 per project ii. General Aggregate Limit: $2,000,000 per project iii. Products – Completed Operations Aggregate Limit: $2,000,000 for one (1) year commencing with issuance of the final Certificate of Payment iv. Personal and Advertising Injury Limit: $1,000,000 v. Fire Damage Limit (each fire): $100,000 vi. Medical Damage Limit (any one person): $5,000 vii. Additional Insured listed on Accord form: a. Owner: City of Muskego b. Architect: FEH Design c. Engineer: Henneman Engineering G. With regard to above, such insurance policy shall also include that: a. The insurer expressly agrees and states that the purchase of the policy and the including of the Owner as an Additional Insured does not waive any of the defenses of governmental immunity available to the Owner under Wisconsin Code as it now exists and as it may be amended from time to time. b. The insurer further agrees that this policy of insurance shall cover only those claims not subject to the defense of governmental immunity under Wisconsin Code as it now exists and as it may be amended from time to time. Those claims not subject to Code of Wisconsin shall be covered by the terms and conditions of this insurance policy. a) Automobile Liability - (including a waiver of subrogation clause in favor of the Owner ) FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary General Conditions 007300 - Page 5 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI i. $1,000,000 Combined single limit per accident ii. The insurer expressly agrees and states that the purchase of the policy and the including of the City of Muskego as an Additional Insured does not waive any of the defenses of governmental immunity available to the Owner under Wisconsin Code as it now exists and as it may be amended from time to time. iii. The insurer further agrees that this policy of insurance shall cover only those claims not subject to the defense of governmental immunity under Wisconsin Code as it now exists and as it may be amended from time to time. Those claims not subject to Code of Wisconsin shall be covered by the terms and conditions of this insurance policy. iv.Additional Insured listed on Accord form: a. Owner: City of Muskego b. Architect: FEH Design c. Engineer: Henneman Engineering v. Independent Contractors or Subcontractors shall carry the insurance coverage specified above with the minimum limits set forth herein. General Contractor shall require Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractors to carry insurance coverage of such types and with such minimum limits as may be necessary or appropriate in light of the work being performed by each such Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractor and as may be required by all applicable laws, statutes, rules and regulations provided however, that Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors must, in all cases, provide Worker’s Compensation Insurance with statutory limits. b) Umbrella Liability Insurance: $3,000,000 (each occurrence and aggregate). Refer to Supplemental Insurance requirements, Section 00 7350 for additional requirements. c) The Owner will provide Builder's Risk coverage. Deductible: $1000.00 paid by the claimant. b. Add the following Clause to 11.1.3: 1) 11.1.3.1 The Contractor shall furnish two (2) copies of certificates herein required for each copy of Agreement, which shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by 11.1.1 and 11.1.2. The form, Certificate of Insurance, shall be ACORD 25. AIA Document G715, Supplementary Attachment, (following this section), shall be completed and signed by the Contractor's insurance representative and attached to the ACORD Certificate. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner and the Architect copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits. Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained all insurance required hereunder and such insurance has been approved by Owner, nor shall Contractor allow any sub-contractor to commence work on his subcontract until all insurance required of sub- contractor has been so obtained and approved. Approval of insurance FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary General Conditions 007300 - Page 6 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI required under this article during the life of the Contract, and for no less than one (1) year thereafter. Rejected Certificates of Insurance shall be corrected as necessary and resubmitted until approved. Each and every policy shall contain an endorsement stating that the insurance company will not, prior to completion of contract or any policy expiration date shown on policy and certificate, whichever occurs first, terminate policy or change any coverage therein without first mailing by registered mail, written notice of such action at least thirty (30) days prior to termination or change, to Owner at whose request policy and certificate are issued. 2. 11.2 Owner’s Liability Insurance a. Add the following to the last sentence of Subparagraph 11.2.1: 1) The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance covering the Owner's contingent liability for claims that may arise from operations under the Contract. Limits of $1,000,000 per occurrence with a $2,000,000 aggregate. 3. 11.3 Property Insurance a. Add to clause 11.3.1.1 the following sentence: 1) The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value. b. Add the following Clauses 11.3.1.1 and 11.3.1.2 to 11.3.1: 1) 11.3.1.1 The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than ten (10) days following the date the Agreement is entered into, or if the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished. 2) 11.3.1.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to be a Wisconsin resident agent and affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. c. Change phrase “All Risk” to “Nearly All Risk” to allow for standard policy exclusions. d. Change clause 11.3.1.3 to read as follows: 1) 11.3.1.3 This property insurance is written with a deductible of $1000.00 per occurrence. In the event of a paid claim, the Claimant, including subcontractors, shall be responsible for the deductible amount. Vandalism insurance shall not cover glass breakage. Should the Contractor desire this coverage, Contractor shall carry it at Contractor’s cost. Payments of any insurance deductibles will be at the expense of the party claiming loss under the policy. e. Delete Clause 11.3.1.4 and substitute the following: 1) 11.3.1.4 The Contractor shall provide insurance coverage for portions of the Work stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval, and also for portions of the Work in transit. 4. 11.4 Performance Bond And Payment Bond FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Supplementary General Conditions 007300 - Page 7 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI a. The Contractor shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising there under. Bonds may be obtained through the Contractor’s usual source and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Sum. The amount of each bond shall be equal to 100 percent of the Contract Sum. END OF DOCUMENT 00 7300 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Summary 011000 - Page 1 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner. 4. Work under separate contracts. 5. Owner-furnished products. 6. Access to site. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions. 9. Miscellaneous provisions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: Muskego Public Library Renovations. 1. Project Location: Muskego Public Library S73 W16663 W Janesville Road Muskego, WI 53150 B. Owner: City of Muskego, Muskego, WI. 1. Owner's Representative: Brittany Larson, MLIS Library Director Muskego Public Library p. 262-971-2119 C. Architect: Design. 1. W316 S525 Christopher Way | Delafield, WI 53018. Contact: Project Architect – Gregg Baum, T:262.968.2055 | (F) 515.288.1999 2. 951 Main Street | Dubuque, Iowa 52001. Contact: Intern Architect – Emily Hilgendorf, T:563.583.4900 | (F) 515.288.1999 D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Summary 011000 - Page 2 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Electrical Engineering: Henneman Engineering a. 1232 Fourier Drive, Suite 101, Madison, Wisconsin 53717. Contact Brad Biddick. T: (608) 833-7000 E. Project Web Site: A Project Web site provided by the contractor and administered by Architect will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage. 1. See Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for Contractor's requirements for providing and utilizing the Project Web site. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Renovation of the Children’s Area and associated Program Room; some walls and most finishes will be new. 2. Minor wall deconstruction between adjacent rooms. 3. The structure will utilize existing mechanical units and existing duct configuration. Existing fire suppression systems, mechanical, audio, and electrical systems will require minor reconfiguration. B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. C. Building Permit 1. Contactor shall obtain all permits to complete the Work required by the overseeing municipality. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner. B. Concurrent Work: Owner will not perform any construction operations at Project site. 1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. B. Preceding Work: Owner has performed the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. 1. Relocation of existing shelving, furniture, and equipment in the Children’s Area within construction extents. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Summary 011000 - Page 3 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1. Purchase and installation of building furnishings and equipment. 1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products. B. Owner-Furnished Products (as noted on the drawings): 1. Smart Board 2. TV 1.8 EXISTING AND SALVAGED ITEMS FOR REUSE A. There are a number of existing items that will be installed by the contractor. The Work includes handling, cleaning, protecting, and installing salvaged products and coordinating with the installation of new Work. 1. Refer to section 02 4119 – Selective Demolition, for process and procedures. B. Existing items to be salvaged for reuse: 1. Single door 104.1 lockset hardware at Classroom 104. 2. Ceiling tiles and grid 3. Existing MEP equipment and fixtures disrupted during work 4. Existing coat hanging rack 5. Existing panel signage C. Existing items to be salvaged for Owner: 1. Existing door 104.1 2. Existing hardware at door E102.1 3. Interior LED lights and lamps. 4. Ceiling tiles not used in new work 5. Existing ceiling signage 1.9 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. C. Areas for staging of materials and equipment are limited. Areas available for staging are as indicated on drawings. D. Construction Area: FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Summary 011000 - Page 4 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. A portion of the existing staff parking area will be dedicated to the contractor as indicated in the drawings. Coordinate location and number of parking spaces used with the Owner. a. See Section 01 5000 “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for requirements; coordinate area with Owner. 1.10 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work to normal business working hours of 7 a.m. to 8 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated or coordinated with the owner. 1. Weekend Hours: there are no restrictions on weekend hours, other than as noted above. If weekend hours are anticipated, the contractor shall coordinate and schedule with the owner so a building representative can be on site. 2. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Preferred hours for shutting down building utilities is between 7 am and 9 am, when the library is not open to the public. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving adjacent facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Coordinate a time for noisy work outside of normal library hours of operation. 3. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 50 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing building and on Project site is NOT PERMITTED. 1.11 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Summary 011000 - Page 5 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 1000 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Work Sequence And Phasing Schedule 011216 - Page 1 of 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 1216 - WORK SEQUENCE AND PHASING SCHEDULE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PROJECT CONSTRUCTION A. It is anticipated that building construction will be built a single construction phase as identified here. The Owner will occupy the building throughout the entire construction project. B. Project work includes: demolition and renovation of the existing Children’s Area, Classroom, existing Office, and a portion of the central atrium. The parking lot outside man door E106.1 will be used for staging during the entire construction project. The library will remain in operation in the remainder of the space. C. Protect library areas along construction materials path and within the construction barriers. D. Provide construction barriers as required for safety. E. Large and noisy activities shall be conducted outside of library hours of operations except as coordinated with the owner. F. The Contractor shall prepare a milestone schedule identifying the duration of the phases of construction activity. This schedule will be shared with the Owner during project start-up to coordinate Owner scheduled moving of library book collections and furniture. G. The Contractor shall confine all operations to the areas within the Construction Limits as shown on the Drawings for construction and Contractor storage, staging, and operations. The Contractor shall notify the Architect and the Owner’s Representative in advance if it becomes necessary to exceed these limits. H. The Contractor shall coordinate all steps of the Work in advance with the Architect and the Owner to ensure Project areas are secure and safe for adjacent occupancy and use at all times. I. If the Prime Contractor, or any Subcontractor, delays progress for any reason, other than those allowed by the General Conditions, the Prime Contractor, or any Subcontractor, shall take all necessary steps to expedite their Contract Work to maintain project phasing and shall be responsible for damages resulting from their delay. J. The Prime Contractor, and all Subcontractors, agree that whether or not any delay shall be the basis for an extension of time, they shall have no claim against the Owner or the Architect for any increase in the Contract Amount, nor a claim against the Owner or Architect for a payment or allowance of any kind for damage, loss, or expense resulting from delays. END OF SECTION 01 1216 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Allowances 012100 - Page 1 of 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Contingency allowances. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.6 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance and shall include furnishing, delivery to Project site, and installing. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Allowances 012100 - Page 2 of 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for labor, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. 1.7 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by AIA form G703 that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B. Changes authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes (if applicable to Project), insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs. C. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower- priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1: Contingency Allowance: Include a contingency allowance of $12,000.00 for use according to Owner’s instructions. Any unused amount will be returned to the Owner. END OF SECTION 012100 FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Alternates 012300 - Page 1 of 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 2300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net “addition to” or “deduction from” the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Alternates 012300 - Page 2 of 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: Classroom Lighting Controls. 1.Base Bid Description: Include all demolition, lighting, power and low voltage rough in work associated with the project except for the scope of work noted in the alternate. 2.Alternate Description: Include all Type C24, C48, DMX controls (with control cabling) and associated branch circuit connections shown of installation in Classroom 104 END OF SECTION 01 2300 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Contract Modification Procedures 012600 - Page 1 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 2600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1. AIA Document A201 referenced in this Project Manual which outlines specific project related requirements for contract modifications. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall develop and implement change procedures as follows: 1. Prepare written Requests for Information (RFIs) to the Architect. 2. Provide written response to Architect's Supplemental Instructions. 3. Provide full written data and record system required to evaluate proposed changes. 4. Provide full documentation to Architect on Proposal Requests, Construction Change Directives and Change Orders. 5. Maintain detailed records of any Work proposed to be completed on a materials and labor basis. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Request for Information (RFI): A written request prepared and issued by the Contractor to the Architect as a method to request Clarifications or changes to the Contract Documents. Also a written request by a Subcontractor to the Contractor which may be incorporated into the Contractor's RFI to the Architect. B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions (ASI), AIA Document G710, current edition: A written order, instructions or interpretation, prepared and issued by the Architect to the Contractor making minor changes in the Work, not involving a change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. C. Proposal Request (PR), AIA Document G709, current edition: A written request prepared and issued by the Architect to the Contractor to provide a cost for a possible change in the Work and/or a possible adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. D. Construction Change Directive (CCD): A written order prepared and issued by the Architect and signed by the Contractor, the Architect and the Owner directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. E. Change Order (CO): See General Conditions, Subparagraph 7.2.1 for definition. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Contract Modification Procedures 012600 - Page 2 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.4 CLARIFICATIONS A. If the Contractor finds errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall report all such conditions to the Architect, in writing, within a reasonable time not exceeding twenty-one (21) days after first observance. B. If the Contractor requires additional direction to proceed with the Work, the Contractor shall prepare a Request for Information (RFI), present all related data and forward it to the Architect. C. The Architect will reply, in writing, to all RFIs. D. The Contractor shall prepare and maintain a written Project RFI Log listing as a minimum: the RFI Number, Date Issued, Subject, Date of Architect's Responses, and Remarks. E. The Contractor shall update the Project RFI Log prior to every Construction Progress Meeting and provide copies for review and discussion at every Construction Progress Meeting. F. Refer to Section 01 3100 – Project Management and Coordination, for additional information and requirements for RFI methods and procedures. 1.5 PRELIMINARY CHANGE PROCEDURES A. At the request of the Contractor, Architect or Owner for a Clarification of the Contract Documents, the Architect may prepare and issue to the Contractor three (3) original copies of an Architect's Supplemental Instruction (ASI). The Contractor shall review the ASI, sign the ASI if in agreement with it, retain one (1) copy and return two (2) copies to the Architect. The Architect will retain one (1) original copy of the ASI, and transmit one (1) original copy to the Owner. B. Contractor will have 5 business days to review distributed ASI and comment. If the contractor has an objection, clarifications, or modification to the ASI, the Contractor must respond within the 5 days. After 5 business days, or with no comments, the ASI will become final and part of the contract documents. 1.6 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. When a possible change in the Work is being considered, the Architect will prepare and issue to the Contractor a Proposal Request. Proposal Requests will include: 1. A detailed description and location of the proposed change in the Work. 2. Additional or revised Drawings and Specifications. B. The Proposal Request is for information only, and is not an instruction to execute the proposed changes. C. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Contract Modification Procedures 012600 - Page 3 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. D. The Contractor shall promptly reply to each Proposal Request within fourteen (14) calendar days, submitting a "not-to-exceed" price for any changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contractor shall provide time and materials breakdowns for each portion of the proposed Work in accordance with the General Conditions Section 00 7200 with sufficient substantiating data to allow the Architect to evaluate the proposed costs. E. The Owner shall have up to thirty (30) days, or such other time as may be agreed upon, in which to accept or reject the Contractor's proposal after its submission, and the Contractor shall not modify or withdraw the proposal during this period without the consent of the Owner. F. The Architect will evaluate the Contractor's response to each Proposal Request against recognized cost estimating references. Upon acceptance of the Contractor's "not-to-exceed" price, the Architect will include the Proposal request into a subsequent change order. G. When the Work of the Construction Change Directive (CCD) is complete, a Change Order (CO) will be processed. The Contractor shall submit time, materials and receipts records for review upon completion of authorized Work. 1.7 PREPARATION AND PROCESSING OF CHANGE ORDER A. When accepted by the Owner, Construction Change Directives (CCD) and PR’s will be incorporated into Change Orders (CO). B. The Architect will prepare each Change Order using the Owner's format or AIA Documents. C. A Change Order may include Contractor responses to one or more Proposal Requests and Construction Change Directives (CCD). D. Change Orders will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with references to revised Contract Documents or other supporting documents to define details of the changes. E. Change Orders will include an accounting of the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time. F. The Contractor, Architect, and then the Owner will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their agreement. G. The Owner will process the Change Order for final encumbrance by the Owner's fiscal department. H. The Owner will return fully executed copies of the Change Order to the Contractor and the Architect. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Contract Modification Procedures 012600 - Page 4 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI I. The Contractor shall include all adjustments to the Contract Sum in all subsequent Applications for Payment only after receipt of a fully executed copy of each Change Order. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 2600 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Payment Procedures 012900 - Page 1 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. AIA Document A201, referenced in this Project Manual for reference to procedures and requirements of County. 2. Section 01 2600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. d. Contractors Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Architect will review Initial Schedule of Values and make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required. 4. Architect will not review initial Application for Payment without approving the initial Schedule of Values. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Payment Procedures 012900 - Page 2 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one- hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a breakdown of major cost items in the General Conditions as separate line items for the Schedule of Values. Include the following items, applicable to the Project, as part of the contractor’s normal breakdown. a. Bonds, insurance b. Mobilization c. Demobilization d. Permits and fees e. Shop drawings (include in individual product or in total in the General Conditions. f. Record Drawings g. Close out 6. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 7. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. It is required to include evidence of insurance for any items stored off-site, if these items are included on an application for payment. Provide the standard ACORD insurance Form for any items stored off-site. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Payment Procedures 012900 - Page 3 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 8. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is as determined by the Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is one month. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on- site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. a. Certificate of Insurance shall list the Marathon County as additional insured. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Payment Procedures 012900 - Page 4 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. 4. Retainage: Deduct 5% from the completed work covered by each Application for Payment until the project is “Substantially Completed” as determined by the County, at which time the County will pay 95% of the total net amount earned. F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Architect. H. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Include with each Application for Payment. Refer to Section 01 7419 “Construction Waste Management and Disposal” for content. I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. Initial progress report. 8. Report of preconstruction conference. 9. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 10. Performance and payment bonds. J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Payment Procedures 012900 - Page 5 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 3. Submit “Certificate of Completion Request” Form included in this Project Manual. Review of project will not take place until receipt of this Form. K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 2900 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - Page 1 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project Web site. 5. Project meetings. B. Related Requirements: 1. AIA Document A201 referenced in Project Manual which outlines specific project related requirements for project management and coordination. 2. Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Section 01 7300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field- engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 4. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontractor List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - Page 2 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities, and activities of other contractors, to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - Page 3 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Coordination Plan: provide coordination drawings showing required installation of new work prior to and subsequent to new activities. 2. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple sub-contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - Page 4 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire- alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, buss way, generator, and motor control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads 9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. 1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents and if not possible to request interpretation at the next Project Meeting, the Contractor is to call the Architect to review and determine if an RFI is required. If so determined by the Contractor and Architect, the Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project numbers. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - Page 5 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or a Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Proposal Request according to Section 01 2600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log at each Project Meeting and review any new RFI’s and / or any recently answered RFI’s that need discussion. 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.8 PROJECT WEB SITE A. Use Architect's Project Web site (FTP Site) for purposes of hosting and managing project communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following information: 1. Project directory. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - Page 6 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. Project correspondence. 3. Meeting minutes. 4. Contract modifications forms and logs. 5. RFI forms and logs. 6. Photo documentation. 7. Submittals forms and logs. 8. Payment application forms. B. Project Correspondence will be coordinated through email. 1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Contractor shall schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner, Architect and Contractor of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Contractor, within four business days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule (and will conduct simultaneously with the Contractor) a Preconstruction Conference before starting construction activities, at a time convenient to Owner and Contractor, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. l. Use of the premises and existing building. m. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. q. Construction waste management and recycling. r. Use of site and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - Page 7 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI u. Security. v. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. D. Project Closeout Conference: Architect shall schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Contractor, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. e. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. f. Submittal procedures. g. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Project Close out Request form: identify expected date when form will be completed and submitted to Architect. Include date on Construction Schedule. 5. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: The Contractor shall conduct progress meetings at biweekly (every other week) intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Management And Coordination 013100 - Page 8 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Access. 6) Site utilization. 7) Temporary facilities and controls. 8) Progress cleaning. 9) Quality and work standards. 10) Status of correction of deficient items. 11) Field observations. 12) Status of RFIs. 13) Status of proposal requests. 14) Pending changes. 15) Status of Change Orders. 16) Pending claims and disputes. 17) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. F. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 3100 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Progress Documentation 013200 - Page 1 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 3200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's demolition and construction schedule. 3. Material location reports. 4. Site condition reports. 5. Special reports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Progress Documentation 013200 - Page 2 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. F. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file. B. Startup construction schedule. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label. D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. E. Daily Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. F. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals. G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. H. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 2. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, and interim milestones. 3. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 4. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 5. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 8. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Progress Documentation 013200 - Page 3 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 10. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. 2. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 3. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. B. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 2. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 01 1000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Uninterruptible services. b. Provisions for future construction. c. Seasonal variations. d. Environmental control. 4. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Progress Documentation 013200 - Page 4 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. D. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. 2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer completing, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. C. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 3. Equipment at Project site. 4. Material deliveries. 5. Accidents. 6. Meetings and significant decisions. 7. Unusual events (see special reports). 8. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Progress Documentation 013200 - Page 5 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 9. Emergency procedures. 10. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 11. Change Orders received and implemented. 12. Services connected and disconnected. 13. Equipment or system tests and startups. 14. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site and materials removed and recycled or disposed of off-site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Progress Documentation 013200 - Page 6 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01 3200 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Submittal Procedures 013300 - Page 1 of 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Division 1 Specification Section 01 3305 – Electronic Submittal Requirements for procedures of posting documents to a Project Web site. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples required by Contract Documents. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 5. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as informational submittals. C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Submittal Procedures 013300 - Page 2 of 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 3. Format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category. d. Description of the Work covered. e. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of PDF versions of “PLAN” Drawings of the Contract Drawings may be provided by Architect, upon request, for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals except as noted elsewhere. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor digital data drawing PDF files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings. Copies of Architect’s digital files submitted as a required submittal without additional contractor specified information will be returned to the Contractor. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. The following plot (PDF) files will be furnished for each appropriate discipline: 1) Plan type drawings. 2) Building detail drawings will not be provided B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Submittal Procedures 013300 - Page 3 of 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including re-submittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Re-submittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each re-submittal. 4. Hardware submittals: Allow 30 days for the review of this submittal. During this time period, a hardware meeting will be scheduled with the owner, contractor and the AHJ to review each opening requirement with adjustments made as needed for operation. Contractor will be required to resubmit the hardware submittal, updated with any modifications. a. The keying meeting with owner will take place during this period. D. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single file for each submittal required. Submit each required submittal at the same time for the whole division. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 3. Provide means for electronic insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Include the following information on a sheet: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Related physical samples submitted directly. m. Other necessary identification. 5. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file metadata: a. Project name. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Submittal Procedures 013300 - Page 4 of 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Product name. E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect. F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. 1. Submittals not reviewed by the General Contractor and stamped such will be rejected and sent back to the General Contractor for review. General Contractor to provide enough evidence of review, prior to submitting to the Architect for review. If upon review by the Architect, it is so deemed that the General Contractor did not review the submittal based on the amount of corrections that the Architect identifies, the Architect will cease review of the submittal and stamp as Revise and Resubmit without further review. G. Additional Submittal Copies: Unless an additional submittal is required for final submittal or maintenance manuals, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. H. Re-submittals: Make re-submittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. I. Distribution: Furnish electronic copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files may be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with the Project, subject to the following conditions: 1. Electronic copies of plan-type drawings will be made available at a cost of $100.00 per file, payable to the Architect and/or Mechanical/Electrical Engineer, depending on sheets requested, for each requested drawing. Electronic copies will be distributed upon receipt of service fee and signed agreement. 2. Contractor making request shall not distribute files to other parties. B. Contractor making request shall provide a signed copy of the CAD/ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER TO CONTRACTOR form. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Submittal Procedures 013300 - Page 5 of 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in electronic format only. 2. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site specifically established for Project. (See Section 01 3305 for electronic submittal requirements) a. Architect will review electronic submittals and post annotated PDF electronic files directly to the project website for general contractor’s use as directed in submittal comments. b. Contractor to annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. An electronic copy of all final, approved shop drawing submittals shall be submitted to the Owner at Project Close-Out. See Project Close-Out Section 4. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. 6. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Submittal Procedures 013300 - Page 6 of 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a.PDF electronic file. b. Color Charts or items requiring true color representation not conducive to scanning or electronic formats: 1) Number of Copies: Submit the number of copies to the Architect which the Contractor requires, plus two-(2) which will be retained by the Architect, Architect’s Consultant. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than (30 by 42 inches)]. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. For all submittals larger than 11”x17”, Contractor shall submit one (1) Full Size paper copy to Architect for reference only in addition to the electronic submittal. Paper copy will not be returned. Submittal will be returned after 7 calendar days if paper copy is not received by the Architect’s office. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Submit transmittal of sample shipment, onto the Project Web Site. Transmittal will be returned after 7 calendar days if samples are not received by the Architect’s office. 3. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Submittal Procedures 013300 - Page 7 of 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. 6. Number of Samples: Submit the number of copies to the Architect which the Contractor requires, plus two-(2) which will be retained by the Architect, Architect’s Consultant. a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. b. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a.PDF electronic file. F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." I. Subcontractor List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Submittal Procedures 013300 - Page 8 of 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 4. Submit subcontract list in the following format: a.PDF electronic file. J. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. T. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Submittal Procedures 013300 - Page 9 of 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. V. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. W. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 2. Final-but-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with both the Architect’s notations and corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT” or “REJECTED," do not proceed with the Work covered by the submittal, including FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Submittal Procedures 013300 - Page 10 of 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the Architect's notations. Resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. a. Do not permit submittals marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT” or “REJECTED" to be used at the Project Site or elsewhere where construction is in progress. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. G. Submittals that clearly demonstrate lack of review by the Contractor will be immediately be returned without review. H. The Architect’s review of these submittals is only for general conformance with the design concept of the work and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the drawings and specifi- cations. I. The review is not intended to be exhaustive; nor is the Architect or Owner’s Representative obligated to verify dimensions, quantities, or the performance of any systems. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Submittal Procedures 013300 - Page 11 of 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI CAD/ELECTRONIC FILE TRANSFER TO CONTRACTOR Dear Contractor requesting Files: At your request, FEH Design and its Consultants may provide electronic files for your convenience and use in the preparation of shop drawings related to the Muskego Public Library Renovations, subject to the following terms and conditions: Our electronic files are generated into AutoCAD drawing files. FEH Design and its Consultants make no representation as to the compatibility of these files with your hardware or your software. Please advise FEH Design of the desired AutoCAD version you are requesting. Data contained on these electronic files are part of our instruments of service and shall not be used by you for any purpose other than as a convenience in the preparation of the shop drawings for the referenced project. Any other use or reuse by you or by others will be at your sole risk and without liability or legal exposure to FEH Design or our Consultants. You agree to make no claim and hereby waive, to the fullest extent permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against FEH Design, our officers, directors, employees, agents or sub-consultants that may arise out of or in connection with your use of these electronic files. Furthermore, you shall, to the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold FEH Design and its Consultants harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable attorney’s fees and defense costs arising out of or resulting from your use of these electronic files. These electronic files are not construction documents. Differences may exist between these electronic files and corresponding hard-copy construction documents. FEH Design and it’s consultants makes no representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic files you receive. In the event that a conflict arises between the signed or sealed hard-copy construction documents, the signed or sealed hard-copy shall govern. You are responsible for determining if any conflict exists. By your use of these electronic files, you are not relieved of your duty to fully comply with the contract documents, including, and without limitation, the need to check, confirm and coordinate all dimensions and details, take field measurements, verify field conditions and coordinate your work with that of other contractors for the project. Because information presented on the electronic files can be modified, unintentionally or otherwise, FEH Design and its Consultants reserve the right to remove all indication of ownership and/or involvement from each electronic display. FEH Design will furnish you electronic files of the following drawing sheets: List of Contractor Requested Drawings:______________________________________________ AutoCAD version (ie. AutoCAD 2010, AutoCAD 2009 etc.): ______________________________ Under no circumstances shall delivery of the electronic files for use by you be deemed a sale by FEH Design, and we make no warranties, either express or implied, of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose. In no event shall FEH Design or its Consultants be liable for any loss of profit or any consequential damages as a result of your use or reuse of these electronic files. (Contractor name and title) (Officer or Legally Responsible Party) (Company) (Title) (Address) (Date) (Address) END OF SECTION 01 3300 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Electronic Submittal Procedures 013305 - Page 1 of 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 3305 – ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Electronic Shop Drawings, Electronic Product Data, and other electronic submittals. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for general submittal requirements. 2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 5. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1. Archive copies of Project Website files. 2. Website provider operation and access instructions. 1.4 DEFINITIONS: A. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PROJECT WEBSITE PROVIDER A. Electronic Submittal Website Provider: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products and/or service under their current licensing agreements by one of the following: FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Electronic Submittal Procedures 013305 - Page 2 of 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. “Submittal Exchange” website service designed specifically for transmitting submittals between construction team members. www.submittalexchange.com. (1-800-714-0024) 2. “Newforma Project Cloud” (web based) designed for transmitting project information between construction team members. Www.newformaprojectcloud.com 1-800-303-4650 or email: projectcloud@newforma.com 3. “Building Works DataStart” (web based) designed for transmitting project information between construction team members. http://www.buildingworksinc.com/ 4. Pre-approved equal website provider. B. Requirements: 1. No special hardware required 2. Unlimited user accounts 3. Provide project training and support 4. Ability to archive all project documents at end of project. 5. File sharing 6. Option for mobile device access 2.2 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. The following submittals and paperwork shall be transmitted to Architect in electronic (PDF) format via a website service designed specifically for transmitting submittals between construction team members. The contractor shall use the FTP site for the following information: 1. Shop drawing submittals 2. Product data submittals 3. Requests for Information 4. Project Directory 5. Project Correspondence 6. Contractor’s reports 7. Project Meeting Minutes 8. Contract Modification (Change Orders) Logs 9. Request For Information forms, responses and logs 10. Architectural Supplemental Instructions (ASI’s) and logs 11. Online document collaboration files 12. Project photographs and videos 13. Special Inspection reports B. The electronic submittal process is not intended for the following: 1. Color samples, color charts, physical material samples. 2. Applications for Payment, and other submittals not related to shop drawings and product data and not indicated above. C. Provide and use project website for purposes of managing project information and documentation noted elsewhere until Final Completion. D. Project WebSite administration: Project website will be administered by the Architect/Engineer. 2.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections as required by Specification Section 01 3300. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Electronic Submittal Procedures 013305 - Page 3 of 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. The intent of electronic submittals is to expedite the construction process by reducing paperwork, improving information flow, and decreasing turnaround time. 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF files directly to the site specifically established for this project. C. Submittal Preparation - Contractor may use any or all of the following options: 1. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide electronic (PDF) submittals to Contractor via email. 2. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide electronic (PDF) submittals to Contractor via the established submittal website. 3. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide paper submittals to General Contractor who electronically scans and converts all submittals to PDF format. D. Contractor shall review and apply electronic stamp certifying that each submittal complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents including verification of manufacturer / product, dimensions and coordination of information with other parts of the work. E. Contractor transmits each submittal using the established submittal website, and then is to notify the Architect. F. Architect / Engineer, review comments will be made available on the established submittal website for downloading. Contractor will receive email notice of completed review. G. Distribution of reviewed submittals to subcontractors and suppliers is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Contractor to submit CD-ROM copies of reviewed submittals at project closeout for record purposes in accordance with Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures 2.4 COSTS A. Contractor shall include the cost of Electronic Submittal Website services in their proposal. This cost is included in the Contract Amount. 1. The intent is for the Electronic Submittal Website service cost to be used in lieu of postage or shipping costs typically paid for paper submittals. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for training their employees and/or sub-contractors regarding use of website and PDF submittals. 3. Internet Service and Equipment Requirements: a. Email address and Internet access at Contractor’s main office and at the project site office. b. Adobe Acrobat (www.adobe.com) or other similar PDF review software for applying electronic stamps and comments. PART 3 - EXECUTION – Not Used END OF SECTION 01 3305 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Quality Requirements 014000 - Page 1 of 11 Muskego Pubic Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B.Contractor is responsible for all testing and monitoring on the project unless specifically noted to be provided by Owner in subsequent specification Sections. C. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. General Quality Control B. Workmanship C. Manufacturer's Instructions D. Manufacturer's Certificates E. Mockups F. Manufacturer's Field Services G. Testing Laboratory Services H. Testing Agency Qualifications and Quality Assurance FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Quality Requirements 014000 - Page 2 of 11 Muskego Pubic Library Renovations Muskego, WI I. Inspections J. Retest Responsibility K. Contractor's Responsibilities L. Payment for Tests M. Special Structural Testing and Inspection 1.4 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 007200 - General Conditions: Inspecting and testing required by governing authorities. B. Section 01 3300 - Submittals: Submittal of Manufacturer's Instructions and Certificates. C. Quality Assurance and Quality Control paragraphs of each Technical Specifications Section. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. OC = Owner’s Consultant B. OITL = Owner’s Independent Testing Laboratory C. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. D. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Quality Requirements 014000 - Page 3 of 11 Muskego Pubic Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force- resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Quality Requirements 014000 - Page 4 of 11 Muskego Pubic Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Quality Requirements 014000 - Page 5 of 11 Muskego Pubic Library Renovations Muskego, WI D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that is similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 1.10 QUALITY CONTROL A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturer’s products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. Quality control is the Contractor’s primary responsibility. B. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. 1.11 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES: A. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate all Pre-Construction, Pre-Installation, and Construction Testing and Inspection Operations. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of five (5) working days’ notice to the OITL, and the appropriate firms and/or agencies before starting Work requiring inspection or testing. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of three (3) working days’ notice thereafter for each testing or inspection for the continuation of that item with reasonable date and time fixed for such inspections and tests. If the Work is covered up prior to any required testing or observation, it shall be uncovered for review at the Contractor's expense. B. Contractors shall cooperate with the OC and OITL personnel, and shall provide all scaffolding, staging or temporary heat necessary for OITL to access the Work, and the manufacturer's operations. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Quality Requirements 014000 - Page 6 of 11 Muskego Pubic Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Contractors shall provide to the OITL without cost, samples of proposed materials which require testing and pay shipping costs of such samples to the OITL's or other testing agencies' facility. D. Contractors shall provide the preliminary design mix(es) proposed to be used for concrete and other materials to the OITL which require verification for compliance or testing by the OITL. E. Contractors shall furnish copies of test reports as required. F. Contractors shall furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary: G. To provide access to the Work to be tested, H. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be tested, I. To facilitate inspections and tests. The Contractor shall notify the Architect, OC and OITL a minimum of three (3) working days prior to expected times for operations requiring the OC's or OITL's services. J. The Contractor shall notify the Architect, OC and OITL a minimum of three (3) working days prior to expected times for operations requiring the OC's or OITL's services. K. Contractors shall make arrangements with the OITL and pay for additional samples and tests taken for Contractor's convenience. L. Inspection and testing shall in no way relieve the Contractor or supplier from responsibility for furnishing materials and workmanship in accordance with the Contract Documents. M. Contractors shall comply with other instructions from the Architect regarding testing. 1.12 PAYMENT FOR TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. In general, the Contractor shall pay for Pre-Construction laboratory tests, field tests, and inspections conducted to determine the quality of materials and workmanship at the site. B. The Owner will not pay for testing of mechanical and electrical systems, unless specified otherwise. C. The Contractor shall pay for all retesting, re-inspection and re-observation costs. 1.13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, GENERAL A. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Quality Requirements 014000 - Page 7 of 11 Muskego Pubic Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. 1.14 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards unless more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. B. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. 1.15 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with Manufacturer's Instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. Should Manufacturer's Instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. 1.16 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When required by individual Specifications Section, submit Manufacturer's Certificate and/or Test Reports confirming that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.17 MOCKUPS A. When required by individual Specifications Section, erect complete, full-scale mockup of assembly at Project site. Remove mockup when directed by Architect or as indicated in individual Sections. 1.18 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES: A. Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures." B. Manufacturer's Representative shall submit written reports to the Architect, Owner and Contractor listing observations and recommendations. 1.19 MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL SERVICES: A. Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Quality Requirements 014000 - Page 8 of 11 Muskego Pubic Library Renovations Muskego, WI conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. 1.20 RETEST RESPONSIBILITIES A. Where results of required inspections, tests, or similar prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance of related Work with requirements of the Contract Documents, then retests are the responsibility of the Contractor, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's responsibility. Retesting of Work revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on original Work. B. When any testing or observations indicate the Work is non-compliant with the Contract Documents, all retesting and re-observations shall be performed by the Owner's testing or observation agencies. All costs for retesting and re-observations, including additional services of the design professionals, the design professional's consultants and the Owner's consultants are the Contractor's responsibility and shall be deducted from the Contract Sum by Change Order. 1.21 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. The Owner will select and pay for and the Contractor shall schedule the services of the Owner's Consultant (OC) and the Owners Independent Testing Laboratories, (OITL) to perform inspections, tests, and other services required by various Specification Sections. B. The Owner will employ and pay for a Special Inspector, if required by code authorities having jurisdiction, to provide structural system inspections during construction as may be required by applicable codes. The Contractor shall coordinate operations with the Special Inspector and cooperate with the Special Inspector in the required inspections. C. When initial tests find noncompliance with the Contract Documents, all retesting will be performed by the OILT and all retesting costs shall be deducted from the Contract Sum by Change Order. D. The Contractor shall employ and pay for services of laboratories to perform all other inspections, tests, and services required by individual Specification Sections. Services shall be performed in accordance with requirements of governing authorities and with specified standards. E. The design mixes to be prepared and the design mix tests required for the Project before construction begins shall be arranged and paid for separately by the Contractor. F. All tests specified and/or required by code, permit, or regulatory requirements shall be arranged and paid for separately by the Contractor, unless noted otherwise. G. The Contractor shall include the costs of all Contractor testing requirements in their bid price. H. Reports on tests from both the OITL and the Contractor's laboratories will be sent to the Contractor, the Architect, the Structural Engineer, the Owner's Representative and the Owner giving observations and results of tests, indicating compliance or noncompliance with specified standards and with Contract Documents. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Quality Requirements 014000 - Page 9 of 11 Muskego Pubic Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.22 TESTING AGENCY QUALIFICATIONS A. "Approved Independent Testing Laboratory" shall mean an independent testing agency acceptable to the Owner and the Architect and possessing the professional qualifications, equipment and personnel to perform the specified tests and to evaluate and report the results. 1.23 TESTING AGENCY QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Laboratory shall comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329. B. Laboratory shall maintain a full-time registered Engineer on staff to review services. C. Laboratory shall be authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located. D. Testing equipment shall be calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either NBS Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. E. No rejected materials shall be incorporated into the Work. All rejected materials shall be immediately identified by the Laboratory, marked and removed from the site at no expense to the Owner. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Quality Requirements 014000 - Page 10 of 11 Muskego Pubic Library Renovations Muskego, WI H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.24 REFERENCES A. ASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. B. ASTM E329 - Standard Recommended Practice for Inspecting and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction. 1.25 INSPECTIONS A. When the Specifications, Architect's instruction, laws, ordinances or any public authority requires any Work to be inspected or approved, the Contractor shall provide a minimum of five (5) working days’ notice to the appropriate firms and/or agencies before starting Work requiring inspection or testing. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of three (3) working days’ notice thereafter for each testing or inspection for the continuation of that item with a reasonable date and time fixed for such inspections and tests. If the Work is covered up prior to any required testing or observation, it shall be uncovered for review at the Contractor's expense. B. Inspection and testing services are required to verify certain aspects of the Work for compliances with requirements specified or indicated for the Owner. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliances with Contract Document requirements. C. Inspection and testing agencies are not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 1.26 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES AND REPORTS A. The OITL agency and other inspection consultants shall submit reports and shall conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether to the best of their knowledge; (1) test specimens and observations comply with Contract Documents, and specifically state any deviations, (2) record types and locations of defects found in Work, (3) record Work required and performed, to correct deficiencies. B. Reports for tests and inspections shall be submitted in a timely manner to the Contractor, Building Official (if required), the Architect, the Structural Engineer, the Owner's Representative and the Owner. 1. Submit Reports for ongoing Work, to provide the information noted below: a. Date issued. b. Project title c. Firm name and address d. Name and signature of tester or inspector e. Date and time of sampling f. Date of test or inspection g. Identification of Specification Section and products FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Quality Requirements 014000 - Page 11 of 11 Muskego Pubic Library Renovations Muskego, WI h. Location in Project, including elevations, grid location and detail i. Type of test or inspection j. Results of tests or inspections and interpretations of same k. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents or deviations therefrom 2. Submit two (2) original copies of a final, signed Report to the Owner stating that, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, the Work requiring testing and/or inspection conformed to the Construction Documents. C. The OITL agency and/or inspectors shall submit reports including similar information as described in subparagraph A. above for conventional testing and inspection requirements as described in the Specifications in a timely manner to the Contractor, the Architect, the Structural Engineer, the Owner's Inspection Consultant(s), the Owner's Representative and the Owner, all as directed by the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 7300 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01 4000 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 References 014200 - Page 1 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 4200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 References 014200 - Page 2 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com. 2. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org. 3. AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www.transportation.org. 5. AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org. 6. ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org. 7. ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org. 8. ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org. 9. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org. 10. AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org. 11. AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org. 12. AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org. 13. AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org. 14. AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org. 15. AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org. 16. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org. 17. AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org. 18. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org. 19. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org. 20. ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org. 21. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com. 22. APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org. 23. APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org. 24. API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org. 25. ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 26. ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). 27. ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org. 28. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org. 29. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See ASCE). 30. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; www.ashrae.org. 31. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers); www.asme.org. 32. ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org. 33. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. 34. ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials International); www.astm.org. 35. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 36. AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 References 014200 - Page 3 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 37. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 38. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 39. AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood-Preservers' Association); www.awpa.com. 40. AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 41. AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 42. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 43. BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com. 44. BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org. 45. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.com. 46. BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org. 47. BOCA - BOCA; (Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.); (See ICC). 48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); www.bwfbadminton.org. 49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 51. CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org. 52. CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. 54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 55. CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org. 56. CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 57. CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org. 58. CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org. 61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 62. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 63. CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca. 64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa- international.org. 65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org. 66. CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org. 68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 69. DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; www.ec-central.org. 72. ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECA). 73. EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 74. EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. 75. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. 76. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 77. ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 78. EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. 79. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 80. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation); www.fivb.org. 81. FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com. 82. FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com. 83. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. 84. FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 References 014200 - Page 4 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 85. FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org. 86. GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org. 87. GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com. 88. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 89. HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org. 90. HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 91. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). 92. HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 93. HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com. 94. IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org. 95. IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA). 96. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC). 97. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 98. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net. 99. ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org. 100. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org. 101. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch. 102. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org. 103. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America); www.ies.org. 104. IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES). 105. IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org. 106. IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org. 107. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 108. ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com. 109. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com. 110. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org. 111. ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA). 112. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org. 113. ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. 114. ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). 115. ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home. 116. KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org. 117. LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 118. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 119. MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. 120. MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 121. MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. 122. MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org. 123. MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org. 124. MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com. 125. MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com. 126. MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com. 127. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-hq.org. 128. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 129. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 130. NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 131. NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org. 132. NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com. 133. NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 References 014200 - Page 5 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 134. NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 135. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 136. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 137. NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. 138. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org. 139. NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 140. NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org. 141. NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org. 142. NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA). 143. NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 144. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 145. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org. 146. NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 147. NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 148. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 149. NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. 150. NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); www.nsf.org. 151. NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 152. NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. 153. NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 154. NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 155. PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 156. PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 157. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association); www.plasa.org. 158. RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 159. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 160. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 161. SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org. 162. SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 163. SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 164. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. 165. SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com. 166. SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See ASCE). 167. SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org. 168. SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org. 169. SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org. 170. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 171. SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org. 172. SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org. 173. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. 174. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org. 175. SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org. 176. SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com. 177. SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org. 178. STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com. 179. SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com. 180. SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. 181. TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 182. TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America); www.tileusa.com. 183. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 References 014200 - Page 6 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 184. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org. 185. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 186. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org. 187. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org. 188. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 189. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; www.tileroofing.org. 190. UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC). 191. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com. 192. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org. 193. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org. 194. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org. 195. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org. 196. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org. 197. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. 198. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org. 199. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com. 200. WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California); www.wicnet.org. 201. WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA). 202. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com. 203. WPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org. B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de. 2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 3. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 4. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org. C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD - Department of Defense; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil. 5. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. 8. FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov. 9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; www.trb.org. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 References 014200 - Page 7 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 17. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.ojp.usdoj.gov. 18. USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org. 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil. 3. DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil. a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb. 6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See USAB). PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 4200 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - Page 1 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service: Pay water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. The Contractor is responsible for all appurtenances and costs associated with supplying water during construction operations C. Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. D. Dust- Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - Page 2 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. C. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.The library will be occupying the space during construction. Extensive coordination will be required throughout the project to ensure the safety of the public and staff utilizing the library during construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide solid surface barricade materials for protection of the public during the construction activities. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. A space within the existing building can be used, if available. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 6 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack and marker boards. Plans will be utilized on the conference table or on a separate plan table. 2. Drinking water. 3. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 4. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - Page 3 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Storage and Fabrication enclosures: Provide enclosures sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. D. Self-contained Toilet Units: Single occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type, vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar non-absorbent material. The existing bathrooms will not be available for contractor use. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2.Contractor may use electricity, and water etc. available onsite. If a hydrant must be opened, the City will monitor this. If an extra connection is needed for a temporary service for electricity or other utility in addition to what is provided on site, this would be provided at contractor cost. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - Page 4 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities, if required, to remove effluent lawfully. C. Water Service: Install water service, if required, and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction activities. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for deconstruction operations. 1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated. 2.Contractor may use current, available, onsite electricity. If an extra connection is needed for a temporary service for electricity etc. in addition to what is provided on site this would be provided at contractor cost. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. I. Telephone Service: Provide cellular telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. 1. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. This line shall be the same as the service noted above. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General 1. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - Page 5 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Coordinate with the Owner and the City regarding parking areas available. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and deconstruction areas free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification sign, see sheet AG1.1 for sign requirements. Location to be determined upon start of construction. Sign shall be anchored securely to construction limits fencing. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required informing public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. See drawing sheet AG1.1 for temporary sign information. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. I. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of existing stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary." C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - Page 6 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI D. Site Enclosure Fence: Provide a construction limits fence system, with gates. 1. Provide own padlocks for gates. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to Owner. E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. F. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from property as required by authorities having jurisdiction. G. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Protect porous materials from water damage. 2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water. 3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. 4. Remove standing water from decks. 5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter. 4. Discard or replace water-damaged material. 5. Do not install material that is wet. 6. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Temporary Facilities And Controls 015000 - Page 7 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 7. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01 5000 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Product Requirements 016000 - Page 1 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product prior to bidding. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Product Requirements 016000 - Page 2 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 4. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Product Requirements 016000 - Page 3 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience may be considered at Architect’s discretion, prior to bid. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience may be considered at Architect’s discretion, prior to bid. 3. Products: FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Product Requirements 016000 - Page 4 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI a. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product prior to bid. 4. Manufacturers: a. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product prior to bid. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 6000 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Execution 017300 - Page 1 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 3. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Execution 017300 - Page 2 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 4. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements that are to remain, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. In the event there are unforeseen utilities discovered, contact the Owners’ Project Manager. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Execution 017300 - Page 3 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. Existing Utilities: the existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. C. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. D. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. C. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Execution 017300 - Page 4 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Execution 017300 - Page 5 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Proceed with patching after demolition operations requiring cutting are complete. F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Execution 017300 - Page 6 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. F. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 01 7300 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Cutting And Patching 017329 - Page 1 of 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. c. Control systems. d. Communication systems. e. Electrical wiring systems. f. Operating systems of special construction. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Cutting And Patching 017329 - Page 2 of 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Equipment supports. d. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Cutting And Patching 017329 - Page 3 of 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 017329 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Waste Management And Disposal 017419 - Page 1 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition" for disposal of waste resulting from demolition for site improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Achieve end-of-Project goals for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total non- hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Utilize a combination of any of the following common waste diversion strategies 1. Source separation FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Waste Management And Disposal 017419 - Page 2 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. Time based separation 3. Commingled or off site separation B. Limit hauling distances for 80% of all trucks to 50 miles or less, to the maximum extent practicable. The Contractor shall provide a summary indicating the number of trucks that were able to meet this criterion measured as a percentage of the total trucks used for the project. C. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials to use all reasonable means to divert construction waste from the landfills and incinerators. Minimum diversion rates / goals may be achieved by recovering and salvaging / recycling the following: 1. Demolition Waste: a. Concrete. b. Concrete reinforcing steel. c. Concrete masonry units. 2. Construction Waste: a. Lumber. b. Wood sheet materials. c. Metals. d. Insulation. e. Piping. f. Electrical conduit. g. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 10 business days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Include the following information: 1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons. 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Waste Management And Disposal 017419 - Page 3 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste. B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work. C. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. D. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Waste Management And Disposal 017419 - Page 4 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location where materials separation will be performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECYCLING ORGANIZATIONS, RECEIVERS, AND PROCESSORS A. Resources for Potential Recycling Businesses: Websites indicated below are for informational purposes only and offer databases of potential demolition and construction waste recycling markets. Contractor is not limited to the following: 1.http://www.wbdg.org/tools/cwm.php. 2.http://www.cdrecycling.org/find.html. 3.http://www.bmra.org/listings/browse-by-state?catid=39 . 4.http://www.wm.com/facility-locator.jsp?cat=2&state=MN . 5.http://www.ir-network.com/. 2.2 RECYCLING RECEIVERS A. Recycling Organizations, Receivers, and Processors: In addition to above, listed below are potential resources for specific products. Additional recycling businesses can be located from the “Recycling Organizations” indicated above. 1. Glass: http://www.strategicmaterials.com. 2. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: http://www.armstrong.com/commceilingsna/article45765.html. a. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals. 3. Carpet: Contractor shall remove any remaining carpet and recycle. a.http://www.mohawkgreenworks.com/ b.http://www.carpetrecovery.org/waste.cfm. B. Contractor is responsible for providing recycling dumpsters for the construction work. Contractor is responsible for removing items from site for recycling. All recycler’s expenses are no costs to the Owner. C. Provide dumpsters within exterior construction area as space allows. Coordinate location, size, and quantity of dumpsters with Architect and Owner. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Waste Management And Disposal 017419 - Page 5 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Store items in a secure area until installation. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated. B. Salvaged items for Owner – before construction, salvage items listed or added by addenda. 1. Salvage the existing door hardware 2. Salvage any existing light fixtures. 3. Salvage existing ceiling tiles. a. Deliver to location in building as designated by owner. 3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Waste Management And Disposal 017419 - Page 6 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. 3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Concrete and Masonry: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. 3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Construction Waste Management And Disposal 017419 - Page 7 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01 7419 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Closeout Procedures 017700 - Page 1 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Preliminary Inspection Procedure. 3. Final completion procedures. 4. Warranties. 5. Final cleaning. 6. Substantial Completion of the Contract, Pre-Closeout and Inspection Procedure. 7. Final Inspection Procedure. 8. Final Completion and Final Payment Conditions. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE CONTRACT, PRE-CLOSEOUT AND INSPECTION PROCEDURE A. When the Work, or a designated portion thereof, is approaching Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall submit a written request stating that they have inspected the Work and that it is ready for an inspection for Substantial Completion by the Architect, together with a list of items to be completed or corrected. If the Architect considers the Work to be sufficiently complete, the Architect will establish a date for the Pre-Closeout Meeting and an inspection for Substantial Completion. B. The Architect shall schedule and conduct a Pre-Closeout Meeting. C. The Pre-Closeout Meeting shall be conducted at the site before any inspections for Substantial Completion. The Architect, Engineers, Contractor, Subcontractors, and representatives of the Owner shall attend. The Architect shall review all aspects of the Project Closeout, a Project Closeout Checklist and time schedule and clarify all requirements of the Contract Documents. D. The Architect shall administrate the Project Pre-Closeout Meeting. E. Refer to applicable Specification Sections for additional Closeout requirements and information. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Closeout Procedures 017700 - Page 2 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI F. The Architect, accompanied by the Owner and Contractor, will conduct the inspection for Substantial Completion. If the Architect determines that the Work is then substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract, and a list (punch list for Substantial Completion) of work items remaining to be completed or corrected by the Contractor. G. As a condition of and prior to the date of Substantial Completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval and delivery to the Owner, the following: 1. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities, including copies of Certificates of Inspection. H. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final observation for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with construction tools, and similar elements. 8. Advise Owner of changeover in utilities. 9. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 10. Complete final cleaning requirements. 11. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred site conditions to eliminate visual defects. B. Observation: Submit a written request for Review for Substantial Completion. Contractor shall complete the Closeout form at the end of this section, to request a Review for Substantial completion. 1. Complete and submit one form for each request for review. For each Phase of the Work, provide a completed form requesting the review for Substantial Completion. C. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with the review or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after the review or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Closeout Procedures 017700 - Page 3 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Re-Observation: Request a follow up review when the Work identified in previous observations as “incomplete”, are completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed reviews will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 3. Architect will provide for one Initial Review for Substantial Completion for each identified Phase of the Work, and one Final Review for each Phase. If additional reviews are required because of work not complete or correct by the General Contractor or their Sub- Contractors, the General Contractor will be responsible for paying for the Architect’s time to perform subsequent re-observations and reviews. 1.5 FINAL COMPLETION OF THE CONTRACT AND INSPECTION PROCEDURE A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final review for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 2. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. B. Observation: Submit a written request for final review for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with review or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after observation or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Re-Observation: Request review when the Work identified in previous observations as “incomplete”, are completed or corrected. C. As a condition of and prior to Project Final Completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect for approval and delivery to the Owner, original signed copies of each of the following: 1. A completed and signed Project Closeout Checklist, indicating all items have been completed. 1.6 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Closeout Procedures 017700 - Page 4 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI a. PDF electronic file. B. When the items on the punch list(s) for Substantial Completion have been fully completed or corrected, the Contractor shall return the punch list to the Architect indicating in writing that the Work is complete, that each punch list item conforms to the Contract Documents and the Contractor shall request a final inspection. The Architect will establish a date for the Final Inspection. C. The Architect, accompanied by the Owner and Contractor, will conduct the Final Inspection. If the Architect determines that the Work is then acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will so notify the Owner and the Contractor in writing. If the Architect determines that the Work is not fully performed, the Contractor shall complete all remaining items of Work before the Work will be considered for Final Acceptance. 1.7 FINAL PAYMENT CONDITIONS A. Final Completion or the Date of Final Acceptance for the purposes of these Specifications shall mean the date on which the Architect and Owner accept the site in writing. Final Completion shall not be construed to mean acceptance of any Work subsequently found to be inferior, substandard, missing or not in accord with the Contract Documents. Such Work shall be remedied as directed by the Architect, the same as though the Work had not been approved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by demolition and construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Closeout Procedures 017700 - Page 5 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces. g. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. END OF SECTION 01 7700 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Closeout Procedures 017700 - Page 1 of 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 017710 - CLOSEOUT FORM 1.1 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION REQUEST A. This Certificate is to be signed by the Contractor and transmitted to the Architect as the request for review of Substantial completion. The intent of this certificate is to expedite closeout of the project and to help assure the Owner that the portion of the work described below is complete, complies with all regulatory requirements and can be occupied for its intended purpose. 1.2 I hereby certify the following: (Insert Contractor Name / Company) A. I have reviewed the Contract Documents including all modifications. B. I have inspected the Work. C. The Work is completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and all approved contract modifications. D. An Occupancy Permit has been issued for this part of the project. E. A separate 8 ½ x 11 exhibit may be attached which clearly describes the area in consideration for review. Exhibits may include representative floor plans or site plans. F. The portion of the Work ready for review for Substantial Completion is identified as follows □The Entire Project □The following portions of the project: The undersigned has acknowledged that the following portions of Work are not complete or ready for review. These portions will be reviewed under a separate request by the Contractor. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Closeout Procedures 017700 - Page 2 of 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.3 Contractor understands and agrees that if the architect and/or the engineers determine that the work is insufficiently complete to perform the observations, the owner may assess the contractor for the cost of the additional time and expense incurred by the architect, engineers and the owner for additional site visits, observations and expenses. These costs will be deducted from the contract amount through the change order process. (Contractor Name / Company Name) (Signature) (Date) END OF SECTION 017710 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Operation And Maintenance Data 017823 - Page 1 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maint. manuals. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 1 draft copy of each manual electronically at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit 1 hard copy and an electronic copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 1 hard copy and an electronic copy of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Operation And Maintenance Data 017823 - Page 2 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.5 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Operation And Maintenance Data 017823 - Page 3 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Operation And Maintenance Data 017823 - Page 4 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Operation And Maintenance Data 017823 - Page 5 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Operation And Maintenance Data 017823 - Page 6 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents." F. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01 7823 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Record Documents 017839 - Page 1 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set(s) of corrected Record Transparencies and one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each plot and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return plots and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. b. Final Submittal: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit 2 copies of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications and upload to project website. C. Record Product Data: Submit 1 copies of each Product Data submittal and upload to project website. 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Record Documents 017839 - Page 2 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Record Documents 017839 - Page 3 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Project Record Documents 017839 - Page 4 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01 7839 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Demonstration And Training 017900 - Page 1 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 01 7900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit 1 hard copy and an electronic copy of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. At completion of training, submit 1 hard copy and an electronic copy of complete training manual(s) for Owner's use. B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Demonstration And Training 017900 - Page 2 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Equipment, including food-service equipment. 2. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm fire pumps and fire-extinguishing systems. 3. Heat generation, including pumps and water distribution piping. 4. Refrigeration systems, including pumps and distribution piping. 5. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment air distribution systems and terminal equipment and devices. 6. HVAC instrumentation and controls. 7. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards, panel boards, uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls. 8. Lighting equipment and controls. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Demonstration And Training 017900 - Page 3 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Demonstration And Training 017900 - Page 4 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION 01 7900 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Selective Demolition 024119 - Page 1 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 02 4119-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner- occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 01 7300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Selective Demolition 024119 - Page 2 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property for dust control, and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: a. Furniture, and equipment in use in Children’s area, Classroom, and existing office. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Selective Demolition 024119 - Page 3 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI b. Collection Items C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are NOT present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Selective Demolition 024119 - Page 4 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary." B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 4. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Selective Demolition 024119 - Page 5 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Selective Demolition 024119 - Page 6 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 7419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 4119 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Rough Carpentry 061000 - 1 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Framing with dimension lumber. 3. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Interior Finish Carpentry". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Rough Carpentry 061000 - 2 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire- test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame- spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Rough Carpentry 061000 - 3 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 1. Coordinate with requirements in electrical specification section for providing and mounting backboard. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Rough Carpentry 061000 - 4 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Use stainless steel fasteners if required based on pressure-preservative chemicals used. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Rough Carpentry 061000 - 5 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load- bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at mid-height of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4- inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Rough Carpentry 061000 - 6 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. D. Provide diagonal bracing in exterior walls, at both walls of each external corner, at 45-degree angle, full-story height unless otherwise indicated. Use 1-by-4-inch nominal-size boards, let-in flush with faces of studs. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA- registered label. END OF SECTION 06 1000 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Finish Carpentry 062023 - 1 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 06 2023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Door 104.2 B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard. B. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical- treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures. C. Samples for Verification: FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Finish Carpentry 062023 - 2 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with nonfactory-applied finish, with half of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. 2. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated wood, from ICC-ES. B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions comply with requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified for installation areas. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber." 2. NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association, "Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress." 3. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber." 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, "Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber." FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Finish Carpentry 062023 - 3 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber." 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules." B. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency]. C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. D. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4. E. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. F. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. G. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC1. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 18 percent, respectively. 2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 3. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical formulations that contain colorants or that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 4. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 5. Mark lumber with treatment-quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standard Committee's Board of Review. a. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. 6. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each piece. 7. Application: Where indicated. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Finish Carpentry 062023 - 4 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: For applications indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and comply with testing requirements; testing will be conducted by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame- spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical formulations that do not contain colorants, and provide materials that do not have marks from spacer sticks on exposed face. D. Do not use material that does not comply with requirements for untreated material or is warped or discolored. E. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. 2. For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each piece. F. Application: Door 104.2 2.4 INTERIOR MDF DOOR A. Fire Rated: Class A B. Grade: Primed MDF C. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed wood surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Refer to 09 0000 “Finish and Material Legend”. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide accessory materials associated with architectural finish carpentry except for items specified in Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." 1. Standoffs: Silver, 1” diameter, ½” high base, 1/4” cap height, tamper resistant. a. Location: As indicated in drawings FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Finish Carpentry 062023 - 5 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." C. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. D. Paneling Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives. E. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except those with ends exposed in finished work: 1. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe and crown molds. 2. Wood-board paneling. B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius. 2.8 FINISHING A. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparent-finished paneling specified to be field finished. 1. See Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for material and application requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Finish Carpentry 062023 - 6 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound; warped; improperly treated or finished; inadequately seasoned; too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements; or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 5. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes if any. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Finish Carpentry 062023 - 7 of 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 06 2023 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Joint Sealants 079200 - 1 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 07 9200-JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 4. Latex joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Joint Sealants 079200 - 2 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Joint Sealants 079200 - 3 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Final Acceptance. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Final Acceptance for weatherseal and non- staining of silicone sealants. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following: 1. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775 g/L or less. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Joint Sealants 079200 - 4 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI c.Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 3. e. Pecora 864 NST f. Or approved equal. 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2. b.Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 High Shore Type II. c.Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. d.Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 2c NS. e.Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227. B. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2. b.Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 500. c.Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 High Shore Type II. d.Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. e.Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 2c NS. f.Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227. 2.4 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth. B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary. d. Or approved equal. 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c.Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. e. Or approved equal. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Joint Sealants 079200 - 5 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. b. Tremco, Incorporated; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. c.USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber acoustical sealant. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. b. Serious Energy Inc.; Quiet Seal 350. 2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Joint Sealants 079200 - 6 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Joint Sealants 079200 - 7 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. G. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 500 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Joint Sealants 079200 - 8 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS-2. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as indicated. 2. Urethane Joint Sealant: multi component, nonsag, traffic grade. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-3. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and walls. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Joint Sealants 079200 - 9 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. 2. Joint Sealant: Urethane. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION 07 9200 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 1 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 08 1113-HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 2. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM- HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, grout, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 2 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inchspace between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 4. Republic Doors and Frames. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 3 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2.2 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames or frames receiving sound gasketing, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames. C. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as continuously full profile welded with no visible seams. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- thick steel sheet. D. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as continuously full profile welded with no visible seams. 3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.3 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Post installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. Design shall allow expansion type anchorage devices that can be countersunk in the face of the frame and allow recessed area to be filled bonding material and sanded smooth for hidden fastener appearance. Filler plugs of plastic or other material projecting beyond the face of the frame are not acceptable 3. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 4 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Zcoating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 8000 "Glazing." J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mildry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Windows: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 5 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 2) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 3) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 2. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 3. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 6 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 7 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. f. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. g. Grout all frames solid with cementitious grout. Gypsum grout is not allowed. Frames to be installed in metal framed walls are to be grouted and allowed to cure before being installed or before having gypsum board or cement board installed adjacent to the frame. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames 081113 - 8 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08 1113 FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No.: 2017307 Flush Wood Doors 08 1416 - Page 1 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 08 1416-FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 8000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 2. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting", and Section 09 9300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for field finishing doors. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. D. Samples for Verification: FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No.: 2017307 Flush Wood Doors 08 1416 - Page 2 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. 3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg Fand relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No.: 2017307 Flush Wood Doors 08 1416 - Page 3 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 4. VT Industries, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with [AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards][WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors]." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 3. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. 4. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. D. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf. 2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: To match existing FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No.: 2017307 Flush Wood Doors 08 1416 - Page 4 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3. Cut: To match existing 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: To match existing 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: To match existing 6. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species - edge Type A. 7. Core: Structural composite lumber. 8. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 9. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. 3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use. B. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood- veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA- 156.115-W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 8000 "Glazing." 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No.: 2017307 Flush Wood Doors 08 1416 - Page 5 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors. C. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish. D. Factory finish doors where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished. E. Use only paints and coatings that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." F. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 5, conversion varnish. 3. Staining: To match existing 4. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No.: 2017307 Flush Wood Doors 08 1416 - Page 6 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08 1416 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Aluminum-framed Entrances And Storefronts 084113 - 1 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 08 4113-ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The extent of the demountable partition or butt-glazed entrances/storefronts work as shown on the drawings, and as specified herein. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board" 2. Section 09 2216 “Non-Structural Metal Framing” 3. Section 09 6813 “Tile Carpeting” 4. Section 08 8000 “Glazing” 5. Section 02 4119 “Selective Demolition” 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum- framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Aluminum-framed Entrances And Storefronts 084113 - 2 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Samples for Initial Selection: Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer’s standard color charts showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material exposed to view. 2. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on. Samples of size indicated below a. Panel Finish Face: Manufacturer’s standard-size unit, but not less than 3 inches (75mm) square. b. Base Trim: 12 inches (300mm) long Samples c. Glazing: Manufacturer’s standard-size unit, but not less than 3 inches (75mm) square. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of demountable partition or butt-glazed entrance/ storefront. F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum- framed entrance and storefront. B. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty. B. Maintenance Data: For demountable partitions or butt-glazed entrances/storefronts to include in maintenance manuals. 1. Recommended cleaning materials and warnings about cleaning methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. 2. Installation manual detailing methods to move reuse and adjust demountable partition or butt-glazed entrance/storefront product. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has successfully completed demountable partition or butt-glazed entrance/storefront installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and are mutually accepted by the manufacturer and the customer B. Retain "Testing Agency Qualifications" Paragraph below if Contractor selects testing agency or if Contractor is required to provide services of a qualified testing agency in "Field Quality Control" Article. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Aluminum-framed Entrances And Storefronts 084113 - 3 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Sound Control: Glass panel’s sound transmission will be dependent upon glass type used. F. Indoor Air Quality: Demountable partition or butt-glazed entrances/storefronts wall manufacturer’s non-wood products must meet the SCS Indoor Advantage™ Gold Certification or equivalent. This approval guarantees conformance to indoor air concentrations meeting ANSI/BIFMA M7.1-2011, California Specification 01350, and ANSI/BIFMA e3-2012 testing, conducted in an independent third-party air quality testing laboratory. G. Glass Association of North America (GANA) Guidelines: Recommends the use of 1 /2” thick glass when used in butt-glazed demountable partition or entrances/storefronts mounted or restrained at the top and bottom only for ceilings from 96” to 120”. H. Certification: Include supporting certified laboratory testing data indicating that material meets specified test requirements. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Delivery, Storage, and Handling: Deliver materials to Project Site in original factory wrappings and containers/skids, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, model number and order number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; store product according to installation manual and away from other trades. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install demountable partitions or butt-glazed entrance/storefront components until building is enclosed and finishing operations, including ceiling and floor-covering installation and painting, are complete. C. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of demountable partitions or butt- glazed entrance/storefront components with other units of Work. Installation of ceilings, floor coverings, lighting fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression systems should be completed before demountable partitions are installed. E. Special Requirements: Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacture for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver to the Owner, not less than three percent of the Project total for each component, panel and accessory of each type, color, and finish of demountable partition or butt-glazed entrance/storefront system exclusive of material required to properly complete installation. Furnish accessory components and installation tools as indicated on schedule. Furnish extra FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Aluminum-framed Entrances And Storefronts 084113 - 4 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI materials from same production run as materials installed. Package extra materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. B. Provide all materials, labor, and equipment to install demountable partitions or butt-glazed entrances/storefronts. The system shall offer maximum flexibility and reusability to accommodate frequent and quick relocation work without loss of materials, damage or modification to panels or to adjoining structures such as ceilings, fixed walls and floors. The factory assembled system must be unitized or pre-assembled (not stick built), non-progressive and modular, allowing the removal of individual panels from any location without disturbing adjoining units and providing interchangeability of panels and door units on the same module. Differential values in "Temperature Change" Subparagraph below (for aluminum in particular) are suitable for most of the U.S. C. The head detail shall be flush to the ceiling without a reveal. All ceiling leveling adjustment is hidden within the head detail. D. The panel thickness at the base shall be 2” thick providing the user more usable space when space planning. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Aluminum-framed Entrances And Storefronts 084113 - 5 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI E. The base assembly with an integrated leveling system shall be permanently attached to the panel. Detached and loosely shipped floor tracks and leveling components shall not be permitted. F. The factory assembled movable walls are very flexible to accommodate the building conditions. The wall shall have flexible vertical adjustability. An adjustable, ceiling head assembly shall provide a ± 1 /2” adjustment at the ceiling. At the floor, a self-contained leveling glide system and a 31 /4” and 4” high base cover shall allow for floor adjustment of + 1” for a 31 /4” base and + 13 /4” for a 4” base. Where the wall system meets the building core walls, columns or window mullions, u-channel extrusions shall allow for horizontal adjustment. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. DIRTT 2. KI 3. Approved Equal B. Basis of Design Styles: 1. Interior Glass Wall: a. KI “Lightline” demountable partition or butt-glazed entrance/storefront 2. Interior Magnetic Wall: a. KI “Evoke” C. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing spandrel panels and accessories, from single manufacturer. D. Butted Glass Panel-to-Panel Glazing Seal: 1. Inline Joint Seal Type: Factory-installed VHB tape dry glass seal and 1 /4” rigid seal 2. Frameless Corner Glass Overlap (not-mitered) Glazing Seal Type: Factory-installed VHB tape dry glass seal and 1 /8” rigid seal 3. Angled and Faceted Curve Seal Type: Factory Installed VHB tape dry glass seal and 1 /2” polycarbonate rod rigid seal E. Glass and Glazing: Safety glazing in compliance with Glass and Glazing – Section 08 80 00 1. Single Glazed Thickness: 1 /2” 2. Glass Type: Tempered 3. Exposed Glass Edge Type: Polished and Aris (chamfered) 4. Glass Panel Configuration: Single Center mounted F. Aluminum Trim: Base trim is continuous to 10’, factory-finished, snap-on type adjustable for variations in floor. Ceiling trim is continuous to 10’ and ceiling irregularities are hidden. 1. Base Trim Height: 3 1/4” 2. Ceiling Trim Profile: 3” Flush 3. Exposed-Metal Trim Finish: Clear Anodized 4. Typical Corner Ceiling Trim: Outside corner is mitered in the field 5. Typical Corner Base Trim: Outside corner is mitered in the field G. Post Connections: 1. Universal Post Configuration Demising Wall. Please denote typical wall connection:2 1/8” Lightline, 6” Permanent drywall 2. Permanent Drywall Connection (Connection sealed with gasket): U-Channel, 2 1/8” Post FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Aluminum-framed Entrances And Storefronts 084113 - 6 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI H. 1 /2” Thick Frameless Glass Leaves: Manufacturer’s standard 1 /2” tempered with polished edge. 1. Single Glazed Thickness: 1 /2” 2. Glass Type: Tempered 3. Exposed Glass Edge Type: Polished and Aris (chamfered) 4. Adjustable Bottom Seal to adjust for floor variances (Default Solution) included I. Seals: Manufacturer’s standard. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. E. Demountable or butt-glazed entrance/storefront panels: Factory-assembled, butt-glazed pre- assembled glass units (not stick-built or site built). Fabricate panels for installation with concealed fastening devices and pressure-fit components that will not damage ceiling or floor coverings. Fabricate panels with continuous light-and-sound seals at floor, ceiling, and other locations where panels abut fixed construction. F. Components: Fabricate components for installation with concealed fastening devices and pressure-fit members that will not damage ceiling or floor coverings. Fabricate for installation with continuous seals at floor, ceiling, and other locations where partition assemblies abut fixed construction and for installation of sound attenuation insulation in partition cavities. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Aluminum-framed Entrances And Storefronts 084113 - 7 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation of demountable or butt-glazed entrance/storefront system, clean floor to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. B. Illuminate areas of installation to provide an ambient light level of at least 100 foot candles measured in the area where partitions are to be installed. C. Maintain temperature in the area of installation at a constant minimum of 65° F with relatively humidity less than 70 percent for a period of 48 hours prior to installation and during installation process. D. General Contractor will deliver all GWB construction interfacing with the demountable or movable partition system in true and plumb condition. E. For manufacturer to accept responsibility of dimensional compatibility between demountable or movable partition wall system and GWB construction, manufacturer shall have access to the completed GWB for accurate field measuring eight weeks prior to requiring product on site to commence installation. If time line does not permit the eight weeks lead time, demountable manufacturer shall provide “hold-to” dimensions for the General Contractor. General Contractor then assumes responsibility that GWB construction delivers on “hold-to” dimensions. F. Demountable or butt-glazed entrance/storefront manufacturer determines that conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. Starting of work shall be construed as acceptance of conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Aluminum-framed Entrances And Storefronts 084113 - 8 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 7. Install Demountable or butt-glazed entrance/storefront systems rigid, level, plumb, and aligned. Install seals to prevent light and sound transmission at connections to floors, ceilings, fixed walls, and abutting surfaces. a. Installation Tolerance: Install each demountable partition so surfaces vary not more than 1 /8 inch (3mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent partitions 8. Do not alter ceiling suspension system. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 8000 "Glazing." 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate and train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain Demountable or butt-glazed entrance/storefront system. Refer to Division 01 Section “Demonstration and Training.” END OF SECTION 08 4113 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 1 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 08 7100 – DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for: a. Swinging doors. b. Sliding doors. 2. Field verification, preparation and modification of existing doors and frames to receive new door hardware. B. Exclusions: Unless specifically listed in hardware sets, hardware is not specified in this section for: 1. Windows 2. Cabinets (casework), including locks in cabinets 3. Signage 4. Toilet accessories 5. Overhead doors C. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealant requirements applicable to threshold installation specified in this section. 2. Division 09 sections for touchup finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by this section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies 1. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies 2. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies 3. UL 305 - Panic Hardware B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute 1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule 2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware 3. Key Systems and Nomenclature FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 2 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 requirements. 2. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify on submittals deviations from Contract Documents, issues of incompatibility or other issues which may detrimentally affect the Work. 3. Prior to forwarding submittal, comply with procedures for verifying existing door and frame compatibility for new hardware, as specified in PART 3, “EXAMINATION” article, herein. B. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: Product data including manufacturers’ technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. 2. Samples for Verification: If requested by Architect, submit production sample or sample installations of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. a. Samples will be returned to supplier in like-new condition. Units that are acceptable to Architect may, after final check of operations, be incorporated into Work, within limitations of key coordination requirements. 3. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule with hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include: a. Door Index; include door number, heading number, and Architects hardware set number. b. Opening Lock Function Spreadsheet: List locking device and function for each opening. c. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. d. Name and manufacturer of each item. e. Fastenings and other pertinent information. f. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings. g. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. h. Mounting locations for hardware. i. Door and frame sizes and materials. j. Name and phone number for local manufacturer's representative for each product. 4. Key Schedule: a. After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule listing levels of keying as well as explanation of key system's function, key symbols used and door numbers controlled. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 3 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI b. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system. c. Provide 3 copies of keying schedule for review prepared and detailed in accordance with referenced DHI publication. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key to unique door designations. d. Index keying schedule by door number, keyset, hardware heading number, cross keying instructions, and special key stamping instructions. e. Provide one complete bitting list of key cuts and one key system schematic illustrating system usage and expansion. 1) Forward bitting list, key cuts and key system schematic directly to Owner, by means as directed by Owner. f. Prepare key schedule by or under supervision of supplier, detailing Owner’s final keying instructions for locks. 5. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory prepared for door hardware installation. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Provide in accordance with Division 01 and include: a. Complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment; data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Parts list for each product. d. Final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect conditions as-installed. e. Final keying schedule f. Copy of warranties including appropriate reference numbers for manufacturers to identify project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Substitutions: Comply with product requirements stated in Division 01 and as specified herein. 1. Where specific manufacturer’s product is named and accompanied by “No Substitute,” including make or model number or other designation, provide product specified. (Note: Certain products have been selected for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability.) a. Where no additional products or manufacturers are listed in product category, requirements for “No Substitute” govern product selection. 2. Where products indicate “acceptable manufacturers” or “acceptable manufacturers and products”, provide product from specified manufacturers, subject to compliance with specified requirements and “Single Source Responsibility” requirements stated herein. B. Supplier Qualifications and Responsibilities: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that provides a hardware consultant FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 4 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the Work for consultation. 1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity. 2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. C. Installer Qualifications: Qualified tradesmen, skilled in application of commercial grade hardware with record of successful in-service performance for installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project. D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. E. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by Underwriters Laboratories, Intertek Testing Services, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. F. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg of water. G. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release latch. Locks do not require use of key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. H. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with governing accessibility regulations cited in “REFERENCES” article, herein. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of wrist and that operate with force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from open position of 70 degrees, door will take at least 3 seconds to move to 3 inches from latch, measured to leading edge of door. I. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01. 1. Attendees: Owner, Contractor, Architect, Installer, and Supplier’s Hardware Consultant. 2. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including: a. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 5 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system. d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys. J. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Inspect and discuss preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. K. Coordination Conferences: 1. Installation Coordination Conference: Prior to hardware installation, schedule and hold meeting to review questions or concerns related to proper installation and adjustment of door hardware. a. Attendees: Door hardware supplier, door hardware installer, Contractor. b. After meeting, provide letter of compliance to Architect, indicating when meeting was held and who was in attendance. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. 1. Deliver each article of hardware in manufacturer’s original packaging. C. Project Conditions: 1. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods. 2. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items so that completion of Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. D. Protection and Damage: 1. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping. 2. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace or repair products damaged during Work. 3. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent. E. Deliver keys to Owner as determined at keying meeting. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 6 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of floor-recessed door hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. C. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. D. Direct shipments not permitted, unless approved by Contractor. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated. a. Closers: 1) Mechanical: 30 years. b. Exit Devices: 1) Mechanical: 3 years. c. Locksets: 1) Mechanical: 10 years. d. Continuous Hinges: Lifetime warranty. e. Key Blanks: Lifetime 2. Warranty does not cover damage or faulty operation due to improper installation, improper use or abuse. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools: 1. Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 7 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The Owner requires use of certain products for their unique characteristics and particular project suitability to insure continuity of existing and future performance and maintenance standards. After investigating available product offerings, the Awarding Authority has elected to prepare proprietary specifications. These products are specified with the notation: “No Substitute.” 1. Where “No Substitute” is noted, submittals and substitution requests for other products will not be considered. B. Approval of manufacturers and/or products other than those listed as ”Scheduled Manufacturer ” or “Acceptable Manufacturers” in the individual article for the product category shall be in accordance with QUALITY ASSURANCE article, herein. C. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated in “Acceptable Manufacturers” is contingent upon those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product. D. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. E. Where specified hardware is not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, furnish suitable types having same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fasteners 1. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish, or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work including prepared for paint surfaces to receive painted finish. 3. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless thru-bolts are required to fasten hardware securely. Review door specification and advise Architect if thru-bolts are required. 4. Install hardware with fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer. B. Modification and Preparation of Existing Doors: Where existing door hardware is indicated to be removed and reinstalled. 1. Provide necessary fillers, Dutchmen, reinforcements, and fasteners, compatible with existing materials, as required for mounting new opening hardware and to cover existing door and frame preparations. 2. Use materials which match materials of adjacent modified areas. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 8 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3. When modifying existing fire-rated openings, provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as required to maintain fire-rating. C. Provide screws, bolts, expansion shields, drop plates and other devices necessary for hardware installation. 1. Where fasteners are exposed to view: Finish to match adjacent door hardware material. 2.03 HINGES A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB series 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: Hager BB series, McKinney TA/T4A series, Stanley FBB Series B. Requirements: 1. Provide five-knuckle, ball bearing hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. 2. 1-3/4 inch thick doors, up to and including 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Standard weight, bronze or stainless steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high b. Interior: Standard weight, steel, 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high 3. 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors over 36 inches (914 mm) wide: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze/stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 4. 2 inches or thicker doors: a. Exterior: Heavy weight, bronze or stainless steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high b. Interior: Heavy weight, steel, 5 inches (127 mm) high 5. Provide three hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height, and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height. 6. Where new hinges are specified for existing doors or existing frames, provide new hinges of identical size to hinge preparation present in existing door or existing frame. 7. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: a. Steel Hinges: Steel pins b. Non-Ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins c. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins d. Out-Swinging Interior Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins e. Interior Non-lockable Doors: Non-rising pins 8. Width of hinges: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) at 1-3/4 inch (44 mm) thick doors, and 5 inches (127 mm) at 2 inches (51 mm) or thicker doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening. 9. Doors 36 inches (914 mm) wide or less furnish hinges 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high; doors greater than 36 inches (914 mm) wide furnish hinges 5 inches (127 mm) high, heavy weight or standard weight as specified. 10. Provide spring hinges where specified. Provide two spring hinges and one bearing hinge per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2286 mm) or less in height. Provide one additional bearing hinge for each 30 inches (762 mm) of additional door height. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 9 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2.04 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Aluminum Geared 1. Manufacturers: a. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives. b. Acceptable Manufacturers: Select, Stanley. 2. Requirements: a. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.26, Grade 1. b. Provide aluminum geared continuous hinges, where specified in the hardware sets, fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum, with 0.25-inch (6 mm) diameter Teflon coated stainless steel hinge pin. c. Provide split nylon bearings at each hinge knuckle for quiet, smooth, self- lubricating operation. d. Provide hinges capable of supporting door weights up to 450 pounds, and successfully tested for 1,500,000 cycles. e. Install hinges with fasteners supplied by manufacturer. f. Provide hinges 1 inch (25 mm) shorter in length than nominal height of door, unless otherwise noted or door details require shorter length and with symmetrical hole pattern. 2.05 FLUSH BOLTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood B. Requirements: 1. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze or stainless steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches (2286 mm) in height. For doors over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height increase top rods by 6 inches (152 mm) for each additional 6 inches (152 mm) of door height. Provide dust- proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt. 2.06 MORTISE LOCKS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Yale B. Requirements: 1. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Provide lock FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 10 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI case that is multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening case. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 2. Indicators: Where specified, provide indicator window measuring a minimum 2 inch x 1/2 inch with 180 degree visibility. Provide messages color-coded with full text and/or symbols, as scheduled, for easy visibility. a. Occupied Indicator: Provide indicator above cylinder for visibility while operating the lock that identifies the trim as occupied/unoccupied status of the door. Indicator in unoccupied state has a white background with black text and icon. Indicator in the occupied state has a red background with white text and icon. 3. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel. 4. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 5. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece spindles. a. Lever Design: Schlage 07B. 2.07 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS – GRADE 1 A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Yale 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: No Substitute. B. Requirements: 1. Provide Schlage ND Series cylindrical locks conforming to the following standards and requirements: a. ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. b. UL 10C for 4’-0” x 10’-0” 3-hour fire door. 2. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 3. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches backset, unless noted otherwise, with 1/2 inch latch throw capable of UL listing of 3 hours on a 4’ x 10’ opening. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs. 4. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim. 5. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides. a. Lever Design: Schlage Athens. 2.08 CYLINDERS A. Manufacturers: 1.Scheduled Manufacturer: Yale B. Requirements: FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 11 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Provide cylinders/cores to match Owner’s existing key system, compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision, Section 12, Grade 1; permanent cylinders; cylinder face finished to match lockset, manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. 2.09 KEYING A. Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing keying system, complying with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. B. Quantity: Furnish in the following quantities. a. Change Keys: 2 per cylinder/core. b. Master Keys: 6. 2.10 DOOR CLOSERS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 4111 series as indicated in the hardware sets. B. Requirements: 1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. 2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action cast iron cylinder. 3. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. 4. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards. Cylinder body to have “FAST” power adjust speed dial to visually indicate spring power. 5. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 6. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: not permitted. 7. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting. 2.11 DOOR TRIM A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood, Hager B. Requirements: 1. Provide push plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick and beveled 4 edges. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 12 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. Provide push bars of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Provide push bars of sufficient length to span from center to center of each stile. Where required, mount back to back with pull. 3. Provide offset pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar. 4. Provide flush pulls as scheduled. Where required, provide back-to-back mounted model. 5. Provide pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with push bar. 6. Provide pull plates 4 inches (102 mm) wide by 16 inches (406 mm) high by 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled 4 edges, and prepped for pull. Where width of door stile prevents use of 4 inches (102 mm) wide plate, adjust width to fit. 7. Provide wire pulls of solid bar stock, diameter and length as scheduled. 8. Provide decorative pulls as scheduled. Where required, mount back to back with pull. 2.12 PROTECTION PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood B. Requirements: 1. Provide kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates minimum of 0.050 inch (1 mm) thick, beveled four edges as scheduled. Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates. 2. Sizes of plates: a. Kick Plates: 10 inches (254 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs b. Mop Plates: 4 inches (102 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs c. Armor Plates: 36 inches (914 mm) high by 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs 2.13 OVERHEAD STOPS AND OVERHEAD STOP/HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturers: Glynn-Johnson 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rixson, Sargent B. Requirements: 1. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for exterior and interior vestibule single acting doors. 2. Provide heavy duty concealed mounted overhead stop or holder as specified for double acting doors. 3. Provide heavy or medium duty and concealed or surface mounted overhead stop or holder for interior doors as specified. Provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop for interior doors and at any door that swings more than 140 degrees before striking wall, open against equipment, casework, sidelights, and where conditions do not allow wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 13 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 4. Where overhead holders are specified provide friction type at doors without closer and positive type at doors with closer. 2.14 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood B. Provide door stops at each door leaf: 1. Provide wall stops wherever possible. Provide convex type where mortise type locks are used and concave type where cylindrical type locks are used. 2. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops for low or high rise options. 3. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide medium duty surface mounted overhead stop. 2.15 THRESHOLDS, SEALS, DOOR SWEEPS, AUTOMATIC DOOR BOTTOMS, AND GASKETING A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Reese 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Guard, Zero B. Requirements: 1. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping (including door sweeps, seals, and astragals) and gasketing systems (including smoke, sound, and light) as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items. 2. Size of thresholds: a. Saddle Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by jamb width by door width b. Bumper Seal Thresholds: 1/2 inch (13 mm) high by 5 inches (127 mm) wide by door width 3. Provide door sweeps, seals, astragals, and auto door bottoms only of type where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available. 2.16 SILENCERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Burns, Rockwood, Steelcraft B. Requirements: 1. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 14 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for each pair frame. 3. Omit where gasketing is specified. 2.17 FINSHES A. Finish: BHMA 626/652 (US26D); except: 1. Hinges at Exterior Doors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 2. Continuous Hinges: BHMA 630 (US32D) 3. Push Plates, Pulls, and Push Bars: BHMA 630 (US32D) 4. Protection Plates: BHMA 630 (US32D) 5. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA 630 (US32D) 6. Door Closers: Powder Coat to Match 7. Wall Stops: BHMA 630 (US32D) 8. Latch Protectors: BHMA 630 (US32D) 9. Weatherstripping: Clear Anodized Aluminum 10. Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Existing Door and Frame Compatibility: Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions. C. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required: 1. Carefully remove existing door hardware and components being reused. Clean, protect, tag, and store in accordance with storage and handling requirements specified herein. 2. Field modify and prepare existing door and frame for new hardware being installed. 3. When modifications are exposed to view, use concealed fasteners, when possible. 4. Prepare hardware locations and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for new door hardware and with: a. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. b. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors." FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 15 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI c. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door hardware preparation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer. C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Protect all installed hardware during painting. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. F. Install operating parts so they move freely and smoothly without binding, sticking, or excessive clearance. G. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than quantity recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. H. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Closers shall not be visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect. I. Closer/Holders: Mount closer/holders on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors. J. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." K. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard. L. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. M. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. N. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 16 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors and door hardware. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide training for Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." 3.07 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Locksets, exit devices, and other hardware items are referenced in the following hardware sets for series, type and function. Refer to the above-specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements. B. Hardware Sets: Hardware Group No. 01 For use on mark/door #(s): 100.1 100.2 101.1 Provide each door with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-001 606 SCH 1 EA BY OTHERS BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DR & FRM SUPPLIER FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Door Hardware 087100 - 17 of 17 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Hardware Group No. 01 For use on mark/door #(s): 104.1 Provide each door with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 3 ea. Hinges 5BB1 4.5” x 4.5” 626 IVES 1 ea. Lockset Reuse Existing Lockset 626 YALE 1 ea. Surface Closer 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN 3 ea. Silencers SR64 Gray IVES Hardware Group No. 02 For use on mark/door #(s): 104.2 Provide each door with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 1 ea. Barn Door Hdwe DSG-FT-06 630 X PEMKO Black Suede 1 ea. Barn Door Track DSG-FT-08 track only 630 PEMKO 2 ea. Door Pull 8103EZHD-0 x Type N 630 IVES END OF SECTION 08 7100 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Glazing 088000 - 1 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 08 8000-GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Glass for windows, doors, interior borrowed lites, storefront framing, glazed curtain walls. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 4126 "All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts." 2. Section 08 1416 "Flush Wood Doors." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. IBC: International Building Code. D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Glazing 088000 - 2 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. 1. Tinted glass. 2. Coated glass. 3. Insulating glass. C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Glazing 088000 - 3 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.11 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing. C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. b. Importance Factor: III c. Exposure Category: C. 3. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 4. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest part of the glass. 5. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 6. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Glazing 088000 - 4 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat- strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat- strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. B. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Glazing 088000 - 5 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). 2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Glazing 088000 - 6 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Glazing 088000 - 7 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. Provide 1/8-inchminimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Glazing 088000 - 8 of 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type TG: Clear, fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Safety glazing labeling required. END OF SECTION 08 8000 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Plastic Glazing 08 8400 - 1 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 08 8400 - PLASTIC GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Monolithic acrylic glazing. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on plastic glazing, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for plastic glazing during and after installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Plastic Glazing Samples: For each color and finish of plastic glazing indicated, 12 inches square and of same thickness indicated for final Work. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Product Certificates: For plastic glazing and glazing products. C. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For plastic glazing. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Plastic Glazing 08 8400 - 2 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For plastic glazing to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect plastic glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to plastic glazing and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Maintain protective coverings on plastic glazing to avoid exposures to abrasive substances, excessive heat, and other sources of possible deterioration. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Abrasion- and UV-Resistant Polycarbonate: Manufacturer agrees to replace polycarbonate products that break or develop defects from normal use that are attributable to manufacturing process and not to practices for maintaining and cleaning plastic glazing contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include coating delamination, haze, excessive yellowing, and loss of light transmission beyond the limits stated in plastic glazing manufacturer's standard form. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic glazing from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Plastic glazing sheets and glazing materials shall withstand normal temperature changes and impact loads without failure, including loss or breakage of plastic sheets attributable to the following: deterioration of plastic sheet and glazing materials, or other defects in materials and installation. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics of Plastic Glazing: As determined by testing plastic glazing by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Self-ignition temperature of 650 deg F or higher when tested according to ASTM D 1929 on plastic sheets in thicknesses indicated for the Work. 2. Smoke density of 75 or less when tested according to ASTM D 2843 on plastic sheets in thicknesses indicated for the Work. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Plastic Glazing 08 8400 - 3 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3. Burning extent of 1 inch or less when tested according to ASTM D 635 at a nominal thickness of 0.060 inch or thickness indicated for the Work. 4. Burning rate of 2.5 in./min. or less when tested according to ASTM D 635 at a nominal thickness of 0.060 inch or thickness indicated for the Work. 5. Flame-spread index of not less than that indicated when tested according to ASTM E 84. 2.3 PLASTIC GLAZING, GENERAL A. Glazing Publication: Comply with published instructions of plastic glazing manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See this publication for definitions of glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. B. Plastic Glazing Labeling: Identify plastic sheets with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency, indicating compliance with required fire-test-response characteristics. 2.4 MONOLITHIC ACRYLIC GLAZING A. Plastic Glazing: Transparent acrylic sheet; ASTM D 4802, Category A-2 (continuously cast), Gloss Surface. 1.Basis of Design: LuciteLux L Clear NC010 2. Nominal Thickness: 0.236-inches. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Combustibility Class: CC2. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with requirements of manufacturers of plastic glazing and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Compressible Filler Rods: Closed cell of waterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, flexible and resilient, with 5- to 10-psi compression strength for 25 percent deflection. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Sizes: Fabricate plastic glazing to sizes required for openings indicated. Allow for thermal expansion and contraction of plastic glazing without restraint and without withdrawal of edges from frames, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with plastic glazing manufacturer's written instructions. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Plastic Glazing 08 8400 - 4 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plastic glazing framing, with glazing Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 3. Effective sealing between joints of plastic glazing framing members. B. Proceed with glazing only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of plastic glazing materials, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publication. B. Glazing channel dimensions indicated on Drawings are designed to provide the necessary bite on plastic glazing, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust plastic glazing lites during installation to ensure that bite is equal on all sides. C. Sand or scrape cut edges of plastic glazing to provide smooth edges, free of chips and hairline cracks. D. Remove burrs and other projections from glazing channel surfaces. E. Protect plastic glazing surfaces from abrasion and other damage during handling and installation, according to the following requirements: 1. Retain plastic glazing manufacturer's protective covering or protect by other methods according to plastic glazing manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Remove covering at border of each piece before glazing; remove remainder of covering immediately after installation where plastic glazing is exposed to sunlight or where other conditions make later removal difficult. 3. Remove damaged plastic glazing sheets from Project site and legally dispose of off-site. Damaged plastic glazing sheets are those containing imperfections that, when installed, result in weakened glazing and impaired performance and appearance. F. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. G. Provide edge blocking to comply with referenced glazing publication unless otherwise instructed by plastic glazing manufacturer. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Plastic Glazing 08 8400 - 5 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI H. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. I. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets as recommended in writing by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Install tapes continuously, but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. B. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. C. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant recommended by tape manufacturer. D. Do not remove release paper from tape until immediately before each lite is installed. E. Apply heel bead of glazing sealant. F. Center plastic glazing lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. G. Apply cap bead of glazing sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect plastic glazing from contact with contaminating substances from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with plastic glazing, remove immediately and wash plastic glazing according to plastic glazing manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove and replace plastic glazing that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism. C. Wash plastic glazing on both faces before date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Wash plastic glazing according to plastic glazing manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08 8400 FEH DESIGN 29 November 2017 Project No: 2017307 Finish and Material Legend 09 0000 - 1 of 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Finish Code Manufacturer Product Description General Location DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 096513 Resilient Base & Accessories RB-1 Johnsonite Color: #63 Burnt Umber General, as Specified 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring LVT-1 Mohawk Style: Lineate Color: 957 Cord Size: 9”x59” Installation: 1/3 Brick Program Room - Field Color LVT-2 Mohawk Style: Lineate Color: 565 Strake Size: 9”x59” Installation: 1/3 Brick Program Room – Accent Color LVT-3 Mohawk Style: Lineate Color: 656 Lines Size: 9”x59” Installation: 1/3 Brick Program Room – Accent Color LVT-4 Mohawk Style: Metal Color: 631 Lemon Lime Size: 18”x36” Installation: Brick Maker Space 096813 Tile Carpeting CPT-1 Mannington Style: Stock Brights Color: Offerings 84299 Size: 24x24 Installation: Brick Ashlar Children’s Area (field color) CPT-2 Mannington Style: Color Anchor Color: Island 35651 Size: 12x48 Installation: 1/3 Brick Children’s Area (circulation path – alternating rows are solid blue) CPT-3 Mannington Style: Color Anchor Color: Cicada 44649 Size: 12x48 Installation: 1/3 Brick Children’s Area (circulation path – accent) FEH DESIGN 29 November 2017 Project No: 2017307 Finish and Material Legend 09 0000 - 2 of 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI CPT-4 Mannington Style: Color Anchor Color: Flowerista 63641 Size: 12x48 Installation: 1/3 Brick Children’s Area (circulation path – accent) CPT-5 Mannington Style: Color Anchor Color: Meadow 43650 Size: 12x48 Installation: 1/3 Brick Children’s Area (circulation path – accent) 099123 Interior Paint P-1 Sherwin Williams Color: SW 7570 Egret White (Eggshell on Walls) New General Wall Color P-2 Sherwin Williams Color: SW6524 Commodore (Eggshell on Soffit, Semi-gloss on HM Door Frame & Sliding Door) Hard Ceiling over new circulation path, New Vertical Marquee at Entry, Barn Door at Classroom & New HM Frame at Door#104.1 P-3 Sherwin Williams Color: SW9032 Stay in Lime (Eggshell on Soffit) New Soffit at Maker Space P-4 Sherwin Williams Color: SW6890 Osage Orange (Eggshell on Walls) Accent Wall in Maker Space P-5 Sherwin Williams Color: SW7044 Amazing Gray (Eggshell on Walls) Classroom Walls & Accent Walls (see finish plan) P-6 Sherwin Williams Color: SW1158 Oyster White (old Sherwin Williams color) See owner for attic stock Adult Side of New Wall P-7 Sherwin Williams Color: See owner for attic stock Existing Columns at Entry P-8 Sherwin Williams Color: See owner for attic stock Existing Dark Green Bulkhead at Entry 122413 Roller Window Shades WS Graber Product: Light Weaves Solar Shade Style: Cumulus Openness: 14% Windows in Children’s Area and Program Room FEH DESIGN 29 November 2017 Project No: 2017307 Finish and Material Legend 09 0000 - 3 of 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Non-structural Metal Framing 092216 - 1 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI SECTION 09 2216-NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 4000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 1) Nominal sizes included: 2 ½, 3-5/8 inches and 8 inches. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Non-structural Metal Framing 092216 - 2 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1)Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2)MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track. 3)Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series. 4)Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 5)Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inchminimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Basis of Design: Bridging channel as manufactured by Bridge Bar 2. Depth: ¾” and 1 ½” as required for stud sizes 3. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 4. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel. F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Hat shaped. H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inchuncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Non-structural Metal Framing 092216 - 3 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inchin diameter. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inchand minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inchuncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b.USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Non-structural Metal Framing 092216 - 4 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Non-structural Metal Framing 092216 - 5 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 5. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c. E. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 incheso.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Non-structural Metal Framing 092216 - 6 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 24 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09 2216 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Gypsum Board 092900 - 1 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 09 2900-GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 2. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Gypsum Board 092900 - 2 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. C. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 1. STC at interior partitions shall be a minimum of 44. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum b. CertainTeed Corp. c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Wallboard and Ceiling Board: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Ceiling board to be used in bulkheads and soffits in open areas. Refer to locations as indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Gypsum Board 092900 - 3 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. e. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Gypsum Board 092900 - 4 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft.in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Gypsum Board 092900 - 5 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Regular Type: On ceilings and vertical surfaces above 8’-0” adjacent floor level. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Curved Surfaces: 1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch-long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Gypsum Board 092900 - 6 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting." E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09 2900 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Resilient Base & Accessories 096513 - 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple mentary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermoset-rubber base. 2. Vinyl molding accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture sp ecified, not less than 12 inches long. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long. E. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Resilient Base & Accessories 096513 - 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE (RB) A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 1. Style and Location: a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with carpet tile, resilient flooring and concrete . C. Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Job formed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. H. Colors: #63 Burnt Umber FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Resilient Base & Accessories 096513 - 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2.2 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. B. Description: Vinyl carpet edge for glue-down applications. C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. D. Locations: Provide transition from carpet tile to concrete. E. Colors and Patterns: #20 Charcoal 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting perform ance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Resilient Base & Accessories 096513 - 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient acc essories. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Resilient Base & Accessories 096513 - 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 FEH DESIGN 8 November 2017 Project No: 2015303 Resilient Tile Flooring 096519 - 1 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 09 6519-RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. High Performance Luxury Vinyl Tile. B. Related sections: 1. Section 02 4119 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Division 09 – Resilient Base and accessories for resilient base products. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated. E. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. FEH DESIGN 8 November 2017 Project No: 2015303 Resilient Tile Flooring 096519 - 2 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg For more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. FEH DESIGN 8 November 2017 Project No: 2015303 Resilient Tile Flooring 096519 - 3 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI B. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification. C. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2.2 LUXURY VINYL TILE - LVT A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product as manufactured by Mohawk, or approved equal manufacturer: 1.LVT-1, 2 and 3: Classification: ASTM F1700 – Class III, Type A Smooth, Type B Embossed Commercial Grade Loose Lay Enhanced Resilient Tile a. Product, Pattern, and Color: As indicated in Section 09 0000 “Finish and Material Legend” b. Product Type: Floating LVT c. Size: 9”Wx59”L Planks d. Thickness: 5mm e. Wear Layer: 20 mil f. Installation Method: Loose Lay with Perimeter Glue g. Installation Pattern: 1/3 Brick (see Finish Plan) 2.LVT-4: Classification: ASTM F1700 – Class III, Type A Smooth, Type B Embossed Commercial Grade Loose Lay Enhanced Resilient Tile a. Product, Pattern, and Color: As indicated in Section 09 0000 “Finish and Material Legend” b. Product Type: Floating LVT c. Size: 18”Wx36”L d. Thickness: 5mm e. Wear Layer: 20 mil f. Finish: M-Force Enhanced Urethane g. Installation Method: Perimeter Glue h. Installation Pattern: 1/3 Brick (see Finish Plan) 2.3 MATERIALS A. Leveling and Patching Compounds: As indicated in 03 5413 “Synthetic Gypsum Cement Underlayment” or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content: a. Vinyl Composition Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L less water. FEH DESIGN 8 November 2017 Project No: 2015303 Resilient Tile Flooring 096519 - 4 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. C. Prepare floor after removal of existing vinyl composition tile systems, to receive new tile. Remove residue to the extent acceptable to manufacturers recommendation for installation of new tile on existing substrates. D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. E. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. F. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. FEH DESIGN 8 November 2017 Project No: 2015303 Resilient Tile Flooring 096519 - 5 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Lay tiles square with room axis, in pattern indicated. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction, in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying two coats of liquid floor polish, if recommended by the manufacturer. E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09 6519 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Tile Carpeting 096813 - Page 1 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI SECTION 09 6813 - TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Modular carpet tile. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 02 4119 “Selective Demolition” for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. C. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Tile Carpeting 096813 - Page 2 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, and delamination. B. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, from the same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET GENERAL (CPT): A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product as manufactured by Mannington Commercial: B.CPT-1: Frenemy Collection, “Stock Brights” 1. Fiber: 100% Antron Lumena Type 6,6 Nylon 2. Construction: Textured Patterned Loop 3. Dye Method: Solution 4. Beach Resistance: Color Safe 5. Stain Resistance: XGUARD 6. Size: 24 in x 24 in 7. Layout: Brick Ashlar FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Tile Carpeting 096813 - Page 3 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI C.CPT-2, 3, 4 and 5: “Color Anchor” 1. Fiber Content: 100% Antron Lumena Type 6,6 Nylon 2. Construction: Patterned Loop 3. Dye Method: Solution 4. Beach Resistance: Color Safe 5. Stain Resistance: XGUARD 6. Size: 12inx48in 7. Layout: 1/3 Brick 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in- Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Tile Carpeting 096813 - Page 4 of 4 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: 1. Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders, as shown on the contract documents. H. Install sections of carpet into covers of recessed floor outlet boxes. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 6813 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Painting 099123 - Page 1 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI SECTION 09 9123-INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Gypsum board. 2. Rough Carpentry. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed to view bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish. C. Do not paint pre-finished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Pre-finished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Acoustical ceiling tile. b. Aluminum windows. c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. d. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Painting 099123 - Page 2 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 9300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates. 2. Division 23 Section "Mechanical Assemblies" for surface preparation and finish coats for exposed ductwork, exposed HVAC equipment and exposed uninsulated piping. 3. Division 26 Section "Electrical Assemblies" for surface preparation and finish coats for exposed conduit and other exposed prime painted electrical items 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Painting 099123 - Page 3 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Painting 099123 - Page 4 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 5. Or approved equal. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction [and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)]. 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. D. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Painting 099123 - Page 5 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. E. Colors: as selected by owner and architect. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50. 1. Benjamin Moore; Super Spec, Premium Interior Latex Primer, 253/K253, E2. 2. PPG Architectural; Speedhide, Interior Latex Sealer Quick-Drying, 6-2, E3. 3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200, Interior Latex Primer, B28W08200, E2. 2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Interior: MPI #52. 1. Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500, Waterborne Interior Eggshell, N538/K538, E3. 2. PPG Architectural; Speedhide, Interior Satin Acrylic Latex, 6-3511,E3. 3. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC, Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20W02651, E3. 2.5 SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS A. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81. 1. Benjamin Moore; Corotech, Quick Dry Semi-Gloss Enamel, V231, E2. 2. PPG Architectural; PPG, Industrial Semi-Gloss Oil, 7-844, E3. 3. Sherwin-Williams Industrial & Marine, Industrial Enamel B54 Series, E2. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Painting 099123 - Page 6 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. MDF: 15 percent C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. E. MDF Substrates: 1. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 2. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of mdf. 3. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Painting 099123 - Page 7 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 3. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. D. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. E. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. F. At areas noted or scheduled as “Exposed Structure” to be painted or ceilings with no acoustical ceiling tile/grid noted or scheduled to be painted, the following shall apply: 1. Include painting of all new and exposed conduit, electrical equipment, data cable, cable trays, ductwork, piping, ect. to match the adjacent ceiling color. G. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Painting 099123 - Page 8 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI H. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. I. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed to view in equipment rooms and occupied spaces, including occupied spaces without acoustical ceilings. J. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material that are exposed to view in occupied spaces. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work: a. Conduit and boxes that are exposed to view in occupied spaces. b. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. K. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. L. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Painting 099123 - Page 9 of 9 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board (non-textured)–Painted Ceilings and “Bulkheads” –Eggshell Finish: Provide the following finish systems over new interior gypsum board surfaces painted ceiling and soffits unless noted to receive an alternate finish elsewhere: 1. Eggshell Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied to new walls at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 to 2 mils per coat. Apply touch up primer to ceilings at repair areas. b. First and Second Coats: Eggshell enamel, latex applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils 1.5 to 2 mils per coat. Provide total color and sheen uniformity, free from brush marks and roller tracks. B. Other Surfaces called out on drawings to be painted: Provide the following finish systems: a. Provide one coat of appropriate primer/undercoater followed by two coats of finish. b. Paint all hollow metal door frames. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING COLOR SCHEDULE A. Basis-of-Design Product: Sherwin-Williams Company (The), or a comparable product of one of the other listed manufacturers. Refer to Section 90 0000 “Finish and Material Legend” for colors and the Finish Schedule for locations. END OF SECTION 09 9123 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Staining And Transparent Finishing 099300 - 1 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI SECTION 09 9300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes on the following substrates: 1. Interior Substrates: a. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry). b. Wood-based panel products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for standard paint systems on interior substrates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated. 1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches square. 2. Label each Sample for location and application area. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Staining And Transparent Finishing 099300 - 2 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of finish system and substrate. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. c. Stile and rail Doors – one door will be selected. d. Wood panel and wood trim component 2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Staining And Transparent Finishing 099300 - 3 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Benjamin Moore & Co. 2.Diamond Vogel Paints. 3.PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 4.Pratt & Lambert. 5.Sherwin-Williams Company (The). B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles for the category indicated. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated. C. Stain Colors: 1. Basis of Design: Match existing; Similar to Pionite Hearth Oak WO862 2.3 STAINS A. Stain, Semi-Transparent, for Interior Wood: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Benjamin Moore, Interior Wood Penetrating Stain, F241, E1. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Olympic, Preminum Interior Oil Based Wood Stain, 44500, E3. 3. Pratt & Lambert; Pratt & Lambert, Tonetic Interior Oil Wood Stains, E0. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Wood Classics, Interior Oil Stain, A49V200, E1. 5. Refer to additional spec sections for interior wood trim, panels, casework, windows and doors for coordination of wood stain colors. B. The stain required for components in this project is to coordinate all wood products to provide an overall uniform appearance for both new products and existng products. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Staining And Transparent Finishing 099300 - 4 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI 2.4 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES A. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Satin (Gloss Level 4): 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Benwood, Polyurethane Finish Low Lustre, N435/F435, E3. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Olympic, Premium Interior Oil Based Polyurethane Clear Satin, 43886, E2. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Wood Classics, Polyurethane Clear Satin, A67F1, E1. 2.5 OIL FINISH A. Linseed Oil: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Boiled Linseed Oil, E3. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying wood finishes if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces before refinishing with complying materials if the two finishes are incompatible or produce results that, in the opinion of the Architect, are aesthetically unacceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 10 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Staining And Transparent Finishing 099300 - 5 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing. 1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. D. Interior Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off. 3. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Staining And Transparent Finishing 099300 - 6 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI 3.5 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including wood trim, architectural woodwork, wood doors, windows, and wood-based panel products. B. Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including wood trim and molding. 1. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System: a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90. b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, satin (Gloss Level 4), MPI #57. C. Stain color: Match existing; Similar to Pionite Hearth Oak WO862 END OF SECTION 09 9300 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Panel Signage 101423 - 1 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 10 1423-PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Panel signs. 2. Vinyl Signs 3. Field-applied, vinyl-character signs B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs. 2. Section 22 0553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment. 3. Section 23 0553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment. 4. Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Panel Signage 101423 - 2 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. 1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Acrylic sheet. 2. Die-cut vinyl characters and graphic symbols. Include representative samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. 3. Vinyl of each image. E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. C. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Panel Signage 101423 - 3 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs. 2.2 SIGNS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product as manufactured by one of the following: 1. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 2. Signarama 3. Best Sign Systems Inc. 4. Gemini Incorporated. 5. InPro Corporation 6. Mohawk Sign Systems. B. Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Solid-Sheet Sign: Acrylic sheet with finish specified in "Surface Finish and Applied Graphics" Subparagraph below and as follows: a. Thickness: 0.080 inch. 2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth. a. Edge Condition: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Rounded to radius indicated. c. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with concealed anchors. 4. Surface Finish and Applied Graphics: a. Integral Acrylic Sheet Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. b. Overcoat: Manufacturer's standard baked-on clear coating. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Panel Signage 101423 - 4 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 5. Flatness Tolerance: Sign panel shall remain flat or uniformly curved under installed conditions as indicated and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner. C. Panel Sign Schedule: 1. Sign Type: Type 1 a. Sign Size: As indicated on drawings. b. Message Panel Material: acrylic. c. Message Panel Finish/Color: As selected by Architect d. Background Finish/Color: As selected by Architect e. Copy: Changeable Paper Insert f. Quantity: (21) Mounted to Furniture End Panels along Path g. Reserved: owner reserves the right to add up to 4 additional signs D. Vinyl Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, adhered to interior gypsum board walls; and as follows: 1. Solid-Sheet Sign: Vinyl sheet with full-color printed graphics as indicated in the schedule below. 2. Sign Type: Vinyl Character Sign a. Message Panel Material: Vinyl. b. Message Panel Finish/Color: Full-Color Printed Vinyl. c. Background Finish/Color: To be chosen by architect from manufacturer’s full range d. Location / Size: 1) New wall above PATH 100; As indicated on drawings e. Character Size: 4’-0”. f. Text: “KiDS” g. Font: Impact 3. Sign Type: Decorative Vinyl Sign a. Message Panel Material: Vinyl. b. Message Panel Finish/Color: Full-Color Printed Vinyl. c. Background Finish/Color: Clear d. Location / Size: 1) ENTRY / 13’-7 1/8” x 8’-1” e. See interior elevations for location and quantity. 2.3 PANEL-SIGN MATERIALS A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering). B. Vinyl Film: UV-resistant vinyl film of nominal thickness indicated, with pressure-sensitive, permanent adhesive on back; die cut to form characters or images as indicated and suitable for exterior applications. C. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Panel Signage 101423 - 5 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. B. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer for glazed surface application. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges. C. Subsurface-Engraved Graphics: Reverse engrave back face of clear face-sheet material. Fill resulting copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply opaque manufacturer's standard background color coating over enamel-filled copy. D. Shop- and Subsurface-Applied Vinyl: Align vinyl film in final position and apply to surface. Firmly press film from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated. D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Panel Signage 101423 - 6 of 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work. B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. B. Furniture Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Pressure Sensitive Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. 2. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 10 1423 FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Roller Window Shades 12 2413 - Page 1 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI SECTION 12 2413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers and fascia. 2. See schedule at end of this specification section for locations. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for light-blocking shades with a sealant. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shade band material. 1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark inside face of material if applicable. 2. Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Roller Window Shades 12 2413 - Page 2 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI 1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Spring Window Fashions 2. Hunter Douglas Contract. 3. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 4. MechoShade Systems, Inc. B. Basis-of Design Product: Spring Window Fashions, Graber Cumulus Roller Shades. C. Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS WITH FASCIA A. Spring Operating Mechanisms: Roller contains spring sized to accommodate shade size indicated. Provide with positive locking mechanism that can stop shade movement at each half- turn of roller and with manufacturer's standard pull. B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Roller Window Shades 12 2413 - Page 3 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and idle- end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service. 1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of inside face of shade. 2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller. 3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method using mechanical fasteners C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions indicated. D. Shadebands: 1. Shadeband Material: Light-blocking fabric. 2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum. a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material. b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Installation Accessories: 1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners. a. Shape: L-shaped or Curved. b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches. 2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps. 3. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of aligning shadebands with channels at tops. 4. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at bottoms of shades when shades are closed. 5. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. 1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer. 2. Type: PVC-coated fiberglass. 3. Weave: Mesh. 4. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt. 5. Openness Factor: 5 percent. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Roller Window Shades 12 2413 - Page 4 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2-inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch. Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening in which shade is installed less 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch. C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except as follows: 1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4, provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion of the material. 2. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required, one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances,and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. FEH DESIGN November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Roller Window Shades 12 2413 - Page 5 of 5 Muskego Public Library Renovation Muskego, WI B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 ROLLER SHADE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide roller shades to comply with requirements in this Section and with the following schedule of shades: 1.Base Bid: Single Roller Shades – Exterior Windows: Provide roller shades as specified above at all windows in the following rooms: JUVENILE 106, DISCOVERY AREA 105, CLASSROOM 104 a. Approximate Sizes are: (5) windows 7’-11”W x 6’-8”H (1) side lite 4’-8”W x 8’-8”H FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL - GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK It is the intent of these specifications to provide complete and workable electrical systems as shown on the accompanying plans and as specified herein except such parts as are specifically exempted herein. Provide all necessary supervision, coordination, labor, materials, equipment, fixtures, dryage, hoisting, tools, transportation, plant services and facilities, machinery and connections to utilities for the installation of complete and operable electrical systems. If details or special conditions are required in addition to those shown on drawings, provide all material and equipment usually furnished with such systems or required to complete their installation, whether noted in plans and specification or not. Materials and labor shall be new (unless noted otherwise), first class and workmanlike and shall be subject at all times to the A/E’s inspections, tests and approval from the commencement until the acceptance of the completed work. The layout shown on the drawings is necessarily diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as other work will permit. The drawings provide design intent. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions at the site and be responsible for their accuracy. All sizes as given are minimum except as noted. Because of the scale of the Drawings, certain basic items, such as, pipe fittings, duct fittings, access panels, and sleeves, may not be shown. Where such items are required by Code or by other Sections, or where required for proper installation of the Work, such items shall be included, whether shown or not. In the event of any inconsistencies between the specifications, drawings, contract documents, applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules and regulations, the contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and comply with or conform its work to the most stringent legal or contractual requirements. Changes from these drawings required to make this work conform to the building construction shall be made only with prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer. All proposed changes shall be shown on shop drawings. All measurements shall be verified by actual observation and all work shall fit in place meeting the approval of the Architect/Engineer. Equipment Specification may not deal individually with minute items required, such as, components, parts, controls, and devices which may be required to produce the equipment performance specified or as required to meet the equipment warranties. Where such items are required to make the system operational, they shall be included by the supplier of the equipment at no additional cost, whether or not specifically called for. SECTION INCLUDES The work under this section includes basic electrical requirements, which are applicable to all Division 26 sections. This section includes information common to two or more technical specification sections or items that are of a general nature, not conveniently fitting into other technical sections. 1. Submittals 2. Reference Standards 3. Quality Assurance 4. Guarantee 5. Work By Owner 6. Operation And Maintenance Instructions 7. Record Documents 8. Continuity Of Existing Services 9. Protection Of Finished Surfaces 10. Sealing And Firestopping 11. Off Site Storage FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 12. Regulatory Requirements 13. Certificates And Inspections 14. Coordination 15. Demolition And Existing Requirements 16. Temporary Electrical Work 17. Approved Electrical Testing Laboratories 18. Sleeves And Openings 19. Omissions 20. Definitions 21. Project/Site Conditions 22. Work Sequence And Scheduling 23. Work by Other Trades 24. Salvage Materials 25. Training 26. Access Panels And Doors 27. Identification 28. Demolition 29. Cutting And Patching 30. Building Access 31. Equipment Access 32. Housekeeping And Clean Up RELATED WORK Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section. The electrical work included in all other divisions is the responsibility of the contractor performing the Division 26 work unless noted otherwise. Division 21 – Fire Suppression Division 22 – Plumbing Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings for equipment under each section per requirements listed in that section, as well as per Division 1. Submit for all equipment and systems as indicated in the respective specification sections, marking each submittal with that specification section number. Mark general catalog sheets and drawings to indicate specific items being submitted and proper identification of equipment by name and/or number, as indicated in the contract documents. Failure to do this may result in the submittal(s) being returned to the Contractor for correction and resubmission. Do not submit hard copies of web pages. Failing to follow these instructions does not relieve the Contractor from the requirement of meeting the project schedule. On request from the A/E, the successful bidder shall furnish additional drawings, illustrations, catalog data, performance characteristics, etc. Submittals shall be grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. Include wiring diagrams of electrically powered equipment. The submittals must be approved before fabrication is authorized. Provide electronic copies of all submittals for review. REFERENCE STANDARDS Abbreviations of standards organizations referenced in this and other sections are as follows: 1. ANSI American National Standards Institute 2. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 3. EPA Environmental Protection Agency 4. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 5. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 6. IES Illuminating Engineering Society 7. ISA Instrument Society of America 8. NBS National Bureau of Standards 9. NEC National Electric Code 10. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 11. NESC National Electrical Safety Code 12. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 13. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. QUALITY ASSUR ANCE Substitution of Materials: Refer to Division 1 for equals and substitutions. 1. Where the following conflicts with Division 1, the requirements of Division 1 shall govern. 2. If the Contractor wishes to submit an alternate to the named manufacturers for any equipment, he may submit a voluntary alternative minimum 7 days prior to bid, stating the manufacturer’s name, model number, written, detailed product data. 3. Where materials or equipment are specified by name the proposed material or equipment must be identical to the specified material or equipment in all characteristics of quality, function and serviceability, regardless of application in the Project and, in addition, when the Architect deems that aesthetic significance is important, the equal material or equipment must be identical in all characteristics of visual appearance, design, color and texture. Any proposed equal shall be submitted to Architect/Engineer for prior approval, which Architect/Engineer may approve or disapprove in its sole discretion. Work performed or constructed with unapproved equals is at Contractor’s risk and any required correction of work incorporating unapproved equals shall be at Contractor’s sole cost and expense. 4. In all instances, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for proof of equality of the statute to the equipment hereinafter specified. All data and information necessary for proof of equality, function and space requirements shall be prepared and accompany the submittal of the substitution to the Architect/Engineer. Approval by the Architect/Engineer of equipment other than the specified does NOT relieve Contractor of this responsibility. All products and materials used are to be new, undamaged, clean and in good condition. Existing products and materials are not to be reused unless specifically indicated. Where equipment or accessories are used which differ in arrangement, configuration, dimensions, ratings, or engineering parameters from those indicated on the contract documents, the contractor is responsible for all costs involved in integrating the equipment or accessories into the system, including, but not limited to, coordination with other trades and any required changes by other trades and for obtaining the intended performance from the system into which these items are placed. All materials, except medium voltage equipment and components, shall be listed by and shall bear the label of an approved electrical testing laboratory. If none of the approved electrical testing laboratories has published standards for a particular item, then other national independent testing standards, if available, applicable, and approved by A/E, shall apply and such items shall bear those labels. Where one of the approved electrical testing laboratories has an applicable system listing and label, the entire system, except for medium voltage equipment and components, shall be so labeled. GUARANTEE Refer to Division 1 for Guarantees and Warranties. In addition to the requirements in Division 1, this Contractor shall meet the following requirements. In entering into a contract covering this work, the contractor accepts the specifications and guarantees that the work will be carried out in accordance with the requirements of this specification or such modifications as may be made under the contract documents. Contractor further guarantees that the workmanship and material will be of the best procurable and that none but experienced workmen familiar with each particular class of work will be employed. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Contractor further guarantees to replace and make good at his own expense, including travel time, all defects, which may develop within 1 year after final payment and acceptance by the Architect/Engineer, due to faulty workmanship or material, upon, receipt of written notification from the Owner. WORK BY OWNER All low voltage system cabling including but not limited to: Voice-Data Communications, Access Control, Intrusion Detection, Video Surveillance and Audio-Visual. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Refer to Division 1 for all operations and maintenance instructions. In addition to the general content specified under Division 1 supply the following additional documentation: 1. Manufacturer’s wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment. 2. Copies of all approved submittals along with approval letters. RECORD DOCUMENTS Refer to Division 1 for record documents. In addition to the general content specified under Division, follow the following procedures. 1. During the progress of the work, Contractor shall maintain a current (daily) record set of the drawings and specifications, indicating thereon all work installed at variance with such Contract Documents including, without limitation, work covered by Addenda, Field Work Orders, Change Orders and Engineers additional instructions, interpretations and clarification. All changes or deviations from the original layout of the work and all critical dimensions of buried or concealed work shall be recorded. It shall be Contractor’s responsibility to assure that said record sets are complete, accurate and up-to-date, Engineer shall have the right to inspect and review such record sets. 2. At the completion of the work, Contractor shall indicated on record sets all record changes and such additional details necessary or appropriate to provide a complete reference document for use by Engineer. If variations and details cannot be shown clearly thereon, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings adequate to impart the information. The foregoing drawings collectively shall constitute the “Record” drawings for the work. 3. All indication on “Record” drawings shall be executed in a legible manner at Contractor’s cost, using methods and legend presentations compatible with the overall scheme of the record drawings with respect to scale, drawing sheet sizes and sequential indexing. All changes shall be marked clearly in red and clouded. 4. Engineer may review Contractor’s “Record” drawings and notify Contractor of observed discrepancies or deviations. Contractor shall promptly correct discrepancies, deviations or illegible markups at Contractor’s expense and resubmit revised drawings for Engineer review. 5. Contractor shall provide final electronic record drawings to the Owner through the Engineer. CONTINUITY OF EXISTING SERVICES Do not interrupt or change existing services without prior written approval from the Owner's Project Representative. When interruption is required, coordinate scheduling of down-time with the Owner to minimize disruption to his activities. Unless specifically stated, all work involved in interrupting or changing existing services is to be done while the building is closed for business. The building shall be considered closed between the hours of 10PM and 5AM, Seven days a week. Each Contractor shall thoroughly familiarize himself with existing systems which will affect and be affected by relocation of existing equipment and installation of new lines and equipment. They shall plan installation of their work so that interruptions of services to any building or portion thereof will be a minimum and such interruptions shall occur only when system is not required, if possible. If not possible, each Contractor shall insure the operation FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI of services by whatever means possible, such as, installing bypasses, capping of services or providing temporary service. Each interruption shall be for as short a duration as possible. No extra costs will be paid to the Contractor for such outages which must occur outside of regular weekly working hours. This Contractor shall restore any circuit interruption as a result of this work to proper operation as soon as possible. Note that institutional operations are on a seven day week schedule. PROTECTION OF FINISHED SURFACES Refer to Division 1 for protection of finished services. Furnish one can of touch-up paint for each different color factory finish furnished by the Contractor. Deliver touch-up paint with other "loose and detachable parts" per Division 1. SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING Sealing and firestopping of sleeves/openings between conduits, cable trays, wireways, troughs, cablebus, busduct, etc. and the structural or partition opening shall be the responsibility of the contractor whose work penetrates the opening. The contractor responsible shall hire individuals skilled in such work to do the sealing and firestopping. These individuals hired shall normally and routinely be employed in the sealing and fireproofing occupation. Contractor shall request current life safety drawings from the Architect/Owner. OFFSITE STORAGE If payment will be requested for approved offsite stored material, then the Contractor shall complete an "Off-site Storage Agreement" which is available from the Owner. Prior approval by Owner’s personnel for offsite storage will be needed. No material will be accepted for offsite storage unless submittals for the material have been approved. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS All work and materials are to conform in every detail to applicable rules and requirements of the Wisconsin State Electrical Code, the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA 70), other applicable National Fire Protection Association codes, the National Electrical Safety Code, present manufacturing standards (including NEMA) and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). All Division 26 work shall be done under the direction of a currently certified State of Wisconsin Certified Master Electrician. CERTIFICATES AND INSPECTIONS Refer to Division 1 for permits, regulations, utilities and taxes. Obtain and pay for all required State or local installation inspections except those provided by the Architect/Engineer in accordance with State Code. Deliver originals of these certificates to the Owner. Include copies of the certificates in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions. Coordinate and provide inspections as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction over the site. COORDINATION Refer to Division 1 for coordination. In addition to the requirements specified under Division 1, the following requirements apply. It shall be the responsibility of each Contractor to coordinate and consult with each other to determine space requirements and to determine that adequate space for servicing is provided for all equipment whether furnished by the Contractor or others. The General Contractor shall have final decision on all space priority conflicts among Contractors. All space priority conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer and Owner's Representative. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Each Contractor shall thoroughly familiarize himself with existing systems which will affect and be affected by relocation of existing equipment and installation of new lines and equipment. They shall plan installation of their work so that interruptions of services to any building or portion thereof will be a minimum, and such interruptions shall occur only when system is not required, if possible. If not possible, each Contractor shall insure the operation of services by whatever means possible, such as, installing bypasses, or providing temporary service or circuits. Each interruption shall be for as short a duration as possible. Cooperation among all Contractors shall be required. Any Work that is installed without cooperating or coordinating with other Contractors and is in conflict shall be removed and reinstalled at that particular Contractor's cost. No cost additions to the Project will be considered due to a Contractor's lack of participation in the cooperation and coordination process. The following list of items of Work shall be the priority of order for all Contractors: 1. Structure 2. Recessed light fixtures 3. Gravity-flow systems for sanitary, storm, steam and steam condensate piping 4. Ductwork and appurtenances 5. Electrical secondary feeder conduits and low voltage cable tray 6. Plumbing vent piping 7. Fire protection (sprinkler system) 8. HVAC piping 9. Gas piping, process piping and domestic water 10. Electrical branch circuit conduit and low voltage conduit 11. Control conduit The above list, in descending order, is the precedence assigned the Work items for space priority. Gravity-flow systems have first priority. Exception: Plumbing lines below or behind plumbing fixtures shall have precedence over all other work. Electrical conduit above or below switchgear, panelboards and control panels shall have precedence over all other work. Do not install any fluid conveying piping over electrical or elevator equipment. In the case of interconnection of the work of two or more contractors, verify at the site or on shop drawings all dimensions relating to such work. All errors due to the failure to so verify any such dimensions shall be promptly rectified. Any installed work that is not coordinated and interferes with another contractor’s work shall be removed or relocated at the installing contractor’s expense. Prior to start of Construction, the General Contractor shall schedule a meeting with all of the Contractors responsible for the work items listed above. The purpose of the meeting is to introduce the coordination program and to determine its implementation in relation to the progress schedule. At the initial Coordination Meeting, the Mechanical Contractor / Ventilating Contractor shall provide to the General Contractor outline drawings at 1/4" scale indicating column centerlines, interior partition locations, and ceiling heights. The General Contractor shall verify all information shown on these drawings and relay any changes in the information to the Ventilation Contractor to be reflected on the Drawings. The Ventilating Contractor, with reference and consideration to the Structural, Heating, Electrical, Fire Protection, and Plumbing Drawings, shall draw to scale his proposed installation showing duct sizes, equipment layouts, and dimensions from column lines and from finished floors to bottom of ducts. Ductwork shall be maintained as tightly as possible to the underside of floor slabs and/or beams. For congested areas the Ventilating Contractor shall, in addition, prepare Drawings in section view. During this phase of the program, it shall be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to furnish the Ventilating Contractor with recessed lighting installation and clearance requirements. This information shall be outlined on the Drawings by the Ventilating Contractor. The ductwork layouts shall be produced in sequence as mandated by the Project Schedule. The earliest area indicated in the Schedule shall receive the first effort, etc. When the Ductwork Drawings for the earliest scheduled area have been completed (time limitation as determined at the initial coordination meeting), the Ventilating Contractor shall FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI provide the General Contractor with one set of drawings for each participant in the effort. The General Contractor will distribute the drawings to the participating Contractors for their use in drawing thereon the major components of their proposed installation using the general scheme shown on the Contract Drawings as a guide. The major components to be indicated include (but are not limited to) the following: 1. Structure 2. Roof drain leaders 3. Above 3” waste piping 4. Sprinkler mains 5. Heating hot water mains 6. Conveying systems 7. Significant secondary feeder conduit runs 8. Cable trays 9. Contract ceiling heights 10. Soffits 11. Access points 12. Fire wall penetrations 13. Gas, water, and process piping Information delineated shall be distance from column centerlines, pipe/equipment size, and distance from finished floor to bottom of pipe/equipment and hangers. Included on the Drawings shall be piping layout with hanger locations and hanger point loads. This information shall be developed satisfactorily enough to allow the Structural Engineer to verify the adequacy of the structural system for the projected loads. The hanger locations may have to be moved depending on the structural system review. No hanger shall be fabricated and/or installed until the hanger locations are reviewed and accepted by the Architect/Engineer. Within a period not to exceed two weeks after distribution of the drawings, the General Contractor will schedule a meeting with the Architect/Engineer and participating Contractors at which time areas of conflict shall be resolved. The drawings shall be overlaid to identify areas of conflict. All parties shall then cooperate in resolving the conflicts. Records of the agreements shall be entered on the Ventilating Contractor's drawings, acknowledged by all participants by signature in space provided for this purpose, and two copies distributed to all involved parties. All coordination drawing preparation and reproduction costs shall be borne by the Ventilating Contractor. The above drawings, review, and coordination process shall be repeated until all areas on the Project have been coordinated. In the event a Contractor fails to cooperate in the Coordination Program, they shall be held responsible for all costs incurred for adjustments to the work of others made necessary to accommodate the uncooperative Contractor's installations. DEMOLITION AND EXISTING REQUIREMENTS Existing active services: water, gas, steam, ventilation, compressed or control air, sanitary waste, sanitary vent, storm, electric, and any other building systems when encountered shall be protected against damage. Where existing services are to be demolished, the services shall be removed back to the point of origin and removed from the site unless otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative. Submit a “Sequence of Work Schedule” in respect to all temporary and permanent utility and service cutovers after final determination. This schedule shall be submitted for approval to the Owner and Architect/Engineer. The submittal shall designate priority order, service or utility affected, date of cutover, and time of day to start and finish. Bidders should inspect the site to become familiar with conditions of the site which will affect the Work. Bidders should verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, or other obstacles. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the Work required because of the successful bidder's failure to make this inspection. TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL WORK FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 8 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI The temporary lighting system shall be sufficient to enable all trades to safely complete their work and to enable Owner's Project Representative to check all work as it is being done. Illumination shall be 5 foot-candles minimum in all areas and, in addition, shall meet or exceed the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.56 Illumination (OSHA regulations). Provide at least two duplex outlets for small power tools for each 400 square feet of floor space, 120 volt single phase. Locate duplex outlets so that the power is available at any point of use with not more than 100 ft. power cord. Circuits shall be 20 ampere, single pole. In accordance with the latest issue of the National Electrical Code, all temporary electrical circuits for construction purposes shall be equipped with combination ground fault interrupter and circuit breakers meeting the requirements of UL for Class A, Group 1 devices. The ground fault interrupter portion shall be solid state type, insulated and isolated from the breaker mechanism. A test button shall be provided for checking the device. The breaker mechanism shall provide overload and short circuit protection and shall be operated by a toggle switch with overcenter switching mechanism so that contact cannot be held closed. All Trades shall furnish their extension cords and lamps other than those furnished for general lighting. All Trades and other separate Contractors shall be allowed to use the service provided for general lighting and fractional horsepower hand tools at no cost. The General Contractor shall be compensated by those requiring three phase and single- phase energy used for equipment other than fractional horsepower hand tools. Arrangements shall be made with the Lead Contractor before construction equipment is used. The General Contractor shall post the cost rates at start of construction. Rates may be posted on an hourly use basis or energy may be submetered at the General Contractor's option, but shall be based upon a fair and reasonable estimate of the cost of power used as billed by the Utility. Those trades requiring lighting or other electrical service outside of building shall pay for the installation and removal of service, maintenance charges, and energy consumed. Trades requiring voltage other than basic temporary system specified, three phase power, or a special single phase run, for operation of construction equipment or testing shall make their own arrangements with the General Contractor for cost of energy used, and the Electrical Trade for the cost of installation, and removal when no longer required. Heating and Ventilating Trade shall provide wiring, equipment and connections for portable or temporary heating units. The Electrical Trade shall expedite the work under this contract in such a manner that the permanent power wiring system and panels will be installed and connected to permanent heating and ventilating equipment in time to operate and test this equipment when the building has been closed sufficiently to permit the use of portions of heating and ventilating system for temporary heating during construction. Permanent wiring and connections may be used at permanent equipment; however, the use of the permanent system during construction shall in no way waive any part of the guarantee period. After Substantial Completion of the permanent electrical system and building wiring, permanent receptacles may be used during finishing work. Permanent wiring for lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles shall be installed only after all masonry and plastering has been completed, but this wiring shall not be used for motors larger than fractional HP or for welding equipment. Circuits for larger motors and welding equipment may be provided with special circuits to mains of electrical panels at the expense of those trades requiring them, provided that special permission is obtained from Owner's Project Representative and the installation is made by skilled electricians. APPROVED ELECTRICAL TESTING LABORATORIES The following laboratories are approved for providing electrical product safety testing and listing services as required in these specifications: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 2. Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 9 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SLEEVES AND OPENINGS Openings required in new or existing construction that may be necessary for the installation of new work shall be provided by the respective contractor and all patching and repairing shall be done by workmen competent in the trade required, at the expense of the respective contractor. The respective contractor shall be responsible for arranging the work so that minimum cutting will be required. All rubbish and excess materials involved in such cutting shall be promptly removed from the site and disposed of by the contractor. Cutting through the floor or roof systems or load bearing walls shall be done only with the prior written approval of the Architect/Engineer so as to avoid damaging the structural system. OMISSIONS No later than ten (10) days before bid opening, the Contractor shall call the attention of the A/E to any materials or apparatus the Contractor believes to be inadequate and to any necessary items of work omitted. DEFINITIONS Wherever the words “the Contractor”, “this Contractor” or “Electrical Contractor”, appear in this section, they refer to the Contractor for Electrical Work. The term “provide” includes such labor, methods, materials, equipment and transportation or other facilities required to complete the Contract and the performance of all duties thereby upon the Contractor. PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of A/E before proceeding. Tools, materials and equipment shall be confined to areas designated by the Owner’s project representative. WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING Install work in phases to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements. During the construction period coordinate schedule and operations with Owner's Construction Representatives. Refer to construction phases and scheduling information contained in the architectural portion of this project. WORK BY OTHER TRADES Every attempt has been made to indicate in this trade's specifications and drawings all work required of this Contractor. However, there may be additional specific paragraphs in other trade specifications and addenda, and additional notes on drawings for other trades which pertain to this Trade's work, and thus those additional requirements are hereby made a part of these specifications and drawings. Electrical details on drawings for equipment to be provided by others are based on preliminary design data only. This Contractor shall lay out the electrical work and shall be responsible for its correctness to match equipment actually provided by others. SALVAGE MATERIALS No materials removed from this project shall be reused (except as specifically noted below). All materials removed shall become the property of and shall be disposed of by the Contractor. TRAINING Provide a training plan sixty days before the planned training covering the following elements: 1. Equipment 2. Intended audience FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 10 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3. Location of training 4. Objectives 5. Subjects covered (description, duration of discussion, special methods, etc.) 6. Duration of training on each subject 7. Instructor for each subject 8. Methods (classroom lecture, manufacturer’s quality video, site walk-through, actual operational demonstrations, written handouts, etc.). Provide designated owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of equipment that makes up the system. Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on demonstration/training on each piece of equipment. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system shall be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated at another scheduled time, if necessary. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to execute the training. The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as specified, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being discussed. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the table of contents of the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference. Training shall include: 1. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in the O&M manuals. 2. A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include startup, operation in all modes possible, shutdown, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures. 3. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns. 4. Discussion of warranties and guarantees. 5. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 6. Explanatory information included in the O&M manuals. 7. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Classroom sessions shall include the use of overhead projections, slides, video/audio- taped material as might be appropriate. 9. Hands-on training shall include startup, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut-down, alarms, power failure and any emergency procedures, and preventative maintenance for all pieces of equipment. The contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls not controlled by the central control system. Video recording of the training sessions will be provided by the contractor and added to the O&M manuals. In addition, factory training videos identifying key troubleshooting, repair, service and/or replacement techniques shall be provided and reviewed with the owner. Provide a minimum of 16 hours of instruction. Provide additional training as specified in other specification sections for specific equipment. - PRODUCTS ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS Lay-in Ceilings: FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 11 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 1. Removable lay-in ceiling tiles in 2 x 2 foot or 2 x 4 foot configuration provided under Division 9 are sufficient; no additional access provisions are required unless specifically indicated. Concealed Spline Ceilings: 1. Removable sections of ceiling tile held in position with metal slats or tabs compatible with the ceiling system used will be provided under Division 9. Metal Pan Ceilings: 1. Removable sections of ceiling tile held in position by pressure fit will be provided under Division 9. Plaster Walls and Ceilings: 1. 16 gauge frame with not less than a 20 gauge hinged door panel, prime coated steel for general applications, stainless steel for use in toilets, showers and similar wet areas, concealed hinges, screwdriver operated cam latch for general application, key lock for use in public areas, UL listed for use in fire rated partitions if required by the application. Use the largest size access opening possible, consistent with the space and the equipment needing service; minimum size is 12" by 12". IDENTIFICATION Refer to Electrical Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. SLEEVES AND OPENINGS General: 1. Pipe sleeves shall be constructed of standard weight ASTM A53 or ASME B36.10 steel with an anchor plate constructed of A36/A36M steel welded to the pipe. The sleeve shall be sized a minimum of 1” larger than piping insulation diameter. The entire assembly shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Duct sleeves and piping sleeves passing through interior walls shall be constructed of 24 gauge galvanized steel minimum thickness. Sleeves Through Below Grade Walls: 1. Provide steel pipe sleeve, ASTM A53, pressure sealing with membrane clamp ring, gasket, water stop ring, external rings, and nitrile rubber link seals. The assembly shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. a. Seals: Modular mechanical type seals, consisting of interlocking nitrile rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and the sleeve and electrically isolate the carrier pipe from the steel sleeve. b. Sealing Element: Polychloroprene rubber material compounded to resist aging, ozone, sunlight, hydrocarbon gases, water, and chemical action. c. Hardware: Type 300 series stainless steel fasteners. Threads rolled to produce smooth uniform threads and unbroken flow lines. d. Compression Plates: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester plastic, injection molded for high physical properties, dielectric strength and non-cold flow creep characteristics, having high resistance to acidic and alkaline soils. 2. For sleeves located 15 feet or more below grade provide cast iron sleeve ASTM A74 with compression seals. SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING Fire And/Or Smoke Rated Penetrations: 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M, STI/SpecSeal, Tremco, Hilti b. All firestopping systems shall be by the same manufacturer. 2. Submittals: a. Contractor shall submit product data for each firestop system. Submittals shall include product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria, test data, MSDS sheets, installation details and procedures for each method of installation applicable to this project. For non-standard conditions where no UL tested system exists, FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 12 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI submit manufacturer's drawings for UL system with known performance for which an engineering judgment can be based upon. 3. Product: a. Firestop systems shall be UL listed or tested by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Owner and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). b. Use a product that has a rating not less than the rating of the wall or floor being penetrated. Reference architectural drawings for identification of fire and/or smoke rated walls and floors. c. Contractor shall use firestop putty, caulk sealant, intumescent wrapstrips, intumescent firestop collars, firestop mortar or a combination of these products to provide a UL listed system for each application required for this project. Provide mineral wool backing where specified in manufacturer's application detail. Non-Rated Penetrations: 1. Conduit Penetrations Through Below Grade Walls: a. In exterior wall openings below grade, use a modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the uninsulated conduit and the cored opening or a water-stop type wall sleeve. 2. Conduit and Cable Tray Penetrations: a. At conduit and cable tray penetrations of non-rated interior partitions, floors and exterior walls above grade, use urethane caulk in annular space between conduit and sleeve, or the core drilled opening. – EXECUTION DEMOLITION Perform all demolition as indicated on the drawings to accomplish new work. Where demolition work is to be performed adjacent to existing work that remains in an occupied area, construct temporary dust partition to minimize the amount of contamination of the occupied space. Where pipe is removed and not reconnected with new work, cap ends of existing services as if they were new work. Coordinate work with the Owner to minimize disruption to the existing building occupants. All devices, fixtures, equipment, wiring and associated conduit, insulation and similar items demolished, abandoned, or deactivated are to be removed from the site by the Contractor except as specifically noted otherwise. All designated equipment is to be turned over to the owner for their use at a place and time so designated. Maintain the condition of material and/or equipment that is indicated to be reused equal to that existing before work began. All contractors requiring the personnel/ material hoist and or temporary construction elevator (i.e. new elevators, temporarily protected) at times other than outlined in the temporary facilities specifications will make arrangements directly with the general contractor. The general contractor is responsible for all coordination and scheduling of the use of any hoisting equipment so the flow of the project is smoothly maintained and all workers have access to the work areas to perform their work and deliver material to the areas needed according to the project schedule. If any contractor’s work requires the removal and replacement of any finished materials including but not limited to such materials as ceiling tiles, wall finishes, cabinets, doors, flooring, windows, etc. after those items are installed, each contractor will be responsible, at no additional cost to the owner, to replace any damaged, soiled or lost materials with new materials to match the existing materials and those materials damaged. CUTTING AND PATCHING Refer to Division 1 for cutting and patching. In addition to the requirements in Division 1: Each Contractor shall coordinate the placing of openings in the new structure as required for the installation of each Contractor’s work. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 13 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Each Contractor shall furnish to the General Contractor the accurate locations and sizes for required openings in the new work, but this shall not relieve each Contractor of the responsibility of checking to assure that properly sized openings are provided. When additional patching is required due to the Contractor's failure to inspect this work, then the Contractor shall make arrangements for the patching required to properly close the openings to include patch painting, and the Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect. If cutting and patching of the new structure is made necessary due to the Contractor's failure to install piping, ducts, sleeves, or equipment on schedule, or due to the Contractor's failure to furnish on schedule the information required for the leaving of openings, then it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements and obtain approval from the General Contractor and Architect/Engineer for this cutting and patching, and the Contractor shall pay any additional cost incurred in this respect. The Contractor shall also reimburse the Owner for any additional costs incurred to the Architect/Engineer for additional services caused by the Contractor in this respect. The Contractor shall provide cutting and patching and patch painting in the existing structure as required for the installation of his Work and shall furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Architect/Engineer. Extent of cutting shall be minimized; use core drills, power saws, or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. BUILDING ACCESS Arrange for the necessary openings in the building to allow for admittance of all apparatus. When the building access was not previously arranged and must be provided by this contractor, restore any opening to its original condition after the apparatus has been brought into the building. EQUIPMENT ACCESS Install all piping, conduit, ductwork, and accessories to permit access to equipment for maintenance. Coordinate the exact location of wall and ceiling access panels and doors with the General Contractor, making sure that access is available for all equipment and specialties. Where access is required in plaster or drywall walls or ceilings, furnish the access doors to the General Contractor and reimburse the General Contractor for installation of those access doors. The approximate location of all equipment and devices is shown on the drawings. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to change the location of all equipment or devices 6 feet in any direction at no additional cost provided such changes are requested before final installation. Install all equipment with ample space allowed for removal and repair. Provide ready accessibility to removable parts of equipment and to all wiring without moving equipment which is installed or which is already in place. In mechanical and electrical equipment spaces, expose ceiling outlets and conduit with due consideration to ventilating ducts and mechanical piping. Where numerous ducts occur, install conduits and outlets after the ventilating ducts. Puncturing of ductwork or hanging equipment such as light fixtures, ceiling hangers and conduits from ductwork is prohibited unless specifically noted otherwise. Electrical equipment shall be installed to maintain minimum clearances per Article 110 of NEC and ANSI C2 (National Electrical Safety Code). No piping carrying fluids shall be installed directly over electrical equipment. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. Where conflicts occur between Contract Document and these recommendations, a ruling shall be requested of the Architect for decision before proceeding with such work. COORDINATION FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 14 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI The Contractor shall cooperate with other trades in locating work in a proper manner. Should it be necessary to raise or lower or move longitudinally any part of the electrical work to better fit the general installation, such work shall be done at no extra cost to the Owner, provided such decision is reached prior to actual installation. The Contractor shall check location of electrical outlets with respect to other installations before installing. The Contractor shall verify that all devices are compatible for the surfaces on which they will be used. This includes, but is not limited to light fixtures, panelboards, devices, etc. and recessed or semi-recessed heating units installed in/on architectural surfaces. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls and other structural components as they are constructed. Coordinate all work with other contractors prior to installation. Any installed work that is not coordinated and that interferes with other contractor's work shall be removed or relocated at the installing contractor's expense. Coordinate arrangements, mounting and support of electrical equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. Coordinate with the Owner’s Division 27 and 28 contractors and equipment vendors for proper location, quantity and capacity of all required conduits, back boxes, device rings and power supplies required to support systems specified. SLEEVES AND OPENINGS General: 1. Sleeves are not required for piping and ducts passing through interior non-rated drywall, plaster, or wood partitions and interior poured concrete walls that have been saw cut or core drilled. 2. Pack annular space between sleeves and pipe or ducts with fiberglass insulation and seal. 3. Piping sleeves that pass through fire rated floors, walls, or ceilings shall be provided with a UL listed fire stop material meeting UL 1479 to seal the opening between the pipe and the pipe sleeve to maintain the fire rating. 4. Provide escutcheon plates on piping to cover sleeve and insulation in finished areas. 5. Refer to Division 1, General Requirements for additional information on sleeves and openings. Sleeves Through Floors/Ceilings: 1. Sleeves shall be installed to extend 1 inch above finished floor with a watertight sealant between floor and sleeve in all mechanical rooms and wet rooms listed below. 2. If a sleeve is not provided, provide 1-1/2 inch angle ring with urethane caulk between the angle and the floor and seal at the corners to form a watertight seal. 3. Wet Locations: a. Mechanical Rooms SEALING AND FIRESTOPPING The Contractor shall refer to building life safety drawings for all smoke and fire rates in addition to the mechanical drawings. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer before final addendum. Fire and/or Smoke Penetrations: 1. Install approved product in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions where a pipe (i.e. cable tray, bus, cable bus, conduit, wireway, trough, etc.) penetrates a fire rated surface. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00 - 15 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 2. Where firestop mortar is used to infill large fire-rated floor openings that could be required to support weight, provide permanent structural forming. Firestop mortar alone is not adequate to support any substantial weight. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. When the opening is through a non-fire rated wall, floor, ceiling or roof the opening must be sealed using an approved type of material. 2. Install escutcheons or floor/ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces for this paragraph include only those rooms with finished ceilings and the penetration occurs below the ceiling. 3. In exterior wall openings below grade, assemble rubber links of mechanical seal to the proper size for the conduit and tighten in place, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Install so that the bolts used to tighten the seal are accessible from the interior of the building or vault. 4. At interior partitions, conduit penetrations are required to be sealed for all clean rooms, laboratories, and most hospital spaces, computer rooms, dormitory rooms, tele/data/com rooms and similar spaces where the room pressure or odor transmission must be controlled. Apply sealant to both sides of the penetration in such a manner that the annular space between the conduit sleeve and the conduit is completely filled. HOUSEKEEPING AND CLEAN UP The Contractor shall clean up and remove from the premises, on a daily basis, all debris and rubbish resulting from its work and shall repair all damage to new and existing equipment resulting from its work. When job is complete, this Contractor shall remove all tools, excess material and equipment, etc., from the site. END OF SECTION Page Intentionally Left Blank FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Electrical Demolition for Remodeling 26 05 02 - 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 26 05 02 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING – GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK The work under this section includes selective and/or total demolition of all existing electrical equipment, devices, conduit, wiring, back boxes and supporting associated devices for the electrical systems as noted on the drawings. Refer to architectural phasing plans and specifications for sequencing of work. SECTION INCLUDES Materials and Equipment RELATED WORK Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Division 28 – Electronic Safety & Security - PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Materials and equipment for patching and extending work as specified in the individual Sections. - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements as shown on Drawings. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. Verify whether or not PCB ballasts exist in light fixtures which will be disposed of. If PCB light fixture ballasts exist, then follow requirements in PCB BALLAST HANDLING AND DISPOSAL below. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and/or existing record documents. Report discrepancies to the Owner, Architect/Engineer and Owner’s Field Representative before disturbing existing installation. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. PREPARATION Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. Coordinate utility service outages with the Owner, Owner’s Field Representative, Architect, and Engineer. Also, if applicable, coordinate utility service outages with the local Utility Company. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. In particular, all security and safety systems must be maintained in operation at all times as required by the Owner. This includes security and safety lighting. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the Owner and Owner’s Field Representative at least 48 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration which shall only occur while the building is closed for business and unoccupied by staff. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Electrical Demolition for Remodeling 26 05 02 - 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the Owner, Owner’s Field Representative and local Authority Having Jurisdiction at least 48 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. If required, make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. Existing Communication/Data System: Maintain existing system in service. DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK Demolish and extend existing electrical work to meet all requirements of these specifications. If certain raceways and boxes are abandoned but not scheduled for removal, those items shall be remoed. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. Repair adjacent existing construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work to match adjacent existing surfaces. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. This includes the extension of the circuit from the last active device to the next device in the system to be activated. PCB BALLAST HANDLING AND DISPOSAL Generally, all high-power factor fluorescent light ballasts manufactured before 1978 and some HID ballasts contain PCB compounds in their capacitors. The Contractor shall inspect all ballasts in all light fixtures and take the actions described below. All ballasts labeled as "NON-PCBs" or "NO PCBs" shall become the responsibility of the Contractor. If the PCB content is not stated on the ballast label, the ballast shall be handled as a PCB ballast. All PCB ballasts shall be removed from the light fixtures and shall have the wires clipped off. However, before removal, all PCB ballasts shall be carefully inspected for leaks. If a ballast appears to be leaking(evidenced by potting compound leaking out or by an oily film on the ballast surface) the ballast must be handled per EPA and DNR PCB regulations. Basically, this means the ballast is to be carefully removed from the fixture and placed in an approved drum. See paragraph below for the drum specifications. The person removing the ballast from the fixture shall wear protective gloves, eye protection, and protective clothing as necessary. If the fixture has also been contaminated, it must be cleaned to less than 10 micrograms/100 square centimeters contamination before disposal. This cleaning must be done by an approved PCB contractor and is not considered a part of this contract. Contact Owner for contractor approval before commencing with the cleanup. The ballasts shall then be placed in US DOT approved type 17C or type 17H drums (barrels) furnished by Veolia Environmental Services. The quantity and size of the drums will be determined by the contractor at the time of construction, - 30 and 55 gallon drums are typically available. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Electrical Demolition for Remodeling 26 05 02 - 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI These barrels shall be placed in storage with the cover that came with the barrels, in a location within a building, as designated by the Building Manager or Owner’s project representative. The barrels are not to be placed outside where they are exposed to weather. THESE BALLASTS ARE NOT TO BE REMOVED FROM THE WORK SITE BY THE CONTRACTOR. To do so, would be a violation of DNR and DOT hazardous waste regulations and may result in a fine to the Contractor. The Contractor shall label and mark the PCB storage drums with EPA approved PCB labels and the storage area with signs, marks and lines to meet the regulations of Wisconsin Code NR 157. The Contractor shall also provide approved PCB absorbent materials to be stored immediately adjacent to the drum storage area. Do not place loose absorbent material in the drums. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner’s Project representative, in written form, a total count of these ballasts (or their total weight by barrel) and where they are stored. See Lamp and Ballast Handling and Disposal instructions below. LAMP AND BALLAST HANDLING AND DISPOSAL All lamps (fluorescent, incandescent, and HID) contain mercury and/or lead (in the base) as well as other heavy metals and compounds which are regulated by the EPA and DNR during the disposal process. As a result, regulations have been issued covering the handling and disposal of all lamps. Therefore, lamps which have been removed from service for disposal shall be handled as follows by the Contractor. The Contractor shall very carefully remove all lamps (fluorescent, incandescent, and HID) from light fixtures before removal of the fixture from its mounted position. This is to reduce the likelihood that the lamp(s) will be broken. The contractor shall contact Veolia Environmental Services (1-800-358-9095 or 262-243- 8917), or similar agency, to coordinate the storage and pickup of disposed lamps and ballasts. The contractor shall obtain containers for the storage of lamps and ballasts. Removed lamps and ballasts shall be placed in containers by the contractor, marked with the number and type of lamp and ballast, and placed in storage at a location on the Owner’s property. The contractor shall label the area as “Hazardous Material Storage – Mercury”. The contractor shall make arrangements for pickup of the lamps and ballasts with Veolia Environmental Services, shall provide a count of all stored lamps and ballasts, and shall fill out any required forms. Costs associated with disposal of lamp and ballast is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor. CLEANING AND REPAIR Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, ballasts (if required) and broken electrical parts. INSTALLATION Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of other sections. END OF SECTION Page Intentionally Left Blank FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cable 26 05 19 - 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLE – GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK The work under this section includes furnishing and installing required wiring and cabling systems including pulling, terminating and splicing. SECTION INCLUDES General Manufacturers Building Wire Wiring Connectors RELATED WORK Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems. SUBMITTALS Submit product data: Provide for each cable assembly type. Submit factory test reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. Submit shop drawings for modular wiring system including layout of distribution devices, branch circuit conduit and cables, circuiting arrangement, and outlet devices. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. REFERENCE STANDARDS NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code IPCEA S-61-402/NEMA WC-5 Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable IPCEA S-66-524/NEMA WC-7 Cross-linked Thermosetting Polyethylene-Insulated Wire and Cable UL 83 ASTM PROJECT CONDITIONS Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. Conductor sizes are based on copper. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. – PRODUCTS GENERAL All wire shall be new, delivered to the site in unbroken cartons and shall be less than one year old out of manufacturer's stock. a. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cable 26 05 19 - 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI All cable and wire shall have 600 volts insulation, have a conductivity of 98 percent, and copper cables shall be annealed coated per ASTM B33 or B189. Wire sizes No. 12 AWG and smaller shall be solid wire, and wire No. 10 AWG and larger shall be stranded, Class B, ASTM B8. Stranded conductors may only be terminated with UL OR ETL Listed type terminations or methods: e.g. stranded conductors may not be wrapped around a terminal screw but must be terminated with a crimp type device or must be terminated in an approved back wired method. Minimum wire sizes shall be as follows: 1. Power wiring- #12 AWG 2. Control Wiring- #18 AWG All conductors shall be continuous without splices except at locations approved for the purpose. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company 3. General Cable Corporation 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company 5. Southwire Company 6. Houston Wire & Cable 7. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 8. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 9. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group, LLC 10. 3M; Electrical Products Division 11. Tyco Electronics Corp. BUILDING WIRE Description: Single conductor insulated wire. Insulation: 1. Copper - Type THHN/THWN, XHHW-2. METAL CLAD CABLE Type MC Cable may be used in IBC Business Group B occupancies non-emergency circuits for 15 and 20 ampere branch circuit wiring systems beyond the first outlet box. Provide metal clad cable (Type MC) that complies with UL Standard 1569 – Metal Clad Cables, the NEC and this section. Type MC cable shall consist of THHN insulated solid copper circuit conductors, an insulated solid copper equipment grounding conductor, a Mylar wrapping around the conductor bundle and a close fitting aluminum or galvanized steel outer sheath. Provide minimum 12 AWG conductors in Type MC cable. 1. Provide larger conductor sizes as required to limit branch circuit voltage drop to 3 percent at the full connected load. 2. Use larger conductor sizes to adjust allowable ampacity if there are more than 3 current carrying conductors in a cable. Provide Type MC cable with the same conductor color coding as specified for BUILDING WIRE. Provide NRTL listed, insulated throat, snap-in steel box connectors for Type MC cable. WIRING CONNECTORS Split Bolt Connectors: Not acceptable. Solderless Pressure Connectors: High copper alloy terminal. May be used only for cable termination to equipment pads or terminals. Not approved for splicing. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cable 26 05 19 - 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Spring Wire Connectors: Solderless spring type pressure connector with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps. Use for conductor sizes 10 AWG and smaller. All wire connectors used in underground or exterior pull boxes shall be gel filled twist connectors or a connector designed for damp and wet locations. Mechanical Connectors: Bolted type tin-plated; high conductivity copper alloy; spacer between conductors; beveled cable entrances. Compression (crimp) Connectors: Long barrel; seamless, tin-plated electrolytic copper tubing; internally beveled barrel ends. Connector shall be clearly marked with the wire size and type and proper number and location of crimps. – EXECUTION GENERAL WIRING METHODS All wire and cable shall be installed in conduit. Do not use wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. All conductors shall be sized to prevent excessive voltage drop at rated circuit ampacity. As a minimum use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 100 feet (30 m), and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet (61 m). Make conductor lengths for parallel conductors equal. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. No conductor less than 10 AWG shall be installed in exterior underground conduit. Identify ALL low voltage, 600v and lower, wire per section 26 05 53. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. Aluminum conductors may be substituted for feeders, 100 amps or larger. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use Listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires and for other conditions when necessary. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. Place all conductors of a given circuit (this includes phase wires, neutral (if any), and ground conductor) in the same raceway. If parallel phase and/or neutral wires are used, then place an equal number of phase and neutral conductors in same raceway or cable. METAL CLAD CABLE INS TALLATION Install Type MC cable according to NECA 120, Standard for installing and Maintaining Armored Cable (Type AC) and Metal Clad Cable (Type MC) (ANSI), the NEC and requirements in this Section. Route Type MC cable to meet project conditions. Type MC cable is not permitted above ceilings and shall be used horizontally concealed in walls only. Use Type MC cable for 15- and 20-ampere branch circuit wiring beyond the first outlet or junction box; however, use conduit for the “homerun” from the first outlet or junction box to the branch circuit panelboard. Use Type MC cable in interior, dry locations that area classified by the International Building Code as “Business Group B” occupancy where they will be concealed in dry-wall partitions, in equipment enclosures or below raised floors. Install and support Type MC cable as required in Article 330 of the NEC. Use NRTL listed spring steel Type MC cable supports to support Type MC cable; do not use wire or plastic zip-ties to support Type MC cable. WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS Splice only in accessible junction boxes. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cable 26 05 19 - 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Wire splices and taps shall be made firm, and adequate to carry the full current rating of the respective wire without soldering and without perceptible temperature rise. All splices shall be so made that they have an electrical resistance not in excess of two feet (600 mm) of the conductor. Use solderless spring type pressure connectors with insulating covers for wire splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. Use mechanical or compression connectors for wire splices and taps, 8 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. At all splices and terminations, leave tails long enough to cut splice out and completely re- splice. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 26 05 04. Additional testing as follows shall be performed if aluminum conductors are used: Equipment terminated with aluminum conductors shall be tested with a thermal imager and recorded. Conductors shall be closely checked for loose or poor connections, and for signs of overheating or corrosion. Test procedures shall meet NETA guidelines. Test results and report shall be provided to the engineer. Contractor shall correct all deficiencies reported in the test report. WIRE COLOR General: 1. For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller - Wire shall be colored as indicated below. 2. For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger – Use colored wire, or identify wire with colored tape at all terminals, splices and boxes. Colors to be as indicated below. 3. In existing facilities, use existing color scheme. 4. All switch legs shall be the same color as their associated circuit. Traveler conductors run between 3 and 4 way switches shall be colored pink or purple. Neutral Conductors: White for 120/208V systems and Grey for 277/480V systems. Where there are two or more neutrals in one conduit, each shall be individually identified with a different stripe. Ground Conductors: Green for 6 AWG and smaller. For 4 AWG and larger, identify with green colored wire, or with green tape at both ends and at all access points, such as panelboards, motor starters, disconnects and junction boxes. BRANCH CIRCUITS The use of single-phase, multi-wire branch circuits with a common neutral are not permitted. All branch circuits shall be furnished and installed with an individual accompanying neutral, sized the same as the phase conductors. END OF SECTION FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 26 05 23 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES – GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK The work under this section includes furnishing and installing required remote control and signal cabling. SECTION INCLUDES General Manufacturers Remote Control and Signal Cable Wiring Connectors RELATED WORK Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical Section 26 05 33 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 51 13 – Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Ballasts SUBMITTALS Submit product data: Provide for each cable assembly type. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. REFERENCE STANDARDS NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code PROJECT CONDITIONS Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. Conductor sizes are based on copper. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. – PRODUCTS GENERAL All wire shall be new, delivered to the site in unbroken cartons and shall be less than one year old out of manufacturer's stock. All conductors shall be copper. Insulation shall have a 600 volt rating. All conductors must be suitable for the application intended. Conductors #12 and smaller may be solid or stranded with the following requirements or exceptions: All conductors terminated with crimp type devices must be stranded. Stranded conductors may only be terminated with UL OR ETL Listed type terminations or methods: e.g. stranded conductors may not be wrapped around a terminal screw but must be terminated with a crimp type device or must be terminated in an approved back wired method. MANUFACTURERS FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company 3. General Cable Corporation 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company 5. Southwire Company 6. Houston Wire & Cable REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE All other systems cabling shall meet the requirements of NEC Article 725 and the following: Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: 600 volt insulation, individual conductors twisted together, and covered with an overall PVC jacket. Cable shall be Listed, temperature rated, and plenum or non-plenum rated for the application as required in the National Electrical Code. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits shall be constructed, Listed, temperature rated, and plenum or non-plenum rated for the application as required in the NEC Article 725. WIRING CONNECTORS Split Bolt Connectors: Not acceptable. Spring Wire Connectors: Solderless spring type pressure connector with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps. Use for conductor sizes 10 AWG and smaller. All wire connectors used in underground or exterior pull boxes shall be gel filled twist connectors or a connector designed for damp and wet locations. – EXECUTION GENERAL WIRING METHODS Low voltage control and signal cables shall be installed in conduit. However, they may be installed without conduit above accessible ceilings if the cable meets NEC requirements for the application, unless specified to be in conduit in other sections of the specifications. See requirements for free-air cabling installation below. Control cables for controlling HVAC and lighting equipment connected to emergency power shall be routed in raceway. Do not use wire smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring greater than 60 volts, or 18 AWG for voltages less than 60 volts, all sizes subject to NEC 725 requirements. Splice only in junction boxes. Identify wire per section 26 05 53. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, and equipment. WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use Listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling conditions when necessary. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. FREE-AIR CABLE INSTALLATION When permitted in exposed ceiling areas, ‘Free-Air’ wiring runs shall avoid areas of high traffic (i.e. aisle way), shall be run as close as possible to outlining walls and shall be a minimum of ten (10) feet above finished floor. Cabling shall be neatly run at right angles and be kept clear of other trades work. Cabling shall be supported at a maximum of 4-foot intervals utilizing ‘bridal-type’ mounting rings anchored to ceiling concrete, piping supports or structural steel beams. If cable sag at mid-span FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 23 - 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI exceeds 12-inches, another support shall be provided. Mounting rings shall be designed to maintain cables bend to larger than the minimum bed radius (typically 4 x cable diameter). Cabling shall not be attached to or supported by existing cabling, plumbing or steam piping, ductwork, suspended ceiling supports or electrical conduit. Additionally, cabling shall not be laid directly on the ceiling grid. To reduce or eliminate Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI), the following minimum separation distances for ‘Free-Air’ cabling installations shall be adhered to: 1. Twelve (12) inches from power lines of less than 5kV. 2. Thirty-nine (39) inches from power lines of 5kV or greater. 3. Eighteen (18) inches from lighting fixtures. 4. Thirty-nine (39) inches from transformers and motors. A coil of 2 feet in each cable shall be placed in the ceiling at each ‘free-air’ wired device. These coils shall be secured (wire tied) at the last cable support before the cable reaches the device and shall be coiled from 100% to 200% of the cable recommended minimum bend radius. All cable shall be free of tension at both ends. Nylon strain relief connectors shall be provided at each device and junction box where cables enter. In cases where the cable must bear some stress, Kellum type grips may be used to spread the strain over a longer length of cable. Cable manufacturers minimum bend radius shall be observed in all instances. Care should be taken in the use of cable ties to secure and anchor the station cabling. Ties should not be over tightened as to compress the cable jacket. No sharp burrs should remain where excess length of the cable tie has been cut. All exposed vertical cable extensions to devices located below the finished ceiling shall be in conduit. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS Splice only in accessible junction boxes. All splices shall be so made that they have an electrical resistance not in excess of two feet (600 mm) of the conductor. Use solderless spring type pressure connectors with insulating covers for wire splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. At all splices and terminations, leave tails long enough to cut splice out and completely re-splice. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 26 05 04. END OF SECTION Page Intentionally Left Blank FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK The work under this section includes equipment grounding conductors. SECTION INCLUDES Mechanical Connectors Wire RELATED WORK Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical SUBMITTALS Product Data: Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for preparation, installation and examination of exothermic connectors. REFERENCE STANDARDS NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. ANSI/IEEE 142 (Latest edition) - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. - PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Burnoy 2. Erico 3. Schieder Sq. D 4. Thomas Betts 5. Panduit 6. ILSCO. MECHANICAL CONNECTORS The mechanical connector bodies shall be manufactured from high strength, high conductivity cast copper alloy material. Bolts, nuts, washers and lockwashers shall be made of Silicon Bronze and supplied as a part of the connector body and shall be of the two bolt type. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26 - 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Split bolt connector types are NOT allowed. Exception: the use of split bolts is acceptable for grounding of wire-basket type cable tray, and for cable shields/straps of medium voltage cable. The connectors shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with the catalog number, conductor size and manufacturer. WIRE Material: Stranded copper (aluminum not permitted). Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size as shown on drawings, specifications or as required by NFPA 70, whichever is larger. - EXECUTION EXAMINATION Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. GENERAL Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Mechanical connections shall be accessible for inspection and checking. No insulation shall be installed over mechanical ground connections. Ground connection surfaces shall be cleaned and all connections shall be made so that it is impossible to move them. Attach grounds permanently before permanent building service is energized. All grounding electrode conductors shall be installed in PVC conduit, in exposed locations. Conductor Termination and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connection to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. LESS THAN 600 VOLT SYSTEM GROUNDING Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor within each raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, enclosure or bushing. Provide a ground wire from each device to the respective enclosure. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. END OF SECTION FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK The work under this section includes conduit and equipment supports, straps, clamps, steel channel, etc., and all required fastening hardware for supporting electrical work. SECTION INCLUDES Support, Anchorage And Attachment Components Manufacturers RELATE D WORK Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 26 05 23 – Control Voltage Electrical Power Cables Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices Section 26 51 13 -Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps and Ballasts SUBMITTALS Product Data: Provide data for support channel and equipment supports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code – Steel”. PERFORMANCE REQUIREM ENTS Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. COORDINATION Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports and roof penetrations as specified in Division 07 Section “Roof Accessories”. - PRODUCTS SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS Support Channel: Steel, Galvanized, Enameled or other corrosion resistant. Hardware: Corrosion resistant. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Minimum sized threaded rod for supports shall be 3/8” for trapezes and single conduits 1-1/4” and larger, and ¼” for single conduits 1” and smaller. Conduit clamps, straps, supports, etc., shall be steel or malleable iron. One-hole straps shall be heavy duty type. All straps shall have steel or malleable backing plates when rigid steel conduit is installed on the interior or exterior surface of any exterior building wall. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, (zinc-coated) (stainless) steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit 2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries 3. ERICO International Corporation 4. GS Metals Corp. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation 6. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 7. Wesanco, Inc. 8. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited 9. Seasafe, Inc. 10. Empire Tool & Manufacturing Co. 11. Hilti, Inc. 12. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a Division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 13. MKT Fastening, LLC 14. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, outlet, junction and pull boxes to building structure using pre-cast insert system, preset inserts, beam clamps, expansion anchors, or spring steel clips (interior metal stud walls only). Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction. If nail-in anchors are used, they must be removable type anchors. Powder-actuated fasteners and plastic wall anchors are not permitted. File and de-bur cut ends of support channel and spray paint with cold galvanized paint to prevent rusting. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, cable tray or conduit. Do not fasten to suspended ceiling grid system. Do not drill structural steel members unless approved by Engineer. Fabricate supports from galvanized structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. In wet locations, mechanical rooms and electrical rooms install free-standing electrical equipment on 3.5 inch (89 mm) concrete pads. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 - 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinet one inch (25 mm) off wall (7/8” Uni-strut or ¾” painted, fire-retardant plywood is acceptable). Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls. Furnish and install all supports as required to fasten all electrical components required for the project, including free standing supports required for those items remotely mounted from the building structure, catwalks, walkways etc. INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for site- fabricated metal supports. Cut, fit and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. PAINTING Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 (painting sections) (Section “High Performance Coating”) for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION Page Intentionally Left Blank FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS – GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK The work under this section includes conduits, fittings, boxes, surface raceways, multi-outlet assemblies, auxiliary gutters, and wall duct for electrical systems including wall and ceiling outlet boxes, and junction boxes. SECTION INCLUDES General Manufacturers Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings Conduit Supports Outlet Boxes Pull and Junction Boxes RELATED WORK Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices SUBMITTALS Surface Raceway System - submit product data and catalog sheets for all components. Boxes - provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's instructions. Product data for conduit, wireways, fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures or cabinets. QUALITY ASSU RANCE Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use. – PRODUCTS GENERAL All steel fittings and conduit bodies shall be galvanized. No cast metal, or split-gland type fittings permitted. Mogul-type condulets larger than 2 inch (50 mm) not permitted except as approved or detailed. All condulet covers must be fastened to the condulet body with screws and be of the same manufacture. Wireways, gutters and c-condulets shall not be used in lieu of pull boxes and condulets. All boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide free space for all conductors enclosed in the box and shall comply with NEC requirem ents. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose 5. Armorcast Products Company 6. Arnco Corporation 7. CANTEX inc 8. Carson Industries LLC 9. CDR Systems Corporation 10. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group 11. Christy Concrete Products 12. Condux International, Inc 13. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 14. EGS/Appleton Electric 15. ElecSYS, Inc 16. Electri-Flex Co. 17. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company 18. Hoffman 19. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division 20. Hubbell Incorporated; Quazite 21. Lamson & Sessions: Carlon Electrical Products 22. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex 23. Maverick Tube Corporation 24. NewBasis 25. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. 26. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal 27. RACO; a Hubbell Company 28. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division 29. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division 30. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company 31. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast 32. Thomas & Betts Corporation 33. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The) 34. Wheatland Tube Company 35. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS Conduit: Steel, galvanized tubing. ANSI C80.3 Fittings: All steel, set screw, concrete tight. No push-on or indenter types permitted. Conduit Bodies: All steel threaded conduit bodies. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS Conduit: steel, galvanized, spiral strip. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: All steel, galvanized, or malleable iron (except as allowed in specification 26 51 13). CONDUIT SUPPORTS See section 26 05 29. OUTLET BOXES Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes and Device Boxes: galvanized steel, with stamped knockouts: NEMA 0S1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 3/8 inch male fixture studs where required. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. Cast Boxes: Cast ferroalloy, or aluminum type deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs: NEMA FB1. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA 0S2. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA 0S1. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be minimum 4 inch square (100 mm) by 2 1/8th inches (54 mm) deep for use with 1 inch (25 mm) conduit and smaller. On conduit systems using 1 1/4 inch (31.75 mm) conduit or larger, pull and junction boxes shall be sized per NEC but not less than 4 11/16 inch square (117 mm). Sheet Metal Boxes: code gauge galvanized steel, screw covers, flanged and spot welded joints and corners. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger Than 12 Inches (300 mm) in any dimension shall have a hinged cover or a chain installed between box and cover. Box extensions and adjacent boxes within 48” of each other are not allowed for the purpose of creating more wire capacity. Junction boxes 6" x 6" or larger size shall be without stamped knock-outs. Wireways shall not be used in lieu of junction boxes. – EXECUTION CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT EMT is permitted to be used in sizes 4" (50 mm) and smaller for power and telecommunication systems. See CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE below for other limitations for EMT and other types of conduit. Size power conductor raceways for conductor type installed. Conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum except all homerun conduits shall be ¾”, or as specified elsewhere. Caution: Per the NEC, the allowable conductor ampacity is reduced when more than three current-carrying conductors are installed in a raceway. Contractor must take the NEC ampacity adjustment factors into account when sizing the raceway and wiring system. Size conduit for all other wiring, including but not limited to data, control, security, fire alarm, telecommunications, signal, video, etc. shall be sized per number of conductors pulled and their cross-section. 40% fill shall be maximum for all new conduit fills. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. Maintain minimum 6 inch (150 mm) clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating appliances. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized pipe straps, conduit racks (lay-in adjustable hangers), clevis hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack (lay-in adjustable hangers) constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent additional conduit. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Before conductors are pulled, remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during construction. Support and fasten metal conduit at a maximum of 8 feet (2.4 m) on center. Supports shall be independent of the installations of other trades, e.g. ceiling support wires, HVAC pipes, other conduits, etc., unless so approved or detailed. In general, all conduit shall be concealed except where noted on the drawings or approved by the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall verify with Architect/Engineer all surface conduit installations except in mechanical rooms. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Changes in direction shall be made with symmetrical bends, cast steel boxes, stamped metal boxes or cast steel conduit bodies. For indoor conduits, no continuous conduit run shall exceed 100 feet (30 meters) without a junction box. All conduits installed in exposed areas shall be installed with a box offset before entering box. CONDUIT INSTALLATION Cut conduit square; de-burr cut ends. Conduit shall not be fastened to the corrugated metal roof deck. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes. Use sealing locknuts or conduit hubs for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations. All conduit terminations (except for terminations into conduit bodies) shall use conduit hubs, or connectors with one locknut, or shall use double locknuts (one each side of box wall) and insulated bushing. Provide bushings for the ends of all conduit not terminated in box walls. Refer to Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems for grounding bushing requirements. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size unless sweep elbows are required. Conduit shall be bent according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Use suitable conduit caps or other approved seals to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) nylon pull string in empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples. Install expansion-deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints. Note: expansion-deflection joints are not required where conduit crosses building control joints if the control joint does not act as an expansion joint. Install expansion fitting in PVC conduit runs as recommended by the manufacturer. Avoid moisture traps where possible. Where moisture traps are unavoidable, provide junction boxes with drain fittings at conduit low points. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 26. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 53. CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE Conduit other than that specified below for specific applications shall not be used. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Electrical metallic tubing. Light fixtures: Direct box or conduit connection for surface mounted and recessed fixtures. Flexible metal conduit from a J-box for recessed lay-in light fixtures. Conduit size shall be 3/8" (10 mm) minimum diameter and six foot (1.8 M) maximum length. Conduit length shall allow movement of fixture for maintenance purposes. COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance. Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in. No outlet, junction, or pull boxes shall be located where it will be obstructed by other equipment, piping, lockers, benches, counters, etc. Boxes shall not be fastened to the metal roof deck. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to study drawings pertaining to other trades, to discuss location of outlets with workmen installing other piping and equipment and to fit all electrical outlets to job conditions. In case of any question or argument over the location of an outlet, the Contractor shall refer the matter to the Architect/Engineer and install outlet as instructed by the Architect/Engineer. The proper location of each outlet is considered a part of this contract and no additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for moving outlets which were improperly located. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Locate and install boxes to allow access to them. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinate locations and provide 18 inch (450 mm) by 24 inch (600 mm) access doors. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using approved materials and methods. OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide minimum 6 inch (150 mm) separation, except provide minimum 24 inch (600 mm) separation in acoustic-rated walls. Power: 1. Recessed (1/4” maximum) outlet boxes in masonry, concrete or tile construction shall be minimum 4 inch square, with device rings. Device covers shall be square-cut except rounded corner plaster rings are allowed in drywall applications. Angle cut plaster rings are not permitted. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. Low Voltage: 1. Recessed (1/4” maximum) outlet boxes in masonry, concrete or tile construction shall be minimum 4 11/16 inch square, 2-1/8” deep. Device covers shall be square-cut except rounded corner plaster rings are allowed in drywall applications. Angle cut plaster rings are not permitted. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes that are connected to two rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12 inches (300 mm) of box. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one device are mounted together; do not use sectional boxes. Provide non-metallic barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. Ceiling outlets shall be 4 inch square, minimum 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep except that concrete boxes and plates will be approved where applicable. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plans. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches (150 mm) of recessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. Provide cast ferroalloy or aluminum outlet boxes in exterior and wet locations. Surface wall outlets shall be 4 inch (100 mm) square with raised covers for one and two gang requirements. For three gang or larger requirements, use gang boxes with non-overlapping covers. PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings, in unfinished areas or furnish and install Owner approved access panels in non-accessible ceilings where boxes are installed. All boxes are to be readily-accessible. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit. LOW VOLTAGE COMMUNICATIONS CONDUIT SYSTEM Minimum size of conduit shall be 1" (one inch) for telecommunications (voice and data) including fiber optic installations, or where more than one type of cable or system is required to share a conduit. Minimum size of conduit shall be 3/4" for paging system, security access control and CCTV, nurse call and other low voltage systems such as alarms. Use 1/2-inch minimum flexible metallic conduit when installing raceway into door frames for security systems. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 6 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Conduit provided for overhead projectors, audio-visual floor boxes and other audio-visual locations shall be minimum 1-1/4" or as indicated on drawings. Conduits shall be sized for a maximum 40% fill ratio. Provide flush two-gang box with single gang plaster ring for each communications outlet or as noted on drawings. Minimum size back box shall be 4" x 4" or double gang extra deep, except where noted differently. Provide 2" x 4" or single gang plaster ring to reduce opening for standard data outlet. Size of plaster ring may be adjusted (to 4" x 4") as required by outlet quantity. Use only couplings and fittings designed specifically for type of conduit or raceway shown. Provide insulated bushings on each fitting and raceway end. Provide raceways in walls from each back box stubbed into nearest accessible ceiling, corridor or access floor toward cable trays or toward Telecommunications Room. Ensure accessibility after other trades systems installation by extending raceway where necessary to an accessible location or near a cable tray. Where back boxes are installed in laboratories or other areas where future access may be difficult, provide conduit out to nearest accessible hallway. Provide one conduit from each communications box. Horizontal conduit runs between wall boxes are not allowed. In areas where cable tray or j-hooks must cross an inaccessible ceiling, provide 4” EMT conduit in lieu of cable tray or j-hooks. For instance, where cables are supported by one 4” j- hook run prior to encountering an inaccessible ceiling, provide (1) 4” conduit to span the inaccessible area. Where 4"x12" cable tray is used, provide (4) 4" conduits to span the inaccessible area. Provide a 1/8 inch (3 mm) nylon pull string in each empty conduit longer than 60" to facilitate the installation of cables by the Owner or systems installers. Provide insulated bushings on exposed or cut end of every conduit. Conduit bends to be no less than 10 times the nom inal outside diameter of conduit. No conduit run shall be longer than 100 linear feet without a pull box. No conduit run shall have more than two (2) 90 degree bends or total of 180 degrees of bend (including all offsets) without a pull box. Pull boxes shall not be used in lieu of bends. Pull boxes shall be installed in straight section of conduit. Electrical LBs are not permitted unless manufactured for the use of communication cabling, having an internal bend radius appropriate for the cable size and application. Obtain engineer approval prior to installation. Provide conduit sleeves through walls as required by communications cable or as indicated on project documents. Where 1 to 4 communications cables are required, provide a 1" sleeve. For 5-20 cables are required, provide 2" sleeve. For 20-50 cables, provide 3" sleeve. Above 50 cables provide 4” sleeve. Sleeves shall extend min. 2" beyond wall on each side with plastic grommet or bushing to protect cable from abrasion. Conduit fill of sleeves may exceed 40%. All sleeves shall be fire stopped with UL listed system. Sleeves for cable access through walls or floors may not always be indicated on drawings. It is the contractor's responsibility to provide all sleeves in all locations as required by cable routing and as dictated by field conditions. Changes in a planned cable route during construction to reduce cable length or avoid obstructions shall not be a cause for change orders if additional sleeves are required. It is the contractor's responsibility to provide sleeves and support for communications cables for the entirety of the cable route, whether in conduit, cable tray or approved j-hooks (no bridle rings). The contractor shall review the reflected ceiling plans to determine the most appropriate method of support for any given area. The project documents may or may not indicate a method of support. If hard ceilings must be crossed, the contractor shall provide conduit through (above) the inaccessible areas into accessible areas, regardless whether the project documents indicate another method (or no method) of support. No change orders will be accepted to alter a means of support (for instance, a change from cable tray to conduit to cross an inaccessible ceiling or from cable tray to sleeves to shorten a cable route). FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 - 7 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI Provide UL listed fire stop material between sleeve and wall. Provide UL listed fire stop system (material) or cap in unused conduit sleeves. Provide fire stop material in open portions of sleeves after communications cable has been installed. Fire stop system shall match or exceed the fire rating of the floor or wall which is penetrated by conduit and cable. If the services of a separate fire stop contractor are not secured for the project, the electrical or communications contractor is responsible to provide all fire stop systems and materials in conduit and sleeves which are used by the contractor. This includes all unused conduits in the immediate vicinity whether they are used on this project or not, as long as they are intended for future use by similar low-voltage systems cabling along the same route. END OF SECTION Page Intentionally Left Blank FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES – GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK A. The work under this section includes wall switches, receptacles, wall dimmers, device plates and box cover. SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall Switches B. Receptacles C. Wall Dimmers D. Device Plates and Box Covers RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data showing model numbers, configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's instructions. B. For occupancy sensor shop drawings, the manufacturer’s actual layout of occupancy sensors and the wiring diagrams shall be provided. C. Test Reports OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. All operations and maintenance data shall comply with the submission and content requirements specified under section GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. – PRODUCTS WALL SWITCHES A. General: Heavy duty use toggle switch, rated 20 amperes and 120/277 volts AC. Switches shall be UL20 Listed and meet Federal Specification WS-896. All switches shall be heavy duty Specification Grade. B. Handle: Made of nylon or high impact resistant material. Standard color selected on submittal. C. All switches on emergency circuits shall have a red handle with matching red cover plate. D. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits: All switches shall be back and side wired, screw clamp type, suitable for solid or stranded wire up to #10 AWG, with separate green ground screw. Switches shall be Cooper Arrow-Hart 1221*, Hubbell 1221*, Leviton 1221-S*, Pass & Seymour CS20AC1- *, or approved equal. (* indicates color selection). E. Modular Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits: Switches shall be Cooper Arrow-Hart 1221*M, Hubbell SNAP1221*NA, Leviton M1221-*, Pass & Seymour PT20AC1-*, or approved equal. RECEPTACLES A. General Requirements: NEMA Type 5-20R, nylon or high impact resistant face. Receptacles shall be UL498 Listed and meet Federal Specification WC-596. All duplex receptacles shall be heavy duty Specification Grade, 20 amp rated. Standard color selected on submittal. B. Generally, all receptacles shall be duplex convenience type unless otherwise noted. C. Convenience and Straight-blade Receptacles: All receptacles shall be back and side wired, screw clamp type, suitable for solid or stranded wire up to #10 AWG, with a separate green ground screw. Receptacles shall be Cooper Arrow-Hart 5362*, Hubbell 5362*, Leviton 5362-S*, Pass & Seymour PS5362-*, or approved equal. (* indicates color selection). FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI WALL DIMMERS A. Wall Dimmers: Preset dimmer with locator light. Large paddle switch with a captive linear-slide dimmer for a standard designer wallplate opening. User adjustable High-end and Low-end trim settings. Lutron Diva Series, or approved equal. B. Standard color selected on submittal. C. Rating: Single pole, 120 – 277V, Type and capacity to accommodate load shown on Contract Drawings. D. LED 0-10V versions shall include required relay accessory for dimming with ON/OFF control. Locate relay above accessible ceiling. DEVICE PLATES AND BOX COVERS A. Decorative Cover Plate: 1. Smooth thermoplastic nylon. – EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on Contract Drawings. B. Drill opening for poke-through fitting installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. D. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface-mounted outlets. E. Install devices and wall plates flush and level. F. Receptacles shall have a bonding conductor from grounding terminal to the metal conduit system. Self-grounding receptacles using mounting screws as bonding means are not approved. G. Oversized or extra deep coverplates not acceptable. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet box when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. H. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including, painting, is complete. I. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NPFA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. J. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Wiring Devices 26 27 26 - 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudg4e covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductors tightly clockwise, 2/3 to ¾ of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch and sensor with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. The Engineer and Owner’s personnel reserve the right to be present at all tests. ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. B. Mark all conductors with the panel and circuit number serving the device with a machine generated label, at the device, and on the back of the device cover. TESTING A. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 3. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION Page Intentionally Left Blank FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts 26 51 13 - 1 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI SECTION 26 51 13 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES, LAMPS, AND B ALLASTS GENERAL SCOPE A. The work under this section includes interior luminaires and accessories, exit signs, lamps, and ballasts. Included are the following topics: RELATED WORK A. Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this Section. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. RoHS - Restriction of Hazardous Substances. Council of the European Union (EC) Directive 2002/95/EC on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. B. LM-79-08 (or latest) - IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products. C. LM-80-08 (or latest) - IES Approved Method for Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. D. TM-21-11 (or latest) - IES Technical Memorandum on Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources. E. NEMA SSL 1-2010 (or latest) - Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays, or Systems. DEFINITIONS A. Driver - the power supply used to power LED luminaires, modules, or arrays. B. L70, L70, or L70% - The reported life of an LED component or system to reach 70% lumen maintenance, or 70% of the LED’s original light output. This test is being developed by the IES and is currently described by TM-21-11. C. LED’s - Broadly defined as complete luminaire with light emitting diode (LED) packages, modules, light bars or arrays, complete with driver. D. LED luminaire failure - Negligible light output from more than 10 percent of the LED’s constitutes luminaire failure. SUBMITTALS A. Include outline drawings, lamp and ballast data, support points, weights, accessory information and performance data for each luminaire type. B. Luminaires with unique mounting elements such as illuminated corners or non-typical mounting installations such as recessed in a vertical wall, shall have a project specific factory shop drawing submitted. C. For each luminaire type, submit luminaire information including catalog cuts with highlighted catalog numbers and required accessories: • Luminaire: o Manufacturer and catalog number. o Type (identification) as indicated on the plans and schedule. • Ballast: o Manufacturer and catalog number. o Type (Programmed Start, etc.), Ballast Factor, THD, etc. o Quantity per luminaire. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. All operations and maintenance data shall comply with the submission and content requirements specified under section GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. EXTRA MATERIAL FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts 26 51 13 - 2 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI A. Provide three (3) percent of each lamp type, but not less than one (1) of each type. B. Provide one (1) of each type of LED module, light bar, or array (if applicable). If the LED’s are integrated into the luminaire and are not separate components, then extra LED’s are not required. C. Provide one (1) ballast of each type. This includes LED drivers. - PRODUCTS INTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES A. See the Luminaire Schedule on the drawings for type of luminaires and catalog numbers. Catalog numbers are shown on the drawings for quality and performance requirements only. Luminaires manufactured by others are equally acceptable provided they meet or exceed the performance of the indicated luminaires, and meet the intent of the design. B. Luminaire shall be certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (UL, ETL, or IEC). C. Provide all luminaires with quick-connect disconnecting means, similar to Thomas & Betts Sta- Kon. LED LUMINAIRES A. LED Luminaires shall meet all DesignLights Consortium® (DesignLights.org) Product Qualification Criteria. This does not require that the luminaire be listed on the DesignLights Consortium’s® Qualified Products List, but they must meet the Product Qualification Criteria. The technical requirements that the luminaire shall meet for each Application Category are: 1. Minimum Light Output. 2. Zonal Lumen Requirements. 3. Minimum Luminaire Efficacy. 4. Minimum CRI. 5. L70 Lumen Maintenance. 6. Minimum Luminaire Warranty of 5 years (not pro-rated) to include LED driver and all LED components. B. Color Temperature of 3000K-4100K for interior luminaires as listed in the Luminaire Schedule on the plans. C. Color Consistency: LED manufacturer shall use a maximum 3-step MacAdam Ellipse binning process to achieve consistent luminaire-to-luminaire color for interior luminaires. D. Luminaire shall be mercury-free, lead-free, and RoHS compliant. E. Luminaire shall comply with FCC 47 CFR part 15 non-consumer RFI/EMI standards. F. Light output of the LED system shall be measured using the absolute photometry method following IES LM-79 and IES LM-80 requirements and guidelines. G. Luminaire shall maintain 70% lumen output (L70) for a minimum of 50,000 hours. H. Driver shall have a rated life of 50,000 hours, minimum. I. Lumen output shall not depreciate more than 20% after 10,000 hours of use. J. Driver and LEDs shall be furnished from a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility. K. Luminaire Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be a minimum of 80 for interior luminaires, and a minimum of 70 for exterior luminaires. L. LED luminaire shall be thermally designed as to not exceed the maximum junction temperature of the LED for the ambient temperature of the location the luminaire is to be installed. Rated case temperature shall be suitable for operation in the ambient temperatures typically found for the intended installation. Exterior luminaires to operate in ambient temperatures of -20°F to 122°F (- 29°C to 50°C). M. LED driver shall have a minimum power factor (pf) of 0.9 and a maximum crest factor (cf) of 1.5 at full input power and across specified voltage range. N. Luminaire shall operate normally for input voltage fluctuations of plus or minus 10 percent. O. Luminaire shall have a maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 20% at full input power and across specified voltage range. P. Wiring connections to LED drivers shall utilize polarized quick-disconnects for field maintenance. Q. All connections to luminaires shall be reverse polarity protected and provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed or shorted during the installation process. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts 26 51 13 - 3 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI R. Fuse Protections: All luminaires shall have built-in fuse protection. All power supply outputs shall be either fuse protected or be Polymeric Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC)-protected as per Class 2 UL listing. S. All luminaires shall be provided with knockouts for conduit connections. T. The LED luminaire shall carry a limited 5-year warranty minimum for LED light engine(s)/board array, and driver(s). U. Provide all of the following data on submittals: 1. Delivered lumens 2. Input watts 3. Efficacy 4. Color rendering index. V. LED Luminaires used for Emergency Egress Lighting: 1. The failure of one LED shall not affect the operation of the remaining LEDs. W. Dimming: 1. LED driver shall be compatible with dimming controls where dimming is indicated on the plans. Dimmable drivers shall use Dimming Constant Current (DCC) or Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) operation. 2. LED luminaires shall dim to minimum levels as specified in the Luminaire Schedule on the plans without visible flicker or “popcorn effect”. “Popcorn effect” is defined as the luminaire being on a pre-set dimmed level (less than 100%), and going to 100% prior to returning to the pre-set level when power is returned to the luminaire. - EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Suspended linear type light fixtures, installed on suspended grid based ceiling systems, shall be mounted to junction boxes within the center of the ceiling tile. Mounting systems which clamp to the ceiling grid system are not permitted. Support junction box from ceiling grid system with caddy bracket or similar device. B. Verify ceiling types with Architectural plans or with existing ceilings. Verify specified luminaires are compatible with specified ceiling type(s) prior to ordering luminaires. C. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. D. Install suspended luminaires using aircraft cable, or pendants supported from swivel hangers. Heavy duty chain supports may be used where indicated on the luminaire schedule. Provide aircraft cable, pendants, or chain lengths required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. All aircraft cables or pendant supported luminaires shall have an independent support to structure at all cable or pendant support locations. When chain is used, tie-wrap the luminaire whip to the chain. E. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing. F. Provide independent support for all luminaires over 50 lbs. G. Locate ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. H. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prohibit movement. I. The Contractor shall install luminaire supports as required. Luminaire installations with luminaires supported only by insecure boxes will be rejected. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to support all luminaires adequately, providing extra steel work for the support of luminaires if required. Any components necessary for mounting luminaires shall be provided by the Contractor. No plastic, composition or wood type anchors shall be used. J. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. K. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. L. Install code required hardware to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place. M. Install wall mounted luminaires and exit signs at height as scheduled. Use pendants supported from swivel hangers in exposed ceiling/structure locations where necessary to mount exit signs at the specified height. FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts 26 51 13 - 4 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI N. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. O. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. P. Bond luminaires and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Q. Dimmed luminaire circuits shall have separate neutrals. R. 0-10VDC dimming control conductors shall be routed separately from line voltage conductors. Sharing a common raceway is not permitted due to 0-10VDC being considered Class II wiring system. S. Dimmed LED luminaires shall have a positive OFF, which requires turning off the circuit to the luminaire so that the luminaires don’t “glow” at the lowest dimmed setting. This shall be accomplished using a switch, relay, or some other means acceptable to A/E. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of Work. Clean paint splatters, dirt, and debris from installed luminaires. B. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated on Drawings or as directed by the A/E. C. Touch up luminaire finish at completion of work. INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Provide controls as indicated on the plans. All controls shall be compatible with the luminaires/ballasts/drivers being installed. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. ZERO-TO-10V DIMMING CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Zero-to-10V dimming control conductors are classified by the NEC as Class 2 conductors and shall be kept separate from line-voltage conductors per NEC 725.136(A). Matching the insulation rating of Conductors of Different Systems does not apply to Class 2 conductors per NEC 300.3(C)(1), Informational Note No.1. B. Wall box dimmers will typically have two conduits: One conduit for line-voltage power, and one conduit or conduit stub for the 0-10V control wiring. C. At each luminaire, separate openings (either manufactured knock-outs or punched openings) shall be used for the line-voltage power and the 0-10V wiring. The EC shall use a cable connector at the opening for the 0-10V wiring. Zero-to-10V conductors entering and within a luminaire enclosure shall maintain a minimum separation of 6 mm (0.25 in.) per NEC 725.136(D). D. Exposed 0-10V cables shall be installed in separate conduits from line-voltage conductors. E. The 0-10V cables may be routed in free air where concealed above accessible ceilings. Cables routed in free air shall observe the following installation requirements: 1. The 0-10V cables may be tie-wrapped to the outside of the luminaire power raceway where allowed by NEC 300.11(B)(2). Tie-wraps shall be UL listed for UV resistance. Care should be taken in the use of cable ties to secure and anchor the cabling. Ties shall not be over tightened as to compress the cable jacket. No sharp burrs shall remain where excess length of the cable tie has been cut. 2. Cabling shall be neatly run at right angles and be kept clear of other trades work. 3. Cabling shall be secured within twelve (12) inches of direction change or termination. 4. Cabling shall be supported at a maximum of 5-foot intervals utilizing “J-Hook” or “Bridle Ring” supports anchored to ceiling concrete, piping supports or structural steel beams. If cable sag at mid-span exceeds 12-inches, another support shall be provided. Cable supports shall be installed to maintain cable bend to larger than the minimum bend radius. 5. Cabling shall not be attached to or supported by existing cabling, plumbing or steam piping, ductwork, suspended ceiling supports or electrical or communications conduit. Do not place cable directly on the ceiling grid or attach cable in any manner to the ceiling grid wires. 6. All cables shall be free of tension at both ends. Nylon strain relief connectors shall be provided at each device and junction box where cables enter. In cases where the cable must FEH Design November 29, 2017 Project No: 2017307 Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts 26 51 13 - 5 Muskego Public Library Renovations Muskego, WI bear some stress, Kellum type grips may be used to spread the strain over a longer length of cable. 7. Cable manufacturer’s minimum bend radius shall be observed in all instances. 8. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. LUMINAIRE CONNECTIONS A. Provide direct box or conduit connections for surface mounted and recessed luminaires. Use a luminaire fixture whip from a J-box for recessed lay-in luminaires. Luminaire fixture whips shall be aluminum or steel AC Cable (Armored Cable) or Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC). Cable/Conduit whips shall be 3/8" (10 mm) minimum diameter and six foot (1.8 m) maximum length. Cable/conduit whip length shall allow movement of the luminaire for maintenance purposes. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used for connections to luminaires where the conduit is exposed in finished spaces. B. The flexible connectors shall be steel, galvanized, clamp type with locknut, snap-in type with locknut, or snap-in connector type, including those used on the master-satellite unit. TRAINING A. See Section 26 05 00 for general training requirements. END OF SECTION Page Intentionally Left Blank ARCHITECT FEH DESIGN W316 S525 CHRISTOPHER WAY DELAFIELD, WISCONSIN 53018 PH: (262)-968-2055 CONTACT INFORMATION ELECTRICAL HENNEMAN ENGINEERING INC. 1232 FOURIER DRIVE, SUITE 101 Madison, Wisconsin 53717 PH: (608)833-7000 FAX: (608)833-6996 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS ENGINEERING DOCUMENT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WISCONSIN. SIGNATURE SHEETS COVERED BY THIS SEAL: DATE ISSUED: MY LICENSE RENEWAL DATE IS, LICENSE NUMBER: 8 NOVEMBER 2017 TYSON K. GLIMME, PE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD E-, EL-, EP- SERIES JULY 31, 2018 41453-6 Si o u x C i t y , I A (7 1 2 ) 2 5 2 -38 8 9 De s M o i n e s , I A (5 1 5 ) 2 8 8 -20 0 0 ww w . FE H DE S I G N . C O M © FE H D E S I G N Sh e e t T i t l e Pr o j e c t T i t l e Date Issued Project Number Sheet In A s s o c i a t i o n W i t h De l a f i e l d , W I (2 6 2 ) 9 6 8 -20 5 5 Du b u q u e , I A (5 6 3 ) 5 8 3 -49 0 0 11/14/2017 4:20:40 PM C:\Users\emilyh\Documents\2017307 - Muskego Library Children's Area - Central - R17c_emilyh.rvt TS 2017307 11/14/2017 MU S K E G O L I B R A R Y C H I L D R E N ' S AR E A R E N O V A T I O N S7 3 W 1 6 6 6 3 J A N E S V I L L E MU S K E G O , W I 5 3 1 5 0 TI T L E S H E E T OW N E R SHEET INDEX MUSKEGO PUBLIC LIBRARY CHILDREN'S AREA RENOVATION S73W16663 W JANESVILLE ROAD MUSKEGO, WI 53150 INTERIOR ENTRANCE GENERAL AG1.1 GENERAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS AND LEGENDS ARCHITECTURAL A1.1 FLOOR PLAN AND DOOR SCHEDULE A5.1 BUILDING AND WALL SECTIONS A7.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A8.1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A9.1 FLOOR FINISH PLAN A10.1 FURNITURE LAYOUT ELECTRICAL E1.1 ELECTRICAL NOTES, SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND DEMOLITION PLAN E1.2 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLANSNOT FOR CONSTRUCTIONRev. No. Date I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE PORTION OF THIS TECHNICAL SUBMISSION DESCRIBED BELOW WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND RESPONSIBLE CHARGE. I AM A DULY REGISTERED ARCHITECT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WISCONSIN. Printed or typed name: Signature Date PAGES OR SHEETS COVERED BY THIS SEAL: License expires Date Issued GREGORY T. BAUM, A.I.A. AG-, A- SERIES 11/29/2017JULY 31, 2018 1. THESE CONSTRUCTION DRAWING SHEETS ARE TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PROJECT MANUAL. 2. WHEN DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL CONFLICT, BIDDER SHALL REQUEST WRITTEN CLARIFICATION FROM THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO BIDDING. IF CLARIFICATION IS NOT OBTAINED PRIOR TO BIDDING, THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE USED TO DETERMINE SCOPE OF BID: MATERIAL SIZE AND QUANTITY SHALL BE DETERMINED BY DRAWINGS, QUALITY IS DETERMINED BY PROJECT MANUAL. FINAL DETERMINATION SHALL BE BY THE ARCHITECT OR ENGINEER PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR FABRICATION. 3. ERRORS ARE TO BE REPORTED IMMEDIATELY TO THE ARCHITECT. 4. STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS GOVERN FOR SIZES, SPACING, AND CONNECTIONS OF ALL STRUCTURAL MATERIALS AND MEMBERS. IN THE CASE OF DISCREPANCIES, CONSULT WITH THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ARRANGE FOR THE PREMISES TO BE MAINTAINED IN AN ORDERLY MANNER THROUGHOUT THE COURSE OF THE JOB. MAINTAIN CLEANLINESS THROUGHOUT - DO NOT BLOCK EXITS, ENTRANCES, LOBBIES, CORRIDORS, ETC. PROTECT AREA FROM DAMAGE WHICH MAY OCCUR FROM DEMOLITION DUST, WATER, ETC. PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN TEMPORARY BARRICADES, CLOSURE WALLS, ETC. AS REQUIRED TO PROTECT THE PUBLIC DURING THE PERIOD OF CONSTRUCTION. DAMAGE OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER AT THE EXPENSE OF THE CONTRACTOR. 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVING ALL LEFTOVER MATERIALS, DEBRIS, TOOLS, AND EQUIPMENT INVOLVED AT THE CONCLUSION OF THE INSTALLATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LEAVE ALL AREAS CLEAN. ALL FIXTURES AND REUSABLE MATERIALS TO BE REMOVED ARE TO BE STORED OR DISPOSED OF AS PER OWNERS INSTRUCTIONS. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT WORKERS FROM INJURY OR EXPOSURE TO DANGEROUS MATERIALS DURING THE WORK BY THE CONTRACTOR, AS PER OSHA REGULATIONS AND FIRE-WATCH AS PER THE SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS IN THE PROJECT MANUAL. 8. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT / ENGINEER IF ADDITIONAL DIMENSIONS ARE REQUIRED OR DISCREPANCIES DISCOVERED. 9. ALL EXISTING FACILITY DIMENSIONS ARE TO BE VERIFIED ON SITE. 10. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS PRIOR TO SHOP DRAWING APPROVAL AND CONSTRUCTION. SEE PROJECT MANUAL WHERE FIELD VERIFICATION CANNOT BE OBTAINED PRIOR TO SHOP DRAWING APPROVAL. 11. DIMENSIONS ARE ACTUAL. DIMENSIONS FOR MASONRY WALLS ARE GIVEN FROM FACE TO FACE OF WALL. DIMENSIONS FOR STUD WALL IS TO FACE OF FINISH WALL OR TO CENTER OF WALL, NOT CENTER OF STUD. 12. ABBREVIATIONS AND MATERIAL REPRESENTATIONS ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS ARE SHOWN ON 'ABBREVIATIONS' AND 'MATERIAL LEGEND' TABLES - THIS SHEET. 13. SEE TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES THIS SHEET. 14. FOR ADDITIONAL PLAN INFORMATION REFER TO PARTIAL ENLARGED PLANS OR DETAILS AS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. 15. REFER TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ANY ADDITIONAL STEEL PIPE BOLLARDS REQUIRED. ARCHITECTURAL GENERAL NOTES MATERIAL LEGEND BATT INSULATION BRICK CONCRETE BLOCK GRANULAR FILL CONCRETE EARTH EIFS GYPSUM WALLBOARD METAL STUDS PLYWOOD RIGID INSULATION GROUT STEEL STONE WOOD 8" METAL STUD FRAMING GYP BOTH SIDES 9 1/4"09 29 00.D1 09 22 16.C2 09 22 16.C1 1 07 92 00.B4 3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING GYP ONE SIDE 09 29 00.D1 09 22 16.I4 09 22 16.D1 2 07 92 00.0109 22 16.C3 09 22 16.C4 09 22 16.C5 09 29 00.D1 STAGING AREA FOR DUMPSTER ONLY; MATERIAL STORAGE AND STAGING TO BE WITHIN CONSTRUCTION BOUNDARIES EXISTING LIBRARY BUILDING PROJECT SIGN 8'-0" 4'-0" FEH DESIGN .COM HENNEMAN ENGINEERING, INC. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR COMPANY NAME GENERAL CONTRACTOR MUSKEGO PUBLIC LIBRARY CONSULTANT LOGOS FEH WEBSITE- BACKGROUND COLOR: PURPLE PANTONE: 2587U RGB: R149-G179-B182 CMYK: C45-M64-Y0-K0 9" 2'-4" 11" 3'-1" 9" 2" BACKGROUND COLOR: DARK GRAY PANTONE: 432U RGB: R105-G108-B113 CMYK: C61-M50-Y45-K15 WHITE COLOR: LIGHT GRAY PANTONE: 428U RGB: R173-G179-B182 CMYK: C33-M24-Y23-K0 COLOR: DARK GRAY PANTONE: 432U RGB: R105-G108-B113 CMYK: C61-M50-Y45-K15 COLOR: LIGHT GRAY PANTONE: 428U RGB: R173-G179-B182 CMYK: C33-M24-Y23-K0 2'-6"5'-6" 62.00° 56 . 0 0 ° 2'-0 3/4" TEXT: 2" FONT: APEX SANS- MEDIUM TEXT: 1 1/2" FONT: APEX SANS 56 . 0 0 ° CODE USED: BUILDING GROSS AREA: OCCUPANCY: OCCUPANCY LOAD: CONSTRUCTION TYPE: ALLOWABLE AREA: FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM: REQUIRED RATINGS: EXISITNG BUILDING CODE PROVISIONS: 2009 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC) AS EDITED BY THE WISCONSIN ADMINISTRATIVE CODE 2009 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE (IFC) CURRENT NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) STANDARDS AS REFERENCED BY THE INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE 2009 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE (UPC) USING 2009 IPC TABLE 403.1 2009 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE (IMC) NFPA 54, NATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE, 2009 EDITION; THE PROVISIONS OF 661—CHAPTER 226; AND THE STATE PLUMBING CODE 2011 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE (NFPA 70) 2009 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE (IECC) 2009 INTERNATIONAL EXISTING BUILDING CODE (IEBC) 2010 AMERICAN WITH DISABILITIES ACT (ADA) MAIN LEVEL = 38,573 SQ.FT. MEZZANINE = 1,600 SQ.FT. TOTAL BUILDING = 40,173 SQ.FT. MODIFIED BUILDING AREA= 6198 SQ.FT. A-3: LIBRARY 76 (IN MODIFIED AREA) TYPE II-A PER 1998 BUILDING CODE NO BUILDING AREA ADDED AS PART OF THIS RENOVATION. EXISTING AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER DESIGNED TO NFPA-13 AND FIRE ALARM NONE LEVEL 2 ALTERATION NEW WORK TO MEET 2009 IBC CODE INFORMATION Occupants 0 OCCUPANT LOARD CALCULATED PER IBC2009 TABLE 1004.1.2 BUILDING CODE PLAN LEGEND: NO N - F I C TIO N 10 7 JUV E N I L E 10 6 DI S C O V E R Y AR E A 10 5 SEA TI N G 10 3 PA T H 10 0 FIC T I O N 10 1 M A K E R SP A C E 10 2 CL A S S R O O M 10 4 ST O R A G E E0 0 3 O F F I C E E0 0 4 ST O R A G E E0 0 2 Occupants 5 Occupants 5 Occupants 5 Occupants 3 Occupants 46 Occupants 7 Occupants 5 39 37 EXST. FEC Si o u x C i t y , I A (7 1 2 ) 2 5 2 -38 8 9 De s M o i n e s , I A (5 1 5 ) 2 8 8 -20 0 0 ww w . FE H DE S I G N . C O M © FE H D E S I G N Sh e e t T i t l e Pr o j e c t T i t l e Date Issued Project Number Sheet In A s s o c i a t i o n W i t h De l a f i e l d , W I (2 6 2 ) 9 6 8 -20 5 5 Du b u q u e , I A (5 6 3 ) 5 8 3 -49 0 0 11/14/2017 4:20:37 PM C:\Users\emilyh\Documents\2017307 - Muskego Library Children's Area - Central - R17c_emilyh.rvt AG1.1 2017307 11/14/2017 MU S K E G O L I B R A R Y C H I L D R E N ' S AR E A R E N O V A T I O N S7 3 W 1 6 6 6 3 J A N E S V I L L E MU S K E G O , W I 5 3 1 5 0 GE N E R A L N O T E S , A B B R E V I A T I O N S A N D LE G E N D S OW N E R A AB ANCHOR BOLT A/C AIR CONDITIONING ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ADA AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT ADJ ADJACENT AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AGG AGGREGATE AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT ALT ALTERNATE AL ALUMINUM ANC ANCHOR ANOD ANODIZED ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE APC ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APPROX APPROXIMATELY ARCH ARCHITECT AS REQ'D AS REQUIRED ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS ATTEN ATTENUATION B BD BOARD BIT BITUMINOUS BLDG BUILDING BLK BLOCK BLKG BLOCKING BM BEAM BN BULLNOSE BO BOTTOM OF BOC BOTTOM OF CONCRETE BOT BOTTOM BRG BEARING BUR BUILT-UP ROOFING C CAB CABINET CB CEMENT BOARD CFCI CONTRACTOR FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED CG CORNER GUARD CH BD CHALK BOARD CI CAST IRON CIP CAST-IN-PLACE CJ CONTROL JOINT CLG CEILING CLR CLEAR CMT CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CNTR COUNTER CO CLEAN OUT COL COLUMN CONC CONCRETE CONST CONSTRUCTION CONT CONTINUOUS COORD COORDINATE CORR CORRIDOR CP COMPOSITE PANEL CPT CARPET CS CONCRETE SEALED CSK COUNTERSINK CT CERAMIC TILE CTR CENTER, CENTERED CUH CABINET UNIT HEATER CW CURTAIN WALL D DBL DOUBLE DEMO DEMOLITION DEPT DEPARTMENT DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIA DIAMETER DIAG DIAGONAL DIM DIMENSION DISP DISPENSER DN DOWN DR DOOR DS DOWNSPOUT DTL DETAIL DW DISHWASHER DWG DRAWING DWL DOWEL E (E) EXISTING EA EACH EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EIFS EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM EJ EXPANSION JOINT ELEV ELEVATION ELEC ELECTRICAL EMERG EMERGENCY ENAM ENAMEL ENCL ENCLOSURE EQ EQUAL EQUIP EQUIPMENT EVTR ELEVATOR EXH EXHAUST EXST EXISTING EXP EXPOSED EXT EXTERIOR F FA FIRE ALARM FCU FAN COIL UNIT FD FLOOR DRAIN FDN FOUNDATION FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FF FACTORY FINISH FHC FIRE HOSE CABINET FHMS FLAT HEAD MACHINE SCREW FIN FINISH FIXT FIXTURE FLASH FLASHING FLEX FLEXIBLE FLUOR FLUORESCENT FLR FLOOR FOF FACE OF FINISH FR FRAME FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER FT FOOT FTG FOOTING FURR FURRING F.V. FIELD VERIFY Q QT QUARRY TILE R R, RAD RADIUS RA RETURN AIR RB RUBBER BASE RCP REFLECTED CEILING PLAN RD ROOF DRAIN REBAR REINFORCING BAR REC RECEPTACLE REF REFRIGERATOR REFL REFLECTED REFR REFERENCE, REFER REINF REINFORCING REQ'D REQUIRED RESIL RESILIENT RH RANGE HOOD RJ REVEAL JOINT RM ROOM RND ROUND RO ROUGH OPENING RTU ROOF TOP UNIT RV ROOF VENT S SA SUPPLY AIR SB SPLASH BLOCK SC SOLID CORE SCHED SCHEDULE SD SOAP DISPENSER SECT SECTION SH V SHEET VINYL SHR SHOWER SHT SHEET SHTG SHEETING SIM SIMILAR SQ SQUARE SS STAINLESS STEEL STD STANDARD STL STEEL STN STAIN STOR STORAGE STRUC STRUCTURAL SURF SURFACE SUSP SUSPENDED SYM SYMMETRICAL T T TEMPERED T & G TONGUE & GROOVE TB TACK BOARD TEL TELEPHONE TELECOM TELECOMMUNICATIONS TERR TERRAZZO TF TOP FLANGE THRU THROUGH TO TOP OF TOB TOP OF BEAM TOC TOP OF CONCRETE TOF TOP OF FOOTING TOS TOP OF STEEL TPD TOILET PAPER DISPENSER TRN TRANSPARENT TS TUBE STEEL T'STAT THERMOSTAT TV TELEVISION TYP TYPICAL U UNF UNIFORM UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED UPS UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY UR URINAL V V VOLTS VAV VARIABLE AIR SUPPLY VOLUME VB VINYL BASE VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VER VERIFY VERT VERTICAL VEST VESTIBULE VSF VINYL SHEET FLOORING VTR VENT THROUGH ROOF VWC VINYL WALL COVERING W W WATTS W/ WITH W/O WITHOUT WC WATER CLOSET WD WOOD WH WATER HEATER WP WATERPROOF WR WATER RESISTANT WT WEIGHT WW WINDOW WALL WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC G G, GND GROUND GA GAUGE GALV GALVANIZED GB GYPSUM BOARD GB GRAB BAR GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GHM GALVANIZED HOLLOW METAL GL GLASS GWB GYPSUM WALL BOARD GYP GYPSUM GYP BD GYPSUM BOARD H HB HOSE BIB HC HOLLOW CORE HDWD HARDWOOD HDWR HARDWARE HM HOLLOW METAL HORIZ HORIZONTAL HR HOUR HSS HOLLOW STRUCTURAL STEEL HT HEIGHT HTG HEATING HTR HEATER HVAC HEATING, VENTILATION, & AIR CONDITIONING HW HOT WATER I ID INSIDE DIAMETER IG INSULATED GLASS IGHM INSULATED GALVANIZED HOLLOW METAL IN INCH INC INCANDESCENT INSUL INSULATED, INSULATION, INSULATING INT INTERIOR J JAN JANITOR JB JUNCTION BOX JST JOIST JT JOINT L LAM LAMINATE LAV LAVATORY LGMF LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL LTG LIGHTING LVL LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER LVR LOUVER M MACH MACHINE MAH MAXIMUM ATTAINABLE HEIGHT MAN MANUAL MANUF MANUFACTURER MAX MAXIMUM MB MARKER BOARD MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MECH MECHANICAL MEMB MEMBRANE MEZZ MEZZANINE MFG MANUFACTURER MH MANHOLE MIL MILLIMETER MIN MINIMUM MISC MISCELLANEOUS MO MASONRY OPENING MRGB MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD MTC EMPTY CONDUIT MTD MOUNTED MTL METAL MUL MULLION N (N) NEW N/A NOT APPLICABLE NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NOM NOMINAL NTS NOT TO SCALE NUM NUMBER O OC ON CENTER OD OVERFLOW DRAIN, OUTSIDE DIAMETER OFCI OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED OFOI OWNER FURNISHED, OWNER INSTALLED OH OVERHEAD OPNG OPENING OPP OPPOSITE OTS OPEN TO STRUCTURE P P BD PARTICLE BOARD PA PUBLIC ADDRESS PART PARTIAL PC PRE-CAST PCLN PORCELAIN PJ PANEL JOINT PL PROPERTY LINE PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE PLAS PLASTER PLT PLATE PLYWD PLYWOOD PNL PANEL PNT PAINT PR PAIR PREFIN PREFINISHED PRI PRIMARY PSF POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT PSI POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH PT POINT PTN PARTITION PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PWR POWER PR E L I M I N A R Y NO T F O R C O N S T R U C T I O N ABBREVIATIONS: ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING LIST, SOME DESIGNATIONS MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE Rev. No. Date SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" WALL TYPES NOT TO SCALE1LIBRARY SITE SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 PROJECT SIGN ELEVATION OCCUPANCY LOAD SCHEDULE NUMBER NAME FUNCTION OF SPACE AREA OCCUPANT LOAD IN TAG 100 PATH 425 SF 101 FICTION Library - 300 g 1284 SF 5 102 MAKER SPACE Education shops - 50 net 199 SF 3 103 SEATING Library - 50 net 326 SF 7 104 CLASSROOM Education classrooms - 20 net 919 SF 46 105 DISCOVERY AREA Library - 50 net 247 SF 5 106 JUVENILE Library - 50 net 1369 SF 5 107 NON-FICTION Library - 300 g 1429 SF 5 6198 SF 76 SCALE: 1" = 10'-0"2 BUILDING CODE PLAN - MAIN FLOOR 5 6 7 8 A B C D D.4 30'-0"30'-0"30'-0" 21 ' - 6 " 30 ' - 0 " 30 ' - 0 " 30 ' - 0 " 1 A5.1 _______ 2 A5.1 _______ A7.1 1 3 4 2 A7.1 9 10 A7.1 8 76 5 14 2 9 SF NO N - F I C TIO N 10 7 12 8 4 SF FIC T I O N 10 1 19 9 S F M A K E R SP A C E 10 2 91 9 S F CL A S S R O O M 10 4 24 7 S F DI S C O V E R Y AR E A 10 5 13 6 9 SF JUV E N I L E 10 6 42 5 S F PA T H 10 0 32 6 S F SEA TI N G 10 3 ST O R A G E E0 0 3 OF F I C E E0 0 4 ST O R A G E E0 0 2 M E D I A E0 0 1 _______ A1.1 8 _______ A1.1 4 _______ A1.1 10 _______ A1.1 5 4 A5.1 _______ 5 A5.1 _______ 10 4 . 2 E104.3 E003.1 E003.2 E004.1 E106.1 E0 0 2 . 1 _______ A1.1 10 Sim 2' - 0 1 / 4 " 2' - 0 1 / 4 " 28 ' - 1 1 1 / 2 " 28 ' - 7 1 / 8 " 28 ' - 1 0 1 / 2 " 14'-1 1/8" 10 ' - 6 1 / 8 " 16'-3 5/8" 104.1 _______ A1.1 6 10 1 / 8 " 1 1 1 1 1 _______ A1.1 9 11 52 13.B6 06 10 00.02 5 6 7 8 A B C D D.4 30'-0"30'-0"30'-0" 21 ' - 6 " 30 ' - 0 " 30 ' - 0 " 30 ' - 0 " 1' - 5 " 7' - 6 " 15 ' - 0 " 16'-2 5/8" 10 ' - 5 1 / 8 " 27'-6 1/2" 23 ' - 0 " 40'-0" 11" 10 " 1'-1 1/2" 1' - 1 1 / 2 " 02 41 19.F2 02 05 00.B8 02 41 19.B8 02 05 00.B8 02 41 19.F2 02 41 19.K2 02 05 00.G2 02 41 19.K2 02 41 19.K202 41 19.K2 02 41 19.K202 41 19.K2 02 05 00.G2 02 05 00.H2 02 41 19.K6 02 41 19.K202 41 19.K2 02 05 00.G2 02 05 00.F202 05 00.D1 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.B8 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.B8 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.G2 01 50 00.C2 01 50 00.C2 01 50 00.C2 02 41 19.C3 02 41 19.K2 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXAMINE SITE AND PORTIONS THEREOF TO ASCERTAIN AND CHECK ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS WHICH MAY AFFECT THE CONTRACTOR'S WORK. NO ALLOWANCE SHALL SUBSEQUENTLY BE MADE IN THE CONTRACTOR'S BEHALF FOR ANY EXPENSE TO WHICH THE CONTRACTOR MAY PAY DUE TO FAILURE OR NEGLECT ON ONE'S PART TO MAKE AN EXAMINATION. ANY CONFLICTS OR OMISSIONS, ETC. SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO BID SUBMISSION. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE EVERY EFFORT TO MINIMIZE DUST AND NOISE TO SURROUNDING PROPERTIES. SITE ACCESS SHALL BE LIMITED TO LOCATIONS SHOWN OR COORDINATIED WITH OWNER. 3. PROVIDE PLASTIC SHEETS (OR OTHER) FOR SAFETY AND PROTECTION FROM NOISE, DUST, ETC. OF OCCUPIED AREAS DURING CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION. PROVIDE RATED SEPARATION WHERE REQUIRED. 4. REMOVE PORTIONS OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS AND AS NECESSARY TO ACCOMMODATE THE NEW CONSTRUCTION AND REPLACE OR REPAIR AS NEEDED. 5. CONTRACTOR NOTE: SOME ANCILLARY/MINOR DEMOLITION AND PATCH/REPAIR MAY NOT BE SHOWN SPECIFICALLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND COORDINATE ALL ANCILLARY/MINOR W ORK REQUIRED TO COMPLETE NEW WORK AS DESIGNED. VERIFY CONDITIONS WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. 6. THE CONTRACTOR IS CAUTIONED THAT THIS PROJECT INVOLVES ALTERATION TO EXISTING FACILITIES. WORK WHICH IS REQUIRED TO BE PERFORMED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETELY OPERABLE INSTALLATION WITHIN THE SCOPE OF THE WORK, BUT WHICH IS NOT SPECIFICALLY INCLUDED ON THE PLANS, SHALL BE PERFORMED AS PART OF THE CONTRACT AND INCLUDED IN THE BID. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND CONSTRUCTION REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY OF ANY UTILITIES NOT IDENTIFIED FOUND IN CONSTRUCTION TO BE REMOVED. 8. ANY ITEMS DESCRIBED IN THESE DRAWINGS WITHOUT A "NEW" (N) OR "EXISTING" (E) DESIGNATION SHALL BE CONSIDERED NEW. 9. EXISTING BUILDING DIMENSIONS AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS MAY DIFFER PLUS OR MINUS; FIELD VERIFY. 10. WHERE INDICATED ON THE PLANS, ALIGN NEW WALLS WITH THE FACE OF EXISTING WALLS, COLUMNS AND FURRING FOR A FLUSH CONDITION. REPAIR, PATCH AND FINISH EXISTING WALLS WHICH ABUTS NEW WALLS. 11. WHERE NEW OPENINGS OCCUR AT EXISTING FRAMED WALLS, FIELD VERIFY EXISTING WALL THICKNESS. NEW WALL TO BE FURRED AS NEEDED TO MATCH EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION THICKNESS. 12. PREPARE SURFACES TO RECEIVE FINISHES. PATCH ALL EXISTING WORK ALTERED BY NEW WORK. ALL NEW AND PATCHED SURFACES SHALL BE SMOOTH, CONTINUOUSLY FREE OF IMPERFECTIONS AND IN PROPER CONDITION TO RECEIVE THE FINISH PER THE PROJECT MANUAL. IN PATCHED AREAS OR ANY AREA W HERE A FINISH IS NOT IDENTIFIED, THE AREA SHALL MATCH ADJACENT MATERIAL IN CONSTRUCTION, COLOR, TEXTURE, AND MANUFACTURE. ANY EXISTING WORK, I.E. FLOOR TILES, WALL TILES, ETC. WHICH ARE DAMAGED OR STAINED, ETC. SHALL BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED AS NECESSARY WITH NEW MATCHING MATERIAL. 13. FASTENER ATTACHMENTS ONTO EXISTING CONCRETE SURFACES: DO NOT DAMAGE EXISTING EMBEDDED REINFORCEMENT BARS.LOCATE EXISTING REINFORCEMENT BARS WITH A PACHOMETER PRIOR TO INSTALLING FASTENERS TO AVOID DAMAGING EXISTING REINFORCING BARS. 14. THE EXISTING OCCUPANTS INTEND TO OCCUPY A DESIGNATED PORTION OF THE BUILDING AND MAINTAIN OPERATIONS. SUBMIT A DEMOLITION PLAN INDICATING PROCEDURES AND OPERATIONAL SEQUENCING FOR REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT. 15. REPAIR ANY PENETRATIONS THROUGH EXISTING VAPOR BARRIER AS NECESSARY. ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION NOTES 1. ALL DOORS TO BE 1-3/4" THICK U.O.N. 2. ADJUST DOOR CLOSURES SO THAT MAXIMUM EFFORTS TO OPERATE DOORS SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 LBS. FOR INTERIOR DOORS (EXCEPT FIRE DOORS) AS PER STATE HANDICAP REQUIREMENTS. 3. RATED DOORS ARE TO BE SELF-CLOSING AND POSITIVE LATCHING. 4. ALL FIRE-RATED ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH APPROVED GASKETING MATERIAL INSTALLED TO PROVIDE A SEAL WHERE THE DOOR MEETS THE STOP ON BOTH SIDES AND AT THE TOP. 5. GLASS AND GLAZING SHALL COMPLY WITH THE CURRENT INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC) FOR HUMAN IMPACT. GLASS DOORS, ADJACENT PANELS, AND ALL GLAZED OPENINGS WITHIN 18" OF ADJACENT FLOOR SHALL BE OF GLASS APPROVED FOR IMPACT HAZARD. 6. DIMENSIONS FOR DOORS, WINDOWS, AND LOUVERS IN CONCRETE MASONRY AND PRECAST WALLS ARE NOMINAL FRAME SIZES. COORDINATE MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS WITH ACTUAL ROUGH OPENING DIMENSIONS. 7. WHERE METAL THRESHOLDS ARE CUT TO FIT DOOR JAMBS, PROVIDE SEALANT ALONG EDGES OF THRESHOLD AT JAMB. 8. MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS SHALL BE AVAILABLE ON THE JOB SITE FOR ALL RATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES. DOOR NOTES LEGEND AC ACRYLIC HM HALLOW METAL TG TEMPERED GLASS (DOOR & SIDELITE FRAME) EXIST EXISTING COMMENTS (1) DOOR SHALL BE SITE BUILT AS NOTED IN ELEVATIONS, SECTIONS, AND SPECIFICATIONS G1 G2 SE E S C H E D U L E SEE SCHED. 6"6" 3' - 0 " 1 0 " SEE SCHED. 1" 1'-8" 1'-4" 5' - 5 " SE E S C H E D . 1'-9 1/8" 3 1/2" 3'-6 1/4" 1'-9 1/8" TG AC AC 7'-9" HM-1 2" SCHED. SEE 2" 2" SE E S C H E D U L E D 2 1/4" EQ EQ 02 05 00.B8 08 41 13.02 08 41 13.06 D 08 41 13.02 09 68 13.01 02 05 00.G2 08 41 13.02 08 41 13.06 09 29 00.01 09 29 00.B1 09 22 16.01 09 22 16.02 6 02 05 00.B8 08 41 13.07 08 41 13.02 5 B 07 92 00.B4 09 22 16.C1 09 29 00.01 02 05 00.C4 09 22 16.C2 EQ EQ 09 22 16.C6 1" MIN. 02 05 00.B8 09 29 00.01 09 22 16.02 09 22 16.01 07 92 00.B4 02 05 00.B8 08 41 13.06 KEY PLANN 4 7/8" 5 3/4" 5/8" 3 5/8" 5/8" 08 11 13.02 07 92 00.A1 08 14 16.01 02 05 00.B8 2" 09 22 16.14 4 7/8" 5 3/4" 5/8" 3 5/8" 5/8" 08 11 13.02 07 92 00.A1 08 14 16.01 09 22 16.D6 02 05 00.B8 2" Si o u x C i t y , I A (7 1 2 ) 2 5 2 -38 8 9 De s M o i n e s , I A (5 1 5 ) 2 8 8 -20 0 0 ww w . FE H DE S I G N . C O M © FE H D E S I G N Sh e e t T i t l e Pr o j e c t T i t l e Date Issued Project Number Sheet In A s s o c i a t i o n W i t h KEYNOTES De l a f i e l d , W I (2 6 2 ) 9 6 8 -20 5 5 Du b u q u e , I A (5 6 3 ) 5 8 3 -49 0 0 11/14/2017 4:20:27 PM C: \ U s e r s \ e m i l y h \ D o c u m e n t s \ 2 0 1 7 3 0 7 - M u s k e g o L i b r a r y C h i l d r e n ' s A r e a - C e n t r a l - R 1 7 c _ e m i l y h . r v t A1.1 2017307 11/14/2017 MU S K E G O L I B R A R Y C H I L D R E N ' S AR E A R E N O V A T I O N S7 3 W 1 6 6 6 3 J A N E S V I L L E MU S K E G O , W I 5 3 1 5 0 FL O O R P L A N A N D D O O R S C H E D U L E OW N E R SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"2 CHILDREN'S AREA - ARCHITECTURAL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 CHILDREN'S AREA - DEMO Rev. No. Date 01 50 00.C2 TEMPORARY PERIMETER CONSTRUCTION LIMITS 02 05 00.B8 EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN 02 05 00.C4 EXISTING STEEL COLUMN TO REMAIN 02 05 00.D1 EXISTING WINDOW TO REMAIN 02 05 00.F2 EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN 02 05 00.G2 EXISTING CARPET TO REMAIN 02 05 00.H2 EXISTING CERAMIC TILE TO REMAIN 02 41 19.B8 WALL TO BE REMOVED 02 41 19.C3 SALVAGE EXISTING COAT HOOKS FOR USE IN NEW WORK 02 41 19.F2 DOOR AND FRAME TO BE REMOVED 02 41 19.K2 CARPET TO BE REMOVED 02 41 19.K6 CERAMIC TILE TO BE REMOVED 06 10 00.02 REINSTALL EXISTING COAT HOOKS 07 92 00.A1 SEALANT 07 92 00.B4 SEALANT EACH SIDE - CONTINUOUS 08 11 13.02 HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAME; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 08 14 16.01 DOOR; SEE DOOR SCHEDULE 08 41 13.02 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 08 41 13.06 FASTENERS BY WALL MANUFACTURER 08 41 13.07 FOAM WALL GASKET BY MANUFACTURER 09 22 16.01 METAL STUD 09 22 16.02 METAL STUD RUNNER 09 22 16.14 RUNNER WRAPPED DOUBLE METAL STUD HEADER 09 22 16.C1 8" METAL STUD; 800S162-43 18 GAUGE 16" O.C. 09 22 16.C2 CONT. 8" TRACK TOP AND BOTTOM; 18 GAUGE 09 22 16.C6 ANCHOR AS NECESSARY 09 22 16.D6 DBL. 3 5/8" METAL STUDS 09 29 00.01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00.B1 L CASING BEAD 09 68 13.01 TILE CARPETING; SEE FLOOR FINISH PLAN; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 11 52 13.B6 FUTURE SMART BOARD OFOI; PROVIDE BLOCKING AS NECESSARY DOOR SCHEDULE NUMBER DOOR FRAME HARDWARE SET COMMENTS SIZE DOOR TYPE DOOR MATERIAL GLAZING SIZE FRAME TYPE DETAILS WIDTH HEIGHT FRAME WIDTH FRAME HEIGHT HEAD JAMB 104.1 3'-0" 7'-0" G1 WD TG 3'-4" 7'-2" HM1 3/A1.1 7/A1.1 1 104.2 7'-9" 7'-0" G2 TYPE A MDF AC -2 1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" DOOR TYPE ELEVATIONS PR E L I M I N A R Y NO T F O R C O N S T R U C T I O N SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" HM FRAME ELEVATIONS SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4 GLASS WALL CONNECTION TO EXISTING COLUMN SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"5 GLASS WALL OPENING SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"6 GLASS WALL TO NEW STUD WALL SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"9 MAGNET WALL TO COLUMN SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"8 SEPERATING WALL CONNECTION SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"10 WALL TO EXISTING COLUMN CONNECTION SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 3 5/8" MTL STUD HEAD SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"7 3 5/8" MTL STUD JAMB MAIN FLOOR 100'-0" CEILING LEVEL 109'-0" A B C D D.4 2 A5.1 _______ 13 6 9 SF JUV E N I L E 10 6 14 2 9 SF NO N - F I C TIO N 10 7 42 5 S F PA T H 10 0 4 A5.1 _______ 5 A5.1 _______ _______ A5.1 7 104.2 104.1 E1 0 6 . 1 02 05 00.F2 02 05 00.B8 02 05 00.G3 02 05 00.G1 02 05 00.D102 05 00.G1 09 22 16.07 02 41 19.G1009 22 16.07 02 05 00.B8 6 A5.1 _______ 08 41 13.05 09 91 23.D1 26 51 00.01 11 52 13.B3 MAIN FLOOR 100'-0" CEILING LEVEL 109'-0" 5 6 7 81 A5.1 _______ NO N - F I C TIO N 10 7 SEA TI N G 10 3 FIC T I O N 10 1 CL A S S R O O M 10 4 _______ A5.1 3 E106.1 _______ A8.1 3 TYP. 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.G102 05 00.G3 02 05 00.F2 02 05 00.N1 02 05 00.N1 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.N1 02 05 00.G102 05 00.G1 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.B8 09 65 19.0309 68 13.01 MAIN FLOOR 100'-0" 5 5' - 6 " 09 29 00.B109 29 00.B1 09 22 16.C1 09 22 16.C2 09 29 00.0109 29 00.01 09 22 16.C2 09 65 13.B5 09 22 16.C4 09 22 16.C3 09 22 16.C5 09 22 16.C6 MAIN FLOOR 100'-0" CEILING LEVEL 109'-0" _______ A5.1 11 _______ A5.1 14 02 05 00.B8 02 05 00.G1 02 41 19.G10 02 41 19.G9 09 51 13.F2 09 29 00.01 09 68 13.0109 65 19.03 08 71 00.D5 MAIN FLOOR 100'-0" CEILING LEVEL 109'-0" 7 02 05 00.B8 09 68 13.01 _______ A5.1 10 02 05 00.G1 MAIN FLOOR 100'-0" CEILING LEVEL 109'-0" 6 _______ A5.1 9 _______ A5.1 13 08 41 13.05 02 05 00.B8 02 05 00.G3 02 05 00.G3 02 05 00.G209 68 13.01 CEILING LEVEL 109'-0" D 02 41 19.G9 09 51 13.D1 09 51 13.F2 09 29 00.01 09 29 00.H1 07 92 00.A1 02 05 00.G3 02 41 19.G10 09 22 16.A1 09 22 16.I1 09 29 00.01 09 29 00.H1 07 92 00.A1 07 92 00.01 09 22 16.I4 09 22 16.D1 02 05 00.B8 10 23 00.B1 2 07 26 00.A7 26 51 00.01 CEILING LEVEL 109'-0" D EQ EQ 3" 08 41 13.02 08 41 13.06 02 05 00.G3 02 05 00.B8 MAIN FLOOR 100'-0" D 02 05 00.G209 68 13.01 08 41 13.02 08 41 13.06 MAIN FLOOR 100'-0" 6 3" 09 68 13.01 02 05 00.G2 08 41 13.05 08 41 13.06 CEILING LEVEL 109'-0" 6 08 41 13.05 08 41 13.06 02 05 00.B8 3" 09 22 16.C7 09 29 00.01 09 29 00.H1 02 05 00.B8 08 84 00.01 08 84 00.02 06 40 23.B6 08 71 00.D3 08 71 00.D2 1 3/4" R 1/8" 09 29 00.H1 09 29 00.01 09 22 16.C8 TYP. 09 22 16.02 CEILING LEVEL 109'-0" 02 05 00.G1 09 51 13.03 02 41 19.G9 02 05 00.B8 09 22 16.07 02 41 19.G10 02 05 00.G1 6" M I N . 07 26 00.A7 23 00 00.17 09 22 16.D1 09 22 16.I4 09 29 00.H1 09 29 00.01 09 29 00.01 09 29 00.H1 09 29 00.01 1 1 / 2 " 09 29 00.01 02 41 19.G902 05 00.G1 02 05 00.B8 09 51 13.C3 09 51 13.F2 09 51 13.D1 KEY PLANN Si o u x C i t y , I A (7 1 2 ) 2 5 2 -38 8 9 De s M o i n e s , I A (5 1 5 ) 2 8 8 -20 0 0 ww w . FE H DE S I G N . C O M © FE H D E S I G N Sh e e t T i t l e Pr o j e c t T i t l e Date Issued Project Number Sheet In A s s o c i a t i o n W i t h KEYNOTES De l a f i e l d , W I (2 6 2 ) 9 6 8 -20 5 5 Du b u q u e , I A (5 6 3 ) 5 8 3 -49 0 0 11/14/2017 4:20:29 PM C: \ U s e r s \ e m i l y h \ D o c u m e n t s \ 2 0 1 7 3 0 7 - M u s k e g o L i b r a r y C h i l d r e n ' s A r e a - C e n t r a l - R 1 7 c _ e m i l y h . r v t A5.1 2017307 11/14/2017 MU S K E G O L I B R A R Y C H I L D R E N ' S AR E A R E N O V A T I O N S7 3 W 1 6 6 6 3 J A N E S V I L L E MU S K E G O , W I 5 3 1 5 0 BU I L D I N G A N D W A L L S E C T I O N S OW N E R PR E L I M I N A R Y NO T F O R C O N S T R U C T I O N SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"1 LONGITUDAL SECTION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"2 TRANSVERSE SECTION SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"3 SEPARATING WALL SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"4 CLASSROOM SLIDING DOOR SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"5 MAKER SPACE SECTION Rev. No. Date 02 05 00.B8 EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN 02 05 00.D1 EXISTING WINDOW TO REMAIN 02 05 00.F2 EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN 02 05 00.G1 EXISTING CEILING TILE & GRID TO REMAIN 02 05 00.G2 EXISTING CARPET TO REMAIN 02 05 00.G3 EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD CEILING TO REMAIN 02 05 00.N1 EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN 02 41 19.G9 REMOVE EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD CEILING AS NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM 02 41 19.G10 REMOVE EXISTING ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING AS NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM; SALVAGE EXISTING TILES AND GRID 06 40 23.B6 PAINT GRADE MDF; THICKNESS PER DRAWING 07 26 00.A7 REPAIR ANY PENETRATIONS THROUGH EXISTING VAPOR BARRIER AS NECESSARY 07 92 00.01 JOINT SEALANT 07 92 00.A1 SEALANT 08 41 13.02 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 08 41 13.05 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM WITH MAGNETIC PANELS; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 08 41 13.06 FASTENERS BY WALL MANUFACTURER 08 71 00.D2 BARN DOOR HARDWARE WALL TRACK BRACKET 08 71 00.D3 BARN DOOR HANGER HARDWARE 08 71 00.D5 DOOR STABILIZATION BRACKET 08 84 00.01 CLEAR ACRYLIC GLAZING 08 84 00.02 METAL STANDOFFS 09 22 16.02 METAL STUD RUNNER 09 22 16.07 GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT FRAMING SYSTEM 09 22 16.A1 1 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING 09 22 16.C1 8" METAL STUD; 800S162-43 18 GAUGE 16" O.C. 09 22 16.C2 CONT. 8" TRACK TOP AND BOTTOM; 18 GAUGE 09 22 16.C3 FASTEN STUD TO BOTTOM OF TRACK WITH #10 SELF DRILLING SCREW; AT EACH TRACK LEG 09 22 16.C4 FASTEN TRACK TO CONC. SLAB AT EACH STUD; (2) HILTI KWIK-CON II+ CONCRETE SCREW 1/4" DIAMETER WITH 1 3/4" NOMINAL EMBEDMENT 09 22 16.C5 INSTALL BRIDGING OR BLOCKING @ 4'-0" O.C. 09 22 16.C6 ANCHOR AS NECESSARY 09 22 16.C7 18 GAUGE RUNNER WRAPPED DOUBLE 800S162-43 METAL STUD HEADER 09 22 16.C8 20 GAUGE 3 5/8" METAL STUD AT JAMBS 09 22 16.D1 3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING 09 22 16.I1 1 5/8" METAL RUNNER 09 22 16.I4 3 5/8" METAL RUNNER 09 29 00.01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00.B1 L CASING BEAD 09 29 00.H1 CORNER BEAD 09 51 13.03 REUSE SALVAGED ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SYSTEM; SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 09 51 13.C3 WALL ANGLE FOR METAL CEILING GRID SYSTEM 09 51 13.D1 SUSPENSION WIRE 09 51 13.F2 SUSPENDED METAL CEILING GRID SYSTEM 09 65 13.B5 4" RESILIENT BASE 09 65 19.03 LUXURY VINYL TILE (LVT); SEE FLOOR FINISH PLAN; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 09 68 13.01 TILE CARPETING; SEE FLOOR FINISH PLAN; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23.D1 REMOVE EXISTING VINYL LETTERS AND REPAINT TO MATCH EXISTING COLOR 10 23 00.B1 FIELD APPLIED VINYL WALL GRAPHIC 11 52 13.B3 WALL MOUNTED FLAT SCREEN TV WITH WALL BRACKET BY OWNER; PROVIDE BLOCKING AS NECESSARY 23 00 00.17 REWORK EXISTING DUCTWORK AND LOUVERS AS NECESSARY 26 51 00.01 SEE ELECTRICAL FOR LIGHT FIXTURE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0"6 MAGNET WALL SECTION SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"7 ENTRY CEILING SECTION SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"8 GLASS WALL HEAD SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"12 GLASS WALL SILL SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"13 MAGNET WALL BASE SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"9 MAGNET WALL HEAD SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"14 SLIDING DOOR HEAD SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"10 MAKER SPACE CEILING TRANSITION SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"11 NEW CEILING WALL CONECTION 2 A5.1 _______4 A5.1 _______5 A5.1 _______ 104.2 104.1 02 05 00.G1 02 05 00.D1 09 22 16.07 09 22 16.07 09 68 13.02 08 71 00.D3 08 84 00.01 08 84 00.02 08 71 00.D4 06 40 23.B6 06 20 23.A4 09 65 13.01 7'-6" 7' - 0 " 09 22 16.C8 10 11 00 09 22 16.C9 JUV E N I L E 10 6 FIC T I O N 10 1 1 A5.1 _______7 A5.1 _______ 8 A5.1 _______ 12 A5.1 _______ 08 41 13.02 09 22 16.0802 05 00.G1 09 68 13.02 FIC T I O N 10 1 PA T H 10 0 NO N - F I C TIO N 10 7 2 A5.1 ______________ A8.1 3 TYP. 02 05 00.G109 22 16.08 09 68 13.02 09 65 13.01 1 1 13 A5.1 _______ FIC T I O N 10 1 NO N - F I C TIO N 10 7 JUV E N I L E 10 6 PA T H 10 0 1 A5.1 _______ E106.1 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.N1 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.F2 09 22 16.0802 05 00.G1 02 05 00.N1 09 68 13.02 09 65 13.01 NO N - F I C TIO N 10 7 PA T H 10 0 FIC T I O N 10 1 1 A5.1 _______7 A5.1 _______ 8 A5.1 _______ 12 A5.1 _______ 8 A5.1 _______ 12 A5.1 _______ 4 A1.1 5 A1.1 6 A1.1 6 A1.1 10 23 00.B1 08 41 13.02 10 14 23.1 02 05 00.B8 02 05 00.B8 02 05 00.B8 08 41 13.02 10 14 23.1 02 05 00.B8_______ A7.1 1109 91 23.D1 09 91 23.D1 4' - 0 " 9'-1 1/2" 3'-4 3/4"3'-4 3/4"3'-4 3/4"3'-4 3/4"2'-1 1/4"3'-3 1/2"2'-1 1/4" 8' - 7 1 / 8 " 8' - 7 1 / 8 " 9 A5.1 _______ 13 A5.1 _______ 9 A1.1 9 A1.1 6 A5.1 _______ _______ A5.1 7 08 41 13.05 02 05 00.B8 02 05 00.B8 02 05 00.B8 09 91 23.D1 10'-5 5/8" 8' - 7 1 / 8 " E003.1 E104.3 02 05 00.G1 09 65 19.04 09 65 13.01 CL A S S R O O M 10 4 2 A5.1 _______ 4 A5.1 _______ 104.2104.1 13'-11 1/8" 6"9" 6'-7" 02 05 00.N2 08 71 00.D2 08 71 00.D3 08 84 00.01 08 84 00.02 06 40 23.B6 08 71 00.D4 02 05 00.G1 09 65 19.04 06 20 23.A4 09 65 13.B5 09 22 16.C9 08 71 00.D5 CL A S S R O O M 10 4 02 05 00.N1 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.G1 09 65 19.04 09 65 13.01 CL A S S R O O M 10 4 2 A5.1 _______ 11 52 13.B6 02 05 00.D1 02 05 00.G1 09 65 19.04 09 65 13.B5 CL A S S R O O M 10 4 NOTE: EPS FILE OF GRAPHIC TO BE PROVIDED BY ARCHITECT 8' - 1 " 13'-7 1/8" 10 14 23.1 KEY PLANN 5'-0" A.F.F. (P a p e r i n s e r t - v i e w a b l e a r e a ) 2" 1 / 2 " 3" 6" 1 1 / 2 " 1 1 / 2 " Type 1 1/ 2 " Si o u x C i t y , I A (7 1 2 ) 2 5 2 -38 8 9 De s M o i n e s , I A (5 1 5 ) 2 8 8 -20 0 0 ww w . FE H DE S I G N . C O M © FE H D E S I G N Sh e e t T i t l e Pr o j e c t T i t l e Date Issued Project Number Sheet In A s s o c i a t i o n W i t h KEYNOTES De l a f i e l d , W I (2 6 2 ) 9 6 8 -20 5 5 Du b u q u e , I A (5 6 3 ) 5 8 3 -49 0 0 11/14/2017 4:20:32 PM C: \ U s e r s \ e m i l y h \ D o c u m e n t s \ 2 0 1 7 3 0 7 - M u s k e g o L i b r a r y C h i l d r e n ' s A r e a - C e n t r a l - R 1 7 c _ e m i l y h . r v t A7.1 2017307 11/14/2017 MU S K E G O L I B R A R Y C H I L D R E N ' S AR E A R E N O V A T I O N S7 3 W 1 6 6 6 3 J A N E S V I L L E MU S K E G O , W I 5 3 1 5 0 IN T E R I O R E L E V A T I O N S OW N E R PR E L I M I N A R Y NO T F O R C O N S T R U C T I O N SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"1 CHILDREN'S NORTH ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"2 CHILDREN'S EAST ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"4 CHILDREN'S SOUTH ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"3 CHILDREN'S WEST ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"9 ENTRY - EAST ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"10 ENTRY - NORTH ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"5 PROGRAM ROOM - NORTH ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"6 PROGRAM ROOM - EAST ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"8 PROGRAM ROOM - WEST ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"7 PROGRAM ROOM - SOUTH ELEVATION Rev. No. Date 02 05 00.B8 EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN 02 05 00.D1 EXISTING WINDOW TO REMAIN 02 05 00.F2 EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME TO REMAIN 02 05 00.G1 EXISTING CEILING TILE & GRID TO REMAIN 02 05 00.N1 EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN 02 05 00.N2 EXISTING WALL THERMOSTAT TO REMAIN 06 20 23.A4 1X4 WOOD TRIM 06 40 23.B6 PAINT GRADE MDF; THICKNESS PER DRAWING 08 41 13.02 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 08 41 13.05 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEM WITH MAGNETIC PANELS; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 08 71 00.D2 BARN DOOR HARDWARE WALL TRACK BRACKET 08 71 00.D3 BARN DOOR HANGER HARDWARE 08 71 00.D4 DOOR PULL 08 71 00.D5 DOOR STABILIZATION BRACKET 08 84 00.01 CLEAR ACRYLIC GLAZING 08 84 00.02 METAL STANDOFFS 09 22 16.07 GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT FRAMING SYSTEM 09 22 16.08 GYPSUM BOARD CEILING FRAMING SYSTEM; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 09 22 16.C8 20 GAUGE 3 5/8" METAL STUD AT JAMBS 09 22 16.C9 EXTEND NEW METAL STUD JAMBS TO STRUCTURE IF NECESSARY; REPAIR ANY PENETRATIONS THROUGH EXISTING VAPOR BARRIER 09 65 13.01 WALL BASE PER ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 09 65 13.B5 4" RESILIENT BASE 09 65 19.04 LUXURY VINYL TILE (LVT); SEE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 09 68 13.02 TILE CARPETING; SEE ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 09 91 23.D1 REMOVE EXISTING VINYL LETTERS AND REPAINT TO MATCH EXISTING COLOR 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 14 23.1 FIELD APPLIED GLASS FILM OVERLAY 10 23 00.B1 FIELD APPLIED VINYL WALL GRAPHIC 11 52 13.B6 FUTURE SMART BOARD OFOI; PROVIDE BLOCKING AS NECESSARY SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"11 ENTRY - EAST ELEVATION GLAZING GRAPHIC SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"12 PANEL SIGN ACOUSTIC TILE CEILING GYPSUM WALL BOARD SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER, SEE MECHANICAL RETURN AIR DIFFUSER, SEE MECHANICAL EXHAUST FAN, SEE MECHANICAL RADIANT PANEL, SEE MECHANICAL NOTES: * ALL WALLS TO STRUCTURE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. **AT FIRE RATED WALLS, SEAL TO STRUCTURE WITH FIRESAFING INSULATION / MASTIC AT GYP BOARD WALLS OR FIRE CAULK AT MASONRY WALLS. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN LEGEND LIGHT FIXTURES, SEE ELECTRICAL HEIGHT OF WALL SHALL BE ADJACENT CEILING HEIGHT +8"* CEILING HEIGHT (FROM ARCH. 100'-0") CONTROL JOINT RP CJ 110'-0" 1. CEILING GRID TO BE CENTERED EACH WAY WITHIN ROOMS AND ARE AS SHOWN ON THE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN, U.N.O. 2. ALL ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION DEVISED TO BE CENTERED WITHIN CEILING TILES, U.N.O. 3. REFER TO MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, AND FIRE PROTECTION (IF APPLICABLE) DRAWINGS FOR DUCTWORK, DEVICES, EQUIPMENT, & FIXTURES NOT SHOWN ON THE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS. COORDINATE LOCATION OF THESE ITEMS WITH THOSE SHOWN. 4. IN ROOMS AND/OR AREAS SCHEDULED TO HAVE EXPOSED STRUCTURE, ALL WALL MATERIALS AND FINISHES TO EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF OR FLOOR DECK, U.N.O. 5. CEMENT BOARD AND GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS TO BE INSTALLED ON SUSPENSION SYSTEM PER PROJECT MANUAL, U.N.O. 6. WALL GYPSUM BOARD SHALL EXTEND 6" MINIMUM ABOVE HIGHEST ADJACENT CEILING AT PARTITIONS NOT IDENTIFIED TO BE FULL-HEIGHT. BRACE TOP OF WALL TO STRUCTURE ABOVE WITH METAL FRAMING AT 48" O.C. EACH WAY. 7. GYPSUM BOARD VERTICAL RETURNS ON SOFFITS AND BULKHEADS TO EXTEND 6" MINIMUM ABOVE HIGHEST ADJACENT CEILING HEIGHT, U.N.O. 8. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS & PROJECT MANUAL FOR REQUIRED LOCATIONS OF ACCESS PANELS IN GYPSUM BOARD OR CEMENT BOARD CEILINGS NOT SHOWN ON THE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS. COORDINATE PANEL LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT. 9. PAINT ALL EXPOSED STEEL, CONDUIT, DUCTWORK, PIPING, ETC. IN ROOMS AND/OR AREAS NOTED OR SCHEDULED TO RECEIVED PAINTED FINISHES. 10. PROVIDE SUPPORT WIRE ABOVE THE CEILING AT 2'-0" O.C. ON CEILING GRID MEMBERS AROUND ALL CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTION SCREEN LOCATIONS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. 11. PROVIDE ESCUTCHEONS AT ALL CEILING PENETRATIONS, U.N.O. 12. HOLD GYPSUM BOARD AND/OR CEMENT BOARD 1/2" OFF STRUCTURE. 13. SEE TYPICAL WALL TYPES FOR TOP OF WALL CONSTRUCTION. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES 5 6 7 8 A B C D D.4 1 A5.1 _______ 2 A5.1 _______ 4 A5.1 _______ 5 A5.1 _______ 7 A5.1 _______ 3 A8.1 TYP. _______ 4 A8.1 _______ A.F.F. GYP 8'-7" A.F.F. GYP 8'-11" A.F.F. ACT-1 8'-6" R 8 '-8 3 /8 " 2'-9 1/8" 17'-0" 21'-9 1/4" 8'-2 3/4" 4'-1 1/8" 2'-11 5/8"12'-11 5/8" 1' - 0 " 3'-9 1/8" 10'-0" 13 ' - 8 1 / 2 " 1 6 ' - 3 1 / 2 " 23 00 00.17 23 00 00.17 21 00 00.03TYP TYP TYP 09 51 13.03 26 05 00.A2TYP 15'-2 5/8" 20'-4" CL 24 ' - 9 " 5 6 7 8 A B C D D.4 02 41 19.M5 02 41 19.G9 02 41 19.G10 02 41 19.G9TYP. TYP. 23 00 00.17TYP. 21 00 00.03TYP. 26 05 00.A2TYP. 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXAMINE SITE AND PORTIONS THEREOF TO ASCERTAIN AND CHECK ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS WHICH MAY AFFECT THE CONTRACTOR'S WORK. NO ALLOWANCE SHALL SUBSEQUENTLY BE MADE IN THE CONTRACTOR'S BEHALF FOR ANY EXPENSE TO WHICH THE CONTRACTOR MAY PAY DUE TO FAILURE OR NEGLECT ON ONE'S PART TO MAKE AN EXAMINATION. ANY CONFLICTS OR OMISSIONS, ETC. SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO BID SUBMISSION. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE EVERY EFFORT TO MINIMIZE DUST AND NOISE TO SURROUNDING PROPERTIES. SITE ACCESS SHALL BE LIMITED TO LOCATIONS SHOWN OR COORDINATIED WITH OWNER. 3. PROVIDE PLASTIC SHEETS (OR OTHER) FOR SAFETY AND PROTECTION FROM NOISE, DUST, ETC. OF OCCUPIED AREAS DURING CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION. PROVIDE RATED SEPARATION WHERE REQUIRED. 4. REMOVE PORTIONS OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS AND AS NECESSARY TO ACCOMMODATE THE NEW CONSTRUCTION AND REPLACE OR REPAIR AS NEEDED. 5. CONTRACTOR NOTE: SOME ANCILLARY/MINOR DEMOLITION AND PATCH/REPAIR MAY NOT BE SHOWN SPECIFICALLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND COORDINATE ALL ANCILLARY/MINOR W ORK REQUIRED TO COMPLETE NEW WORK AS DESIGNED. VERIFY CONDITIONS WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. 6. THE CONTRACTOR IS CAUTIONED THAT THIS PROJECT INVOLVES ALTERATION TO EXISTING FACILITIES. WORK WHICH IS REQUIRED TO BE PERFORMED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETELY OPERABLE INSTALLATION WITHIN THE SCOPE OF THE WORK, BUT WHICH IS NOT SPECIFICALLY INCLUDED ON THE PLANS, SHALL BE PERFORMED AS PART OF THE CONTRACT AND INCLUDED IN THE BID. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND CONSTRUCTION REPRESENTATIVE IMMEDIATELY OF ANY UTILITIES NOT IDENTIFIED FOUND IN CONSTRUCTION TO BE REMOVED. 8. ANY ITEMS DESCRIBED IN THESE DRAWINGS WITHOUT A "NEW" (N) OR "EXISTING" (E) DESIGNATION SHALL BE CONSIDERED NEW. 9. EXISTING BUILDING DIMENSIONS AS SHOWN ON THE PLANS MAY DIFFER PLUS OR MINUS; FIELD VERIFY. 10. WHERE INDICATED ON THE PLANS, ALIGN NEW WALLS WITH THE FACE OF EXISTING WALLS, COLUMNS AND FURRING FOR A FLUSH CONDITION. REPAIR, PATCH AND FINISH EXISTING WALLS WHICH ABUTS NEW WALLS. 11. WHERE NEW OPENINGS OCCUR AT EXISTING FRAMED WALLS, FIELD VERIFY EXISTING WALL THICKNESS. NEW WALL TO BE FURRED AS NEEDED TO MATCH EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION THICKNESS. 12. PREPARE SURFACES TO RECEIVE FINISHES. PATCH ALL EXISTING WORK ALTERED BY NEW WORK. ALL NEW AND PATCHED SURFACES SHALL BE SMOOTH, CONTINUOUSLY FREE OF IMPERFECTIONS AND IN PROPER CONDITION TO RECEIVE THE FINISH PER THE PROJECT MANUAL. IN PATCHED AREAS OR ANY AREA W HERE A FINISH IS NOT IDENTIFIED, THE AREA SHALL MATCH ADJACENT MATERIAL IN CONSTRUCTION, COLOR, TEXTURE, AND MANUFACTURE. ANY EXISTING WORK, I.E. FLOOR TILES, WALL TILES, ETC. WHICH ARE DAMAGED OR STAINED, ETC. SHALL BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED AS NECESSARY WITH NEW MATCHING MATERIAL. 13. FASTENER ATTACHMENTS ONTO EXISTING CONCRETE SURFACES: DO NOT DAMAGE EXISTING EMBEDDED REINFORCEMENT BARS.LOCATE EXISTING REINFORCEMENT BARS WITH A PACHOMETER PRIOR TO INSTALLING FASTENERS TO AVOID DAMAGING EXISTING REINFORCING BARS. 14. THE EXISTING OCCUPANTS INTEND TO OCCUPY A DESIGNATED PORTION OF THE BUILDING AND MAINTAIN OPERATIONS. SUBMIT A DEMOLITION PLAN INDICATING PROCEDURES AND OPERATIONAL SEQUENCING FOR REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT. 15. REPAIR ANY PENETRATIONS THROUGH EXISTING VAPOR BARRIER AS NECESSARY. ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION NOTES MIN. 6" MIN. 6" 09 51 13.01 09 51 13.C3 09 29 00.22 09 29 00.22 09 51 13.01 09 51 13.C3 02 05 00.B802 05 00.B802 05 00.B8 09 29 00.01 09 29 00.01 09 29 00.01 SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN VARIES REFLECT. CLG. PLAN VARIES - SEE METAL FRAMING TO ROOF DECK 07 26 00.A7 23 00 00.17 21 00 00.03 CEILING LEVEL 109'-0" 6" MIN. 6" MIN. 02 05 00.G1 09 51 13.C3 09 29 00.H1 09 29 00.01 09 22 16.D109 22 16.D109 22 16.D1 09 29 00.H1 09 29 00.01 09 29 00.01 09 29 00.01 09 22 16.D109 22 16.D109 22 16.D109 22 16.D1 09 29 00.01 09 29 00.H109 29 00.H1 09 29 00.0109 29 00.01 02 05 00.G1 07 26 00.A7 23 00 00.17 KEY PLANN Si o u x C i t y , I A (7 1 2 ) 2 5 2 -38 8 9 De s M o i n e s , I A (5 1 5 ) 2 8 8 -20 0 0 ww w . FE H DE S I G N . C O M © FE H D E S I G N Sh e e t T i t l e Pr o j e c t T i t l e Date Issued Project Number Sheet In A s s o c i a t i o n W i t h KEYNOTES De l a f i e l d , W I (2 6 2 ) 9 6 8 -20 5 5 Du b u q u e , I A (5 6 3 ) 5 8 3 -49 0 0 11/14/2017 4:20:35 PM C:\Users\emilyh\Documents\2017307 - Muskego Library Children's Area - Central - R17c_emilyh.rvt A8.1 2017307 11/14/2017 MU S K E G O L I B R A R Y C H I L D R E N ' S AR E A R E N O V A T I O N S7 3 W 1 6 6 6 3 J A N E S V I L L E MU S K E G O , W I 5 3 1 5 0 RE F L E C T E D C E I L I N G P L A N OW N E R PR E L I M I N A R Y NO T F O R C O N S T R U C T I O N SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"2 MAIN RECELECTED CEILING PLAN - ARCHITECTURAL SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 MAIN REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - DEMO Rev. No. Date 02 05 00.B8 EXISTING WALL TO REMAIN 02 05 00.G1 EXISTING CEILING TILE & GRID TO REMAIN 02 41 19.G9 REMOVE EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD CEILING AS NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM 02 41 19.G10 REMOVE EXISTING ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING AS NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM; SALVAGE EXISTING TILES AND GRID 02 41 19.M5 SEE MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL PLANS FOR FIXTURE REMOVAL 07 26 00.A7 REPAIR ANY PENETRATIONS THROUGH EXISTING VAPOR BARRIER AS NECESSARY 09 22 16.D1 3 5/8" METAL STUD FRAMING 09 29 00.01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD 09 29 00.22 METAL CORNER TRIM 09 29 00.H1 CORNER BEAD 09 51 13.01 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SYSTEM; SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 09 51 13.03 REUSE SALVAGED ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SYSTEM; SEE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN; SEE SPECIFICATIONS 09 51 13.C3 WALL ANGLE FOR METAL CEILING GRID SYSTEM 21 00 00.03 MODIFY EXISTING FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM AS NECESSARY FOR NEW CEILING HEIGHT 23 00 00.17 REWORK EXISTING DUCTWORK AND LOUVERS AS NECESSARY 26 05 00.A2 REWORK EXISTING SPEAKER SYSTEM AS NECESSARY FOR NEW GYPSUM BOARD CEILING SYSTEM SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 DIV-09 - GYP. BRD. WIDE BULKHEAD SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4 SEATING CEILING ABBREVIATIONS ACT1 -ACOUSTICAL CELING TILE, TYPE 1 ACT2 -ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE, TYPE 2 CPT -CARPET TILE CPT-1 -CARPET TILE, STYLE 1 EXST -EXISTING GBP -GYPSUM WALL BOARD, PAINT RB -RESILIENT BASE 1. FINISHES FOR CLOSETS AND AREAS NOT SHOWN SHALL RECEIVE THE SAME FINISH TO THAT OF THE ADJACENT ROOM. 2. JOINT LAYOUT LOCATIONS SHOWN ARE FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY. VERIFY LAYOUT / LOCATIONS WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK AND SUBMIT JOINT LAYOUT DRAWING FOR APPROVAL. 3. VERIFY WALL AND FLOOR TILE PATTERN LAYOUT WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. 4. ALL FLOOR FINISH TRANSITIONS TO BE LOCATED UNDER DOOR CENTERLINES, U.N.O. ROOM FINISH NOTES 5 6 7 8 A B C D D.4 R 1 0 '-0 " R 6'-0 " 26'-3 7/8" 20'-4" CLASSROOM LVT LVT-1 LVT-2 LVT-3 PATH CPT ACCENTS CPT- 2 CPT- 3 CPT- 4 CPT- 5 JUV E N I L E 10 6 NO N - F I C TIO N 10 7 DI S C O V E R Y AR E A 10 5 PA T H 10 0 FIC T I O N 10 1 M A K E R SP A C E 10 2 CL A S S R O O M 10 4 SEA TI N G 10 3 P-5 P-5 P-5 P-5 P-5 P-5 KEY PLANN 1. MULTIPLE CARPETS USED. ALTERNATE BETWEEN ROW OF SOLID CPT-2 AND ROW WITH CPT-2 AND ACCENT COLORS. SEE ROOM FINISH PLAN FOR PATTERN AND ACCENT COLORS. 2. SEE ROOM FINISH PLAN FOR PATTERN. 3. SEE ROOM FINISH PLAN FOR LOCATION OF ACCENT WALLS. 4. REINSTALL SALVAGED CEILING TILE. 5. PAINT CURVED SOFFIT AT MAKER SPACE P-3. COMMENTS Si o u x C i t y , I A (7 1 2 ) 2 5 2 -38 8 9 De s M o i n e s , I A (5 1 5 ) 2 8 8 -20 0 0 ww w . FE H DE S I G N . C O M © FE H D E S I G N Sh e e t T i t l e Pr o j e c t T i t l e Date Issued Project Number Sheet In A s s o c i a t i o n W i t h KEYNOTES De l a f i e l d , W I (2 6 2 ) 9 6 8 -20 5 5 Du b u q u e , I A (5 6 3 ) 5 8 3 -49 0 0 11/14/2017 4:20:35 PM C:\Users\emilyh\Documents\2017307 - Muskego Library Children's Area - Central - R17c_emilyh.rvt A9.1 2017307 11/14/2017 MU S K E G O L I B R A R Y C H I L D R E N ' S AR E A R E N O V A T I O N S7 3 W 1 6 6 6 3 J A N E S V I L L E MU S K E G O , W I 5 3 1 5 0 FL O O R F I N I S H P L A N OW N E R ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE NUMBER NAME FLOOR FINISH BASE FINISH WALL CEILING COMMENTSNORTH SOUTH EAST WEST FINISH CEILING HEIGHT 100 PATH CPT - - - - - GBP-2 8'-7" 1 101 FICTION CPT-1 RB-1 P-1 P-5 EXST ACT EXST 102 MAKER SPACE LVT-4 RB-1 P-4 - P-5 P-5 ACT 3, 5 103 SEATING CPT - - - - - GBP-2 8'-11" 1 104 CLASSROOM LVT RB-1 P-5 P-5 P-5 P-5 EXST ACT 2 105 DISCOVERY AREA CPT-1 RB-1 P-1 - P-5 - EXST ACT 3 106 JUVENILE CPT-1 RB-1 P-1 P-1 - P-1 EXST ACT 107 NON-FICTION CPT-1 RB-1 - P-1 - - EXST ACT E001 MEDIA - E002 STORAGE - E003 STORAGE - E004 OFFICE -NOT FOR CONSTRUCTIONSCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 CHILDREN'S FLOOR FINISH PLAN Rev. No. Date 5 6 7 8 A B C D D.4 30'-0"30'-0"30'-0" 21'-6" 30'-0" 30'-0" 30'-0" 3'-6" 3'-6" 3'- 6 " 3'- 6 " 4'- 0 " 5'- 6 " EX 2EX11EX3EX1EX23EX6EX13EX14EX15ADD (1) DFEX16EX12EX22EX20EX21EX19EX17EX18EX10EX7EX9EX8EX4EX5CDCDCDADD (1) DF ADD (1) DF B-1 B-1 CH-1 CH-2 CH-1CH-1CH-1 CH-1 CH-1 CH-7c CH-7b T-2 CH-7a CH-7d EQ-5 EQ-5 CH-6c CH-6bT-1CH-6a CH-6d EQ-1 EQ-1 EQ-1 EQ-7EQ-6 EQ-8 T-3 CH-8CH-9 CH-9 T-3CH-8 EQ-4 EQ-4 EQ-2 EQ-2 ST-1 CH-6c CH-6b T-1 CH-6a CH-6d CH-6c CH-6b T-1 CH-6a CH-6d CH-6c CH-6b T-1 CH-6a CH-6d CH-4 3'-1 0" 3'-6 " 3'-6 "*CENTER ON CORNER 3'-6 " 3'-6 " 3'-6 " 3'-6 " 3'-6 " CH-5bCH-5cCH-5a CH-5d CH-5b CH-5a CH-3bCH-3dCH-3cCH-3a CH-3a CH-3dCH-3b EXISTING FARM TABLE SH-2 (4) SH-2 (9) 3'-6 " 3'-6 " 3'-6 " 3'-6 " 3'-6" 3'-6" 3'-6" EQ-11 EQ-3 EQ-10 EQ-9 5 6 7 8 A B C D D.4 30'-0"30'-0"30'-0" 21'-6" 30'-0" 30'-0" 30'-0" EX6 EX5 EX4 EX3 EX7 EX8 EX9 EX10 EX22 EX21 EX20 EX19 EX18 EX17 EX16 EX15 EX14 EX13 EX12 EX11 EX1 EX2EX23 KEY PLANN Si o u x C i t y , I A (7 1 2 ) 2 5 2 -38 8 9 De s M o i n e s , I A (5 1 5 ) 2 8 8 -20 0 0 ww w . FE H DE S I G N . C O M © FE H D E S I G N Sh e e t T i t l e Pr o j e c t T i t l e Date Issued Project Number Sheet In A s s o c i a t i o n W i t h KEYNOTES De l a f i e l d , W I (2 6 2 ) 9 6 8 -20 5 5 Du b u q u e , I A (5 6 3 ) 5 8 3 -49 0 0 11/14/2017 4:20:36 PM C:\Users\emilyh\Documents\2017307 - Muskego Library Children's Area - Central - R17c_emilyh.rvt A10.1 2017307 11/14/2017 MU S K E G O L I B R A R Y C H I L D R E N ' S AR E A R E N O V A T I O N S7 3 W 1 6 6 6 3 J A N E S V I L L E MU S K E G O , W I 5 3 1 5 0 FU R N I T U R E L A Y O U T OW N E R SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"2 CHILDREN'S AREA - NEW FURNITURE LAYOUT Rev. No. DateNOT FOR CONSTRUCTIONSCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0"1 CHILDREN'S AREA - EXISTING FURNITURE FURNITURE PLAN SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY 5 6 7 8 A B C D D.4 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 CLOCK TELEVISION OUTLETTV WALL TELEPHONE OUTLET TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET PAGING SPEAKER - CEILING MOUNT X W TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET, FLOOR MOUNTED TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET, CEILING MOUNTED WIRELESS ACCESS POINT TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ABOVE COUNTERX WAP V VOLUME CONTROL PAGING SPEAKER - WALL MOUNT SYMBOL SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ABOVE COUNTER FLOOR MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE RECEPTACLES IN SURFACE RACEWAY ASSEMBLY RECEPTACLES SYMBOL DESCRIPTION DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE G - GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER CEILING MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE EWC - ELECTRIC WATER COOLER SINGLE POLE (LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATES SWITCH LEG) DOUBLE POLE THREE WAY FOUR WAY DIMMER PILOT LIGHT TIMER OCCUPANCY SENSOR - SEE SCHEDULE EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL RELAY, UL924 LISTED INDOOR PHOTO SENSOR - DAYLIGHT SENSOR - SEE SCHEDULE SWITCHES SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 2 - 3 - 4 - D - PL - T - SURFACE/ RECESSED LINEAR, NORMAL POWER SURFACE/ RECESSED LINEAR, EMERGENCY POWER SURFACE/SUSPENDED, NORMAL POWER SURFACE/SUSPENDED, EMERGENCY POWER DENOTES WALL MOUNTING OF LIGHT SURFACE / RECESSED DOWNLIGHT, NORMAL POWER SURFACE / RECESSED DOWNLIGHT, EMERGENCY POWER EXIT SIGN, CEILING MOUNTED - FACES AND ARROWS AS SHOWN BATTERY PACK EMERGENCY LIGHTING F1 23 a CONTROL DEVICE FIXTURE TYPE CIRCUIT LIGHTING FIXTURES SYMBOL DESCRIPTION ER WALL MOUNTED SCONCE OR WALLPACK, NORMAL POWER WALL MOUNTED SCONCE OR WALLPACK, EMERGENCY POWER RECESSED DOWNLIGHT, NORMAL POWER SENSOR TYPE SWITCHING DESIGNATION #osa #pca KEYEDK - SR 1 RACEWAY DESIGNATION, SEE SURFACE RACEWAY SCHEDULE W - WEATHER RESISTANT TV - TELEVISION OUTLET, ISOLATED GROUND TYPE. USB - INTEGRAL USB CHARGER X FB#RECESSED FLOOR BOX - SEE FLOOR BOX SCHEDULE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE TYPES: T - TAMPER RESISTANT SURFACE / RECESSED WALL WASH, NORMAL POWER SURFACE / RECESSED WALL WASH, EMERGENCY POWER LINEAR WALL WASH, NORMAL POWER LINEAR WALL WASH, EMERGENCY POWER LINEAR PENDANT, NORMAL POWER COVE STRIP, NORMAL POWER LINEAR WALL MOUNTED, NORMAL POWER SURFACE/SUSPENDED PENDANT, NORMAL POWER RECESSED MULTI SPOT, NORMAL POWER FLOOR BOX DESIGNATION, SEE FLOOR BOX SCHEDULE IG - ISOLATED GROUND PRJ - CEILING MOUNTED VIDEO PROJECTOR, ISOLATED GROUND TYPE WB - INTERACTIVE WHITEBOARD VACANCY SENSOR - SEE SCHEDULE SENSOR TYPE SWITCHING DESIGNATION SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE EMERGENCY DUPLEX RECEPTACLE EMERGENCY QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE EMERGENCY DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ABOVE COUNTER EMERGENCY SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE ABOVE COUNTER SWITCH TYPES: X EXIT SIGN, WALL MOUNTED - FACES AND ARROWS AS SHOWN TASK LIGHT - POSITIONAL BASE TYPE. OS D VS - ROUGH-IN ONLY - ROUGH-IN ONLY - ROUGH-IN ONLY - ROUGH-IN ONLY - ROUGH-IN ONLY - ROUGH-IN ONLY - ROUGH-IN ONLY - ROUGH-IN ONLY - ROUGH-IN ONLY - ROUGH-IN ONLY - ROUGH-IN ONLY SWITCH STATION - SEE SCHEDULESS GENERAL NOTES: ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL HAVE GROUND CONDUCTORS. PROVIDE SEPARATE NEUTRAL FOR EACH BRANCH CIRCUIT PHASE CONDUCTOR. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE, IF REQUIRED, ADJUSTMENTS (±) 6'-0" IN THE LOCATION OF ALL SYSTEM DEVICES, FIXTURES, OUTLETS, PANELS, ETC. IN ORDER TO EXPEDITE THE ELECTRICAL WORK. THE POSITION OF ALL WORK AS SHOWN IS INTENDED TO BE FIXED AND IN THE PROPER LOCATION. SUCH REQUIRED ADJUSTMENT SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE A/E. ALL RECEPTACLES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH LABELS IDENTIFYING THE PANEL NAME AND CIRCUIT BRANCH, FIRMLY ATTACHED, TO THE OUTSIDE OF THE COVERPLATE. SEE ARCHITECTURAL SHEETS FOR EXACT LOCATION OF DEVICES. DEVICES SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS. COORDINATE LOCATION OF DEVICES WITH ARCHITECT'S FIELD PERSON TO ENSURE PROPER LOCATION AND HEIGHT. WHERE NEW DEVICES ARE SHOWN THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL DO ALL CUTTING. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL DO ALL PATCHING AND PAINTING OF EXISTING WALLS. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION. WHERE POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MAY USE EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUIT BUT NEW CIRCUIT WIRING WILL NEED TO BE PULLED. GENERAL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS: T IS MANDATORY THAT THE EXISTING BUILDING REMAIN IN CONTINUOUS AND NON-INTERRUPTED OPERATION DURING REMODELING/ALTERING. SERVICES TO EXISTING BUILDING SHALL BE KEPT ON CONTINUOUS OPERATION INCLUDING POWER, LIGHTING, TELEPHONE, FIRE ALARM, ETC. ANY ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY INTERRUPTION OF THESE SERVICES TO ACCOMPLISH PROJECT CONSTRUCTION, SHALL BE HELD TO A MINIMUM AND ARRANGED WITH THE OWNER THROUGH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TWO (2) WEEKS IN ADVANCE. TEMPORARY SERVICES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED WHERE NECESSARY TO ACCOMPLISH THIS PURPOSE. TEMPORARIES SHALL BE REMOVED ONLY AFTER NEW PERMANENT SERVICES ARE INSTALLED AND FULLY OPERATIONAL. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR HIS OWN DEMOLITION, REMOVAL, CAPPING, STORING, ABANDONING, DISCONNECTING, RELOCATING AND RECONNECTION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL. ALL CUTTING, PATCHING, REPAIRING, REPLACEMENT AND REFINISHING, SHALL MATCH THE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION AS NEARLY AS POSSIBLE. EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE SHOWN OR NOTED ON DRAWING - "TO BE RETAINED, RELOCATED" OR HEREINAFTER NOTED, ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL IN AREAS TO BE REMODELED/ALTERED SHALL BE REMOVED WHERE THEY INTERFERE WITH PROPOSED NEW CONSTRUCTION AND/OR INTERFERE WITH PROPOSED USAGE OF SPACE BY OWNER AS FOLLOWS: A. REMOVE ALL CONCEALED RACEWAYS, BOXES AND WIRING FROM PARTITIONS BEING DEMOLISHED. B. ANY FEEDERS, CONDUITS, BRANCH CIRCUITS, SIGNAL AND TELEPHONE CIRCUITS, ETC. PASSING THROUGH THE REMODELED AREAS TO SERVE (OR BE SERVED FROM) EXISTING ADJACENT, REMOTE OR SURROUNDING AREAS THAT ARE TO REMAIN, SHALL BE RETAINED AND KEPT OPERATIONAL AND SHALL BE REROUTED IN ALL CASES WHERE THEY INTERFERE WITH ANY NEW WORK OR USAGE TO BE ACCOMPLISHED IN THE REMODELED AREA. C. WHERE DEVICES ARE OMITTED FROM PRESENT BRANCH CIRCUITS, THE REMAINING DEVICES SHALL BE REWIRED, IF NEEDED AND AS REQUIRED, TO REMAIN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE CIRCUITS AND IN OPERATING CONDITION. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS TO FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH EXTENT OF ALTERATION/REMODELING WORK AND MORE SPECIFICALLY NOTE WHERE NEW PARTITIONING IS BEING INSTALLED, WHERE EXISTING PARTITIONING IS BEING REMOVED, WHERE CEILINGS ARE BEING REMOVED AND OR REPLACED, ETC. ALL WIRING (POWER, LIGHTING) NOT REUSED FOR REMODELING AREAS SHALL BE COMPLETELY REMOVED BACK TO ASSOCIATED PANELS. EMPTY BOXES AND CONDUITS SHALL BE REMOVED BEYOND REMODELED AREA (ABOVE CEILING). THE OWNER SHALL HAVE THE FIRST CHOICE TO ACCEPT EXISTING DEVICES BEING REMOVED. Si o u x C i t y , I A (7 1 2 ) 2 5 2 -38 8 9 De s M o i n e s , I A (5 1 5 ) 2 8 8 -20 0 0 ww w . FE H DE S I G N . C O M © FE H DE S I G N Sh e e t T i t l e Pr o j e c t T i t l e Date Issued Project Number Sheet In A s s o c i a t i o n W i t h De l a f i e l d , W I (2 6 2 ) 9 6 8 -20 5 5 Du b u q u e , I A (5 6 3 ) 5 8 3 -49 0 0 11/13/2017 12:29:47 PM C: \ U s e r s \ j h a z e l t i n e \ D o c u m e n t s \ 9 2 1 3 M u s k e g o L i b r a r y M E P 2 0 1 7 _ j h a ze l t i n e . r v t E1.1 2017307 11/14/2017 MU S K E G O L I B R A R Y C H I L D R E N ' S AR E A R E N O V A T I O N S7 3 W 1 6 6 6 3 J A N E S V I L L E MU S K E G O , W I 5 3 1 5 0 EL E C T R I C A L N O T E S , S Y M B O L S , AB B R E V I A T I O N S A N D D E M O L I T I O N P L A N OW N E R Rev. No. Date #KEYED SHEET NOTES: 1. REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE. RECONFIGURE BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING AND RACEWAY TO ACCOMMODATE REMOVAL AND MAINTAIN CONNECTIVITY TO EXISTING FIXTURES TO REMAIN. 2. FOR BIDDING, ASSUME BRANCH CIRCUIT RACEWAY IS ROUTED HORIZONTALLY IN WALL BETWEEN DEVICES. RECONFIGURE TO BE ROUTED OVERHEAD TO ACCOMODATE REMOVED PORTION OF WALL. 3. REMOVE DEVICE AND WIRING. CONDUIT AND BACK BOX IS PERMITTED TO BE ABANDONED IN WALL. RECONFIGURE WIRING ABOVE CEILING TO SUPPORT UPSTREAM / DOWNSTREAM DEVICES FED THROUGH THIS LOCATION. 12"0 1'8'16 ' 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 CHILDREN'S AREA - DEMOLITION PLAN L 5 6 7 8 A B C D D.4 NO N - F I C TIO N 10 7 FIC T I O N 10 1 MA K E R SP A C E 10 2 CL A S S R O O M 10 4 DI S C O V E R Y AR E A 10 5 JUV E N I L E 10 6 PA T H 10 0 SEA TI N G 10 3 ST O R A G E E0 0 3 OF F I C E E0 0 4 ST O R A G E E0 0 2 ME D I A E0 0 1 D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a D1 aD1 a D1 a D1 a D1 a C24 C48 C24 C48 C24 C24 C24 C24 P54 b P36 b P36 b C24 W1 D2 D2D2 D2 D2 D1 a 7'-11" BOT. OF FIXTURE 7'-0" BOT. OF FIXTURE 7'-0" BOT. OF FIXTURE 1 2TYP. D 4 E1.2 3 D5 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 1 12'-6" BOT. OF FIXTURE 6 7 D D b a8 LB PB 5 6 7 8 A B C D D.4 NO N - F I C TIO N 10 7 FIC T I O N 10 1 MA K E R SP A C E 10 2 CL A S S R O O M 10 4 DI S C O V E R Y AR E A 10 5 JUV E N I L E 10 6 PA T H 10 0 SEA TI N G 10 3 ST O R A G E E0 0 3 OF F I C E E0 0 4 ST O R A G E E0 0 2 ME D I A E0 0 1 3 TV TV 3 PBLB A. REFER TO INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REGARDING FIXTURE, BALLAST OR DIRVER REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. B. NOTED LUMEN QUANTITY IS DELIVERED LUMEN OUTPUT. C. NOTED DIMMING RANGE INDICATES MINIMUM PARAMETERS. LUMINAIRES WITH GREATER DIMMING RANGE ARE PERMITED. D. ALL EXIT SIGNS ARE TYPE X1 OR X2 UNLESS DESIGNATED OTHERWISE ON THE LIGHTING PLANS. E. FIXTURES NOTED IN THIS SCHEDULE ARE TO ESTABLISH A BASIS OF DESIGN. PRODUCTS OTHER THAN THOSE LISTED IN THE SCHEDULE ARE PERMITTED SUBJECT TO MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SCHEDULED FIXTURES QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ENERGY, AESTHETICS, DIMENSIONS, ETC... ELD -ELECTRONIC LED DRIVER OR POWER SUPPLY EPS -ELECTRONIC PROGRAM START FLUORESCENT BALLAST EPSD -ELECTRONIC PROGRAM START STEP DIMMING BALLAST: 0/50/100 DIM -DIMMING 0-10V -ZERO TO TEN VOLT DC DIMMING FEATURE FDB -FLUORESCENT DIMMING BALLAST GWB -GYPSUM WALL BOARD, DRYWALL ACT -ACOUSTICAL CEILILNG TILE IN SUSPENDED GRID SYSTEM, ACCESSIBLE LMNS -LUMENS BF -BALLAST FACTOR ECO -LUTRON ECOSYSTEM COMPATICBLE BALLAST CMU -CONCRETE MASONRY BLOCK TBD -TO BE DETERMINED MVOLT -120 & 277 VOLT COMPATIBLE CFL -COMPACT FLUORESCENT MLV -MAGNETIC LOW VOLTAGE UC -UNDERCABINET GENERAL NOTES ABBREVIATIONS #24 AWG 2-PAIR TWISTED SHIELDED USITT DMX512-A CABLE 0-10V DIMMING SIGNAL CABLE 277V WHITE LED SWITCH LEG FROM DIMMER 277V RGB LED CONSTANT POWER 120V DMX CONTROLLER POWER 277V DIMMER LINE SIDE 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 WHITE LED 0-10V DIMMER. LUTRON DIVA RGB LED DMX CONTROLLER. NICOLAUDIE STICK DE-3. SUPPLY WITH BACK BOX POWER SUPPLY. WIRE LEGEND: TYPE C24 / C48 1. EACH C24 / C48 TO HAVE ITS ASSOCIATED RGB CONTROLLER UNIQUELY ADDRESSED TO ALLOW FOR INDIVIDUAL CONTROL OF EACH FIXTURE. 2. DMX SIGNAL CABLE SHALL BE DAISY CHAINED TO ALL FIXTURES. PROVIDE TERMINATOR AT END OF RUN. 3. CLASSROOM SPACE DMX CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROGRAMMED WITH UP TO 12 CUSTOM SCENES AS DETERMINED BY OWNER AND & A/E AT SYSTEM START UP. 4. PROVIDE STICK DE3 CONTROLLER WITH LIGHTPAD APP FOR INSTALLATION ON OWNER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT. INCLUDE INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING AND TRAINING OF APPLICATION USE IN BID. 5. ALL PROGRAMMING AND TRAINING SHALL BE DONE BY A DMX SYSTEM INTEGRATOR AND INCLUDED IN BID. 6. ALL WHITE LED SHALL BE CONNECTED TO A COMMON 0-10V DIMMER. SYSTEM NOTES: Si o u x C i t y , I A (7 1 2 ) 2 5 2 -38 8 9 De s M o i n e s , I A (5 1 5 ) 2 8 8 -20 0 0 ww w . FE H DE S I G N . C O M © FE H DE S I G N Sh e e t T i t l e Pr o j e c t T i t l e Date Issued Project Number Sheet In A s s o c i a t i o n W i t h De l a f i e l d , W I (2 6 2 ) 9 6 8 -20 5 5 Du b u q u e , I A (5 6 3 ) 5 8 3 -49 0 0 11/13/2017 12:30:09 PM C: \ U s e r s \ j h a z e l t i n e \ D o c u m e n t s \ 9 2 1 3 M u s k e g o L i b r a r y M E P 2 0 1 7 _ j h a ze l t i n e . r v t E1.2 2017307 11/14/2017 MU S K E G O L I B R A R Y C H I L D R E N ' S AR E A R E N O V A T I O N S7 3 W 1 6 6 6 3 J A N E S V I L L E MU S K E G O , W I 5 3 1 5 0 EL E C T R I C A L F L O O R P L A N S OW N E R 12"0 1'8'16 ' 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 CHILDREN'S AREA - LIGHTING PLAN Rev. No. Date 12"0 1'8'16 ' 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 CHILDREN'S AREA - POWER PLAN #KEYED SHEET NOTES: 1. FINAL MOUNTING HEIGHT OF PENDANTS DETERMINED BY A/E BASED UPON FIELD MOCK-UP PROVIDED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 2. ADJUST EXISTING CEILING GRID AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW FIXTURES. PROVIDE SUPPLEMENTAL WIRE OR CABLE SUPPORTS FROM TYPES C24 & C48 TO STRUCTURE ABOVE CEILING. 3. DEVICE INSTALLED AT OWNER FURNISHED TECHNOLOGY EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH OWNER PRIOR TO ROUGH IN. 4. PROVIDE 120V UNSWITCHED CONTROL POWER TO DMX CONTROLLER FROM ROOM RECEPTACLE CIRCUIT. 5. REPLACE EXISTING DUAL LEVEL SWITCHING STATION WITH NEW 0-10V DIMMER FOR CONTROL OF NEW SUSPENDED LIGHTING IN MAKER SPACE 102. 6. CONFIRM MOUNTING HEIGHT WITH A/E PRIOR TO ROUGH IN TO ENSURE COORDINATION WITH SIGNAGE ABOVE. FIXTURE IS WALL CANTILEVER MOUNTE TO INDIRECTLY LIGHT "KIDS" SIGN ABOVE. 7. LOCATE REMOTE POWER SUPPLY ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING. 8. LOCATE DIMMERS FLUSH IN EXISTING WALL AT 60" AFF. DEVICES ARE INTENDED TO PROVIDE LIGHTING LEVEL ADJUSTMENTS TO CONNECTED FIXTURES. ONLY THE 0-10VDC SIGNAL WIRING IS REQUIRED TO BE ROUTED THROUGH THE DIMMER. SWITCHING WILL OCCUR BY WAY OF THE EXISTING LIGHTING CONTROLS SERVING THE 2X4 FIXTURES IN THIS AREA. LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE DESIGNATION FIXTURE SOURCE DRIVER MOUNTING MANUFACTURER SEE NOTE COMMENTSTYPE TYPE TEMP CRI QTY TYPE DIM TYPE DIM RANGE INPUT WATTS VOLTAGE LOCATION CONFIGURATION SURFACE TYPE HEIGHT NAME MODEL NUMBER C24 Recessed Round LED - 24" Diameter LED 3500 K 82 3277 ELD 0-10V 10-100% 35 VA 277 V CEILING RECESSED GRID PINNACLE F24-A-D35/RGBX-G-U-OL1-1-W RGB(DMX) AND WHITE LED (0-10V) CONTROLLED INDEPENDANTLY C48 Recessed Round LED - 48" Diameter LED 3500 K 82 3277 ELD 0-10V 10-100% 88 VA 277 V CEILING RECESSED GRID PINNACLE F48-A-D35/RGBX-G-U-OL1-1-W RGB(DMX) AND WHITE LED (0-10V) CONTROLLED INDEPENDANTLY, CUSTOM LUMENS D1 Recessed LED Downlight w/ Glass Ring LED 4000 K 84 400 ELD 0-10V 10-100% 70 VA 277 V CEILING RECESSED/SURFACE GYP. EUREKA 1013BD CFR LED.4.40.48.TL 4W,LED/ 1504C-9.35TL.CC.350.3 D2 Recessed LED Downlight 4in w/ EM Battery LED 3500 K 85 750 ELD 0-10V 10-100% 20 VA 277 V CEILING RECESSED GYP. GOTHAM EVO-35-07-4AR-MWD-LSS-MVOLT-EZ10 P1 Low-Profile LED Strip Light LED 3500 K 80 1925 ELD 0-10V 10-100% 28 VA 277 V CEILING SUSPENDED GRID Prudential Lighting HSS-LED35-LO-4'-SAL-YSL-UNV-CA48"-X3-DM01 P36 Suspended LED Hoop Pendant - 36" Diameter LED 3500 K 85 2772 ELD 0-10V 10-100% 70 VA 277 V CEILING SUSPENDED GYP. EUREKA 4800-36-LED-35-277V-DV-RDP-AC-60-RC-WHM-WHM-3981C P54 Suspended LED Hoop Pendant - 54" Diameter LED 3500 K 85 4470 ELD 0-10V 10-100% 70 VA 277 V CEILING SUSPENDED GYP. EUREKA 4800-54-LED-35-277V-DV-RDP-AC-60-RC-WHM-WHM-3981C W1 Wall Mount LED Cantilever Sign Light LED 3500 K 80 4580 ELD 0-10V 10-100% 30 VA 277 V WALL SURFACE GYP. ARCH. LIGHTING WORKS RLP1SM.18-8-LOW-0/10/10-UNV GENERAL SHEET NOTES: 1. ALL LIGHTING IS CONNECTED TO EXISTING 277V BRANCH CIRCUITS (PANEL LB) SERVING THIS AREA OF THE LIBRARY. 2. ALL RECEPTACLES ARE CONNECT TO EXISTING 120V BRANCH CIRCUITS (PANEL PB) SERVING THIS AREA OF THE LIBRARY. NO SCALE 3 DMX CONTROLLER SCHEMATIC Membership in the Library System TE17-1 17 Membership in the Library System Before the development of public library systems in Wisconsin, many state residents had no legal access to any public library. In addition, many other state residents only had access to substandard library service. The goal of library systems has been to provide all Wisconsin residents with access to the high-quality library service needed to meet personal, work, educational, and community goals. To address the limitations of relying solely on local support and local coordination of library service, the Wisconsin legislature passed legislation in 1971 enabling the creation of regional public library systems. The actual creation and development of public library systems in Wisconsin was a voluntary and gradual process. No county or public library is required to be a member of a library system; yet, as of this writing, all of Wisconsin’s 72 counties and 381 public libraries are library system members. The basic dynamic of library system membership is simple, yet the results can be powerful: a public library agrees to certain membership requirements, including the agreement to serve all system residents equitably; in return, the library system provides a wide range of primarily state-funded services that enhance local library service. Ideally, through this relationship, all residents of the state gain improved library service, as well as the ability to use whichever library or libraries best serve their needs. Municipal libraries participate in library systems because their communities’ residents benefit from this arrangement. Cooperation vs. Competition Competition among municipalities, counties, and other divisions of government is common. Unfortunately, that competition often leads to missed opportunities for cooperation, resource sharing, and economies of scale through cooperative projects. Libraries, through library systems, have embraced cooperation instead of competition, and local library users (and taxpayers) are the beneficiaries. But, as noted by the Rolling Stones, you can’t always get what you want. In all cooperative efforts, sacrifices are sometimes required. Often these sacrifices are for the greater benefit of regional or statewide library users. In This Trustee Essential  The benefits of system membership  The requirements for system membership  How you and your library can help make your library system stronger TE17-2 Trustee Essentials: A Handbook for Wisconsin Public Library Trustees Membership Requirements for Libraries Your library must meet these statutory requirements to be a member of a library system: 1. Your library must be established and operated according to the requirements of Wisconsin Statutes Chapter 43. Among other things, Chapter 43 requires that a properly appointed library board control the library building, library expenditures, library policies, hiring and supervision of the library director, and determination of the duties and compensation of all library staff. (See other Trustee Essentials for details on these requirements, including Trustee Essential #2: Who Runs the Library and Trustee Essential #18: Library Board Appointments and Composition.) 2. Your county must belong to the library system and must meet the system membership requirements for counties (see below). 3. Your municipal governing body (or county board for a consolidated county public library) must approve a resolution authorizing your library to participate in the library system. 4. Your library board must approve an agreement with the library system to participate in the system and its activities, participate in interlibrary loan of materials with other system libraries, and provide to all residents of the system the same services, on the same terms, that you provide to local residents. 5. You must employ a library director with the appropriate certification from the Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction (see Trustee Essential #19: Library Director Certification for details) and whose employment requires that he or she be present in the library for at least 10 hours of each week that the library is open to the public, less leave time. 6. Beginning in 2008, your library annually must be open to the public an average of at least 20 hours each week except that for a library in existence on June 3, 2006, is open to the public an average of at least 20 hours or the number of hours each week that the library was open to the public in 2005, whichever is fewer. 7. Beginning in 2008, your library annually spends at least $2,500 on library materials. Membership in the Library System TE17-3 Membership Requirements for Counties Your county must meet these statutory requirements to be a member in a library system: 1. Your county must approve a county library plan that meets the requirements of Wisconsin Statutes Sections 43.11(3) and 43.13(1) and provides the financial support needed to administer the plan (see http://dpi.wi.gov/pld/legislation-funding/county-library for details of these requirements). 2. Your county board must approve an agreement with the library system to participate in the system and its activities and to furnish library service to county residents who do not live in a library municipality. Required System Services Library systems must provide the following in order to receive state aid:  Technology and resource sharing planning  Referral or routing of reference and interlibrary loan requests  Electronic delivery of information and physical delivery of library materials  Training for member library staff and trustees  Professional consultant services  Support for library service to users with special needs  Backup reference, information, and interlibrary loan services from the system resource library  Planning with other types of libraries in the system area  Service agreements with all adjacent library systems  Agreements with each member library that require those libraries to serve all residents of the system area on the same basis as local residents The Division for Libraries and Technology monitors compliance with these requirements. Each library system is allowed considerable flexibility in developing specific library system service programs so that each system can best meet the needs of the residents of its particular geographical area and the needs of its member libraries. For example, a system in a largely rural area with many small libraries will probably need to devote more resources to professional consultant services than a system in a largely urban area. Each area of the state will have unique needs that the library system can help address. TE17-4 Trustee Essentials: A Handbook for Wisconsin Public Library Trustees How to Be a Good System Member Your library system must respond to the needs of system member libraries and the residents of the system area. This can be a very difficult task, often requiring the balancing of many competing needs and interests. Your library can help the library system with this difficult task by communicating your local needs effectively and constructively and by cooperating in system planning and problem-solving activities. Your board can help by encouraging your library staff to attend system workshops and contribute their time and talents to system committees. Your board should also budget for paid staff time and travel costs for these activities. Your board may also decide that your library should participate in shared system services (such as a shared automated system) and cooperative activities (such as the sharing of summer reading program performers). Cooperation can often result in better, more cost-effective services to the public—as well as services that would not even be possible without cooperation. You, as an individual trustee, can also benefit from attendance at system workshops and can contribute to the strength and success of the system by volunteering to serve on your library system’s board and/or the system’s advisory and planning committees. (For more information about being a system trustee, see Trustee Essential #26: The Public Library System Trustee—the Broad Viewpoint.) Discussion Questions 1. What are examples of ways your community’s residents have benefited from library system services? 2. What are examples of ways your system could better serve your library and your community’s residents? How can you and/or your library board influence your system to do those things? Sources of Additional Information  Your library system staff (See Trustee Tool B: Library System Map and Contact Information.)  Division for Libraries and Technology staff (See Trustee Tool C: Division for Libraries and Technology Contact Information.) Trustee Essentials: A Handbook for Wisconsin Public Library Trustees was prepared by the DLT with the assistance of the Trustee Handbook Revision Task Force. © 2002, 2012, 2015, 2016 Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction. Duplication and distri- bution for not-for-profit purposes are permitted with this copyright no- tice. This publication is also available online at http://dpi.wi.gov/pld/boa rds-directors/trustee- essentials-handbook S73W16663 W Janesville Rd Muskego, WI 53150 P 262.971.2100 W cityofmuskego.org/library IDEAS. INFORMATION. COMMUNITY Annual Library Board Calendar January • Director meets with Personnel committee to review his/her upcoming annual goals and objectives. • Board approves upcoming annual director goals. February • Annual report reviewed, approved and forwarded to municipal governing body, Bridges and DLT. March April • Appointments of new board members made by the municipality. • Nominating committee appointed. • Allowable costs form approved by Board and sent to Bridges. May • New member board terms begin. • Orientation sessions held for new board members. • Board annual meeting held, board officers elected. June • Strategic Planning committee conducts annual plan assessment and reviews potential upcoming year action plan items. • Director provides board with preliminary recommendations for budget priorities for coming year. July • Director presents draft budget for coming year. Board discusses and directs any needed changes. August • Budget and funding request approved for upcoming year. • Board certifies standards exemption. S73W16663 W Janesville Rd Muskego, WI 53150 P 262.971.2100 W cityofmuskego.org/library IDEAS. INFORMATION. COMMUNITY September • Municipalities that levy a tax for public library service apply for an exemption from next year’s county library levy. October • Municipality approves library appropriation. • Personnel Committee meets to review the director evaluation form. November • Budget revised, if necessary, based on actual funding approved. • Strategic planning committee recommends Annual Action plan • Board adopts Annual Action plan. • Director evaluation from is distributed to Board members. • Personnel Committee gathers information from outside agencies for director evaluation. December • Personnel Committee reviews director evaluation forms and creates a recommended evaluation. • Board conducts annual performance review of director.